Loading...
6262C - Construction of Fire Station #4, Addendum 1PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1 (Div’s 0-14) FOR Fire Station No. 4 Sherman Drive at Kings Row Denton, Texas ARCHITECT: KIRKPATRICK ARCHITECTURE STUDIO 100 West Mulberry Denton, Texas 76201 940.387.8182 voice Contact: David Robinson david@k-a-studio.com CIVIL ENGINEER:MJ THOMAS ENGINEERING 3973 West Vickery Blvd., Suite 103 Fort Worth, Texas 76107 817.732.9839 voice Contact: Mickey Thomas mickeyt@mjthomaseng.com STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: L.A. FUESS PARTNERS, INC. 3333 Lee Parkway, Suite 300 Dallas, Texas 75219 214.593.1152 voice Contact: Jason Beyer jasonbeyer@lafp.com MEP ENGINEERS: MD ENGINEERING, LLP 500 North Central Expressway, Suite 310 Plano, Texas 75074 469.467.0200 voice Contact: Michael Smith msmith@md-eng.com LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CHRISTOPHER RUSSELL 5925 La Vista, Suite 3 Dallas, Texas 75206 214.695.7344 voice Contact: Chris Russell chris@christopher-russell.com LIGHTING DESIGNER: EX DESIGN GROUP 326 Howell Street Dallas, Texas 75207 972.360.6490 voice Contact: Victor Menendez victor@exdesigngroup.com DATE: 20 July 2016 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DOCUMENT 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000100 Title Page ..............................................................................13 June 2016 000110 Table of Contents ...................................................................13 June 2016 003132 Geotechnical Data ..................................................................13 June 2016 Geotechnical Report for Denton Fire Station No. 4 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012100 Allowances .............................................................................13 June 2016 012200 Unit Prices ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012300 Alternates ..............................................................................13 June 2016 012500 Substitution Procedures .........................................................13 June 2016 012500.13 Substitution Request Form .....................................................13 June 2016 012600 Contract Modification Procedures ..........................................13 June 2016 012900 Payment Procedures ..............................................................13 June 2016 013100 Project Management & Coordination ......................................13 June 2016 013200 Construction Progress Documentation ...................................13 June 2016 013233 Photographic Documentation .................................................13 June 2016 013300 Submittal Procedures .............................................................13 June 2016 013520 LEED Requirements ...............................................................13 June 2016 LEED Credit Checklist Material Reporting Form VOC Reporting Form 014000 Quality Requirements .............................................................13 June 2016 014200 References .............................................................................13 June 2016 014339 Mock-Up Wall Construction ....................................................13 June 2016 015000 Temporary Facilities & Controls .............................................13 June 2016 015639 Temporary Tree & Plant Protection ........................................13 June 2016 015713 Erosion & Sedimentation Control ...........................................13 June 2016 015720 Indoor Air Quality Plan During Construction ...........................13 June 2016 016000 Product Requirements ............................................................13 June 2016 017300 Execution ..............................................................................13 June 2016 017419 Construction Waste Management & Disposal ........................13 June 2016 017700 Closeout Procedures ..............................................................13 June 2016 017823 Operation & Maintenance Data ..............................................13 June 2016 017839 Project Record Documents .....................................................13 June 2016 017900 Demonstration & Training .......................................................13 June 2016 018119 Indoor Air Quality Requirements ............................................13 June 2016 019113 General Commissioning Requirements ..................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 Demolition (C) ........................................................................13 June 2016 024116 Structure Demolition ...............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 031100 Concrete Forming for Civil Work (C) ......................................13 June 2016 031100 Structural Concrete Formwork (S) ..........................................13 June 2016 032000 Concrete Reinforcing for Civil Work (C)..................................13 June 2016 032000 Concrete Reinforcing (S) ........................................................13 June 2016 033000 Cast -In-Place Concrete for Civil Work (C) .............................13 June 2016 033100 Structural Concrete (S) ...........................................................13 June 2016 033536 Polished Concrete Finish-Premium ........................................13 June 2016 036214 Grouting Steel Base Plates (S) ...............................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry ..........................................................................13 June 2016 047200 Precast Concrete ....................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 Structural Steel (S) .................................................................13 June 2016 052123 Steel Joists & Joist Girders (S) ...............................................13 June 2016 053113 Composite Metal Floor Deck & Field Welded Shear Studs (S) ......................................................................13 June 2016 053123 Metal Roof Deck (S) ...............................................................13 June 2016 054000 Structural Light Gage Steel Framing (S).................................13 June 2016 054400 Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Trusses (S) ........................13 June 2016 055000 Metal Fabrications .................................................................13 June 2016 055120 Prefabricated Steel Stair System ............................................13 June 2016 055213 Pipe & Tube Railings ..............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ............................................13 June 2016 061600 Sheathing .............................................................................13 June 2016 061800 Glued-Laminated Structural Wood (S) ...................................13 June 2016 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry .........................................................13 June 2016 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets ......................13 June 2016 066400 Plastic Paneling ......................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing ......................................................13 June 2016 072100 Thermal Insulation ..................................................................13 June 2016 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier .......................................................13 June 2016 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers .....................................13 June 2016 072730 SPF Insulation ........................................................................13 June 2016 074100 Metal Roof Panels ..................................................................13 June 2016 076210 Flexible Flashing ....................................................................13 June 2016 077100 Roof Specialties .....................................................................13 June 2016 077253 Snow Guards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 078413 Penetration Firestopping ........................................................13 June 2016 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ..................................................13 June 2016 079200 Joint Sealants .........................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................13 June 2016 081416 Flush Wood Doors ..................................................................13 June 2016 083113 Access Doors & Frames .........................................................13 June 2016 083326 Overhead Coiling Grilles.........................................................13 June 2016 083513 Panel Folding Doors ...............................................................13 June 2016 083613 Sectional Doors ......................................................................13 June 2016 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances & Storefronts ...........................13 June 2016 086250 Tubular Daylighting Device .....................................................13 June 2016 087100 Door Hardware .......................................................................13 June 2016 088000 Glazing ..............................................................................13 June 2016 088300 Mirrors .............................................................................13 June 2016 089119 Fixed Louvers .........................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................13 June 2016 092900 Gypsum Board .......................................................................13 June 2016 093013 Ceramic Tiling ........................................................................13 June 2016 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings .......................................................13 June 2016 095429 Wood Panel Ceilings ..............................................................13 June 2016 096240 Sport Flooring .........................................................................13 June 2016 096513 Resilient Base & Accessories .................................................13 June 2016 096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring .........................................................13 June 2016 096813 Tile Carpeting .........................................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 098116 Acoustical Blanket Insulation ..................................................13 June 2016 099100 Painting ..............................................................................13 June 2016 099450 Decorative Exterior Finish System .........................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage ..............................................................................13 June 2016 101453 Traffic Signage (C) .................................................................13 June 2016 102600 Wall & Door Protection ...........................................................13 June 2016 102800 Toilet, Bath & Laundry Accessories ........................................13 June 2016 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets .........................................................13 June 2016 104416 Fire Extinguishers ...................................................................13 June 2016 105510 Turn-Out Gear Lockers...........................................................13 June 2016 107114 Fixed Aluminum Sun Screens ................................................13 June 2016 107516 Ground-Set Flagpoles ..........................................................13 June 2016 109900 Miscellaneous Specialties ......................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances ...........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122112 Horizontal Louver Blinds - Aluminum .....................................13 June 2016 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds – Wood ...........................................13 June 2016 122413 Roller Window Shades ...........................................................13 June 2016 122414 Blackout Window Shades .......................................................13 June 2016 123616 Metal Countertops ..................................................................13 June 2016 123661 Simulated Stone Countertops .................................................13 June 2016 124813 Entrance Floor Mats & Frames ...............................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – not used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – not used VOLUME 2 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 211000 Fire Protection System ...........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing ....................................13 June 2016 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping ..............................13 June 2016 220529 Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & Equipment .........13 June 2016 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment .....................13 June 2016 220700 Plumbing Insulation ...............................................................13 June 2016 221100 Facility Water Distribution .......................................................13 June 2016 221123 Domestic Water Pumps ..........................................................13 June 2016 221300 Facility Sanitary Sewerage .....................................................13 June 2016 221423 Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewers (C) .................................13 June 2016 223436 Commercial Gas Domestic Water Heater ...............................13 June 2016 224200 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures ...............................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC .........................................13 June 2016 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment .............13 June 2016 230529 Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..............13 June 2016 230548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..............................................................................13 June 2016 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment ..........................13 June 2016 230593 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC ..............................13 June 2016 230700 HVAC Insulation ....................................................................13 June 2016 230900 Instrumentation & Control for HVAC .......................................13 June 2016 230993 Sequence of Operation ..........................................................13 June 2016 231123 Facility Natural Gas Piping .....................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 232300 Refrigerant Piping ...................................................................13 June 2016 233113 Metal Ducts ............................................................................13 June 2016 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators ........................................................13 June 2016 233516 Vehicle Exhaust Removal / Filtration System .........................13 June 2016 233700 Air Outlets & Inlets ..................................................................13 June 2016 234100 Particulate Air Filtration ..........................................................13 June 2016 235400 Heat Generation Equipment ...................................................13 June 2016 238149 Refrigeration Equipment .........................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical .....................................13 June 2016 260503 Firestopping ............................................................................13 June 2016 260505 Site Electrical ..........................................................................13 June 2016 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables ..............13 June 2016 260526 Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems .........................13 June 2016 260529 Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems ...........................13 June 2016 260533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems ...............................................13 June 2016 260533.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems ..................................................13 June 2016 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems .......................................13 June 2016 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study ................13 June 2016 260593 Electrical Testing ....................................................................13 June 2016 260620 Disconnect Switches ..............................................................13 June 2016 260943 Network Lighting Controls – Lutron Homeworks QS 120 ......13 June 2016 Bill of Materials Load Schedule Wiring Device Installation Panel Wiring 262116 Low Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance ..........13 June 2016 262413 Switchboards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 262416 Panelboards ..........................................................................13 June 2016 262716 Electrical Cabinets & Enclosures ............................................13 June 2016 262726 Wiring Devices ......................................................................13 June 2016 263213 Packaged Engine Generator Set ............................................13 June 2016 263623 Automatic Transfer Switch .....................................................13 June 2016 264100 Facility Lightning Protection ...................................................13 June 2016 264300 Surge Protective Devices .......................................................13 June 2016 265564 Telephone Raceway ...............................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – not used DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System .................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 310000 Earthwork (C) .........................................................................13 June 2016 310513 Soils for Earthwork (C) ...........................................................13 June 2016 310516 Aggregates for Earthwork (C) .................................................13 June 2016 311100 Clearing & Grubbing (C) .........................................................13 June 2016 311400 Site Preparation (C) ................................................................13 June 2016 312333 Trenching & Backfilling (C) .....................................................13 June 2016 313116 Termite Control .......................................................................13 June 2016 313200 Soil Stabilization (C) ...............................................................13 June 2016 313213 Lime Stabilized Subgrade (C) .................................................13 June 2016 314133 Trench Shielding (C) ..............................................................13 June 2016 315000 Excavation Support & Protection ............................................13 June 2016 316329 Drilled Piers (S) ......................................................................13 June 2016 NUMBER TITLE ISSUE DATE REVISED DATE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 000110 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321243 Porous Flexible Paving ...........................................................13 June 2016 321313 Concrete Paving (C) ...............................................................13 June 2016 321373 Sealants & Caulkings (C) .......................................................13 June 2016 321713 Parking Bumpers ....................................................................13 June 2016 321723 Pavement Markings (C) ..........................................................13 June 2016 323100 Enclosed Track Industrial Aluminum Cantilever Gate System (C) .....................................................................13 June 2016 323119 Steel Ornamental Fence System (C) ......................................13 June 2016 323129 Wood Fences & Gates ...........................................................13 June 2016 323132 Fences & Vehicular Slide Gate Operators (C) ........................13 June 2016 328400 Irrigation (L) ............................................................................13 June 2016 329119 Finish Grading for Landscape Areas (L) .................................13 June 2016 329200 Turf Establishment (Hydromulch) (L) ......................................13 June 2016 329300 Landscaping (L) ......................................................................13 June 2016 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping (C) ............................................13 June 2016 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GEOTECHNICAL DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 003132 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA 1.1 SUMMARY A. This document includes information pertaining to geotechnical data. 1.2 INVESTIGATION A. Investigations of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, and were subsequently performed by D&S Engineering Labs: 1. Report #15-0441, dated April 04, 2016. 1.3 REPORT A. The Geotechnical Investigation Report is for information only, and is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. B. The Report is made available for information only, and is not a Contract Document. C. The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations, and guidelines that were utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the earthwork operations, paving design, and foundation design indicated in the Contract Documents. No changes in these design criteria will be considered or permitted. Where options are indicated, the options were considered by the respective design team members and implemented in the construction documents. 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or stability, or for the presence, level, and extent of underground water. C. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for Bidder’s interpretation of data contained in the Report. END OF DOCUMENT (This page intentionally left blank) Geotechnical Engineering Report  Fire Station No. 4  Denton, TX    April 4, 2016           D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) TABLE OF CONTENTS  PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 1   PURPOSE AND SCOPE ......................................................................................... 1   FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION ....................................................... 2  3.1 General ............................................................................................................. 2  3.2 Laboratory Testing ............................................................................................ 3  Unconfined Compression Tests ............................................................... 3  Overburden Swell Tests ........................................................................... 4   SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 4  4.1 Stratigraphy ....................................................................................................... 4  4.2 Groundwater ..................................................................................................... 5   ENGINEERING ANALYSIS ..................................................................................... 5  5.1 Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) ................................................. 5  5.2 Settlement Potential .......................................................................................... 5   FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................. 5  6.1 Straight-sided Drilled Shafts ............................................................................. 6  Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations ............................................... 7  6.2 Pier-supported Grade Beams and Suspended Floor Slabs .............................. 7   EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................... 8  7.1 Soil Rework ....................................................................................................... 9  7.2 Additional Considerations ............................................................................... 10   PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................... 10  8.1 General ........................................................................................................... 10  8.2 Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils beneath Pavement ................... 10  8.3 Subgrade Preparation Recommendations ...................................................... 11  Soil Preparation – Lime Treatment ........................................................ 11  Soil Preparation – Aggregate Base ........................................................ 12  8.4 Rigid Pavement ............................................................................................... 13  Pavement Joints and Cutting ................................................................. 13   SEISMIC CONSIDERATION ................................................................................. 14   LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................ 14  APPENDIX A – BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA APPENDIX B – GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES 1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FIRE STATION NO. 4 DENTON, TEXAS PROJECT DESCRIPTION This report presents the results of the geotechnical investigation for the proposed new City of Denton Fire Station No. 4, which will be located at the northeast corner of the intersection of Sherman Drive and Kings Row in Denton, Texas. As proposed, this project will consist of a new single story fire station building with an approximate footprint of 12,425 square feet including three truck bays and sleeping quarters. New concrete pavements and drives will also be constructed. It is expected that the new building will be supported on drilled shafts with a structural slab floor system. The majority of the site is currently on an undeveloped vegetated property, with mature hedgerows present on the southeast part of the site. On the north side of the site are two existing residences with some mature trees. The site slopes gently down to the south, with approximately 2 feet of elevation change. Photographs showing the recent condition of the site are provided below. PURPOSE AND SCOPE The purpose of this investigation was to:  Identify the subsurface soil strata and groundwater conditions present at the project site.  Evaluate the physical and engineering properties of the subsurface soil and bedrock strata for use in the geotechnical analyses.  Provide geotechnical recommendations for use in design of foundations for the proposed structures and related site work, including pavements and flatwork. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 2 The scope of this investigation included:  Drilling and sampling a total of eight (8) borings to depths ranging from about 5 to 25 feet below existing ground surface. However, three (3) of the proposed borings are located in the north portion of the site (unacquired) and are currently inaccessible.  Laboratory testing of selected soil samples obtained during the investigation.  Preparation of a Geotechnical Report that includes: o Evaluation of potential soil heave through Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) estimates. o Recommendations for foundation design. o Recommendations for earthwork. o Recommendations for the design of pavements and other flatwork. FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION 3.1 General The borings were advanced using truck-mounted drilling rigs, each of which were equipped with hollow-stem flight augers and wet rotary coring equipment. Undisturbed samples of cohesive soil and weathered bedrock strata were obtained using 3-inch diameter tube samplers that were advanced into the soils in 1-foot increments by the continuous thrust of a hydraulic ram located on the drilling equipment. A field estimate of the unconfined compressive strength of each sample was then obtained using a calibrated hand penetrometer. The bedrock strata present in the structure Borings were drilled and sampled using a double-tube core barrel fitted with a tungsten-carbide, sawtooth bit. The length of core recovered (REC), expressed as a percentage of the coring interval, along with the Rock Quality Designation (RQD), is tabulated at the appropriate depths on the Log of Boring illustrations. The RQD is the sum of all core pieces longer than four inches divided by the total length of the cored interval. Pieces shorter than four inches which were determined to be broken by drilling or by handling were fitted together and considered as one piece. Bedrock materials were periodically tested in situ in all borings using the Texas Cone penetration tests in order to examine the resistance of the bedrock materials to penetration. For this test, a 3-inch diameter steel cone is driven utilizing the energy equivalent of a 170-pound hammer falling freely from a height of 24 inches and striking an anvil located at the top of the drill string. Depending on the resistance of the bedrock materials, either the number of blows of the hammer required to provide 12 inches of penetration is recorded (as two increments of 6 inches each), or the inches of penetration of the cone resulting from 100 blows of the hammer are recorded (as two increments of 50 blows each). D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 3 All samples obtained were extruded in the field, placed in plastic bags to minimize changes in the natural moisture condition, labeled as to appropriate boring number and depth, and placed in protective cardboard boxes for transportation to the laboratory. Most of the samples were described and preserved in the field by an engineering geologist or geotechnical engineer. The specific depths, thicknesses and descriptions of the strata encountered are presented in more detail on the individual Boring Log illustrations in Appendix A. The strata boundaries shown on the boring logs are approximate. 3.2 Laboratory Testing Laboratory tests were performed to identify the relevant engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials encountered and to provide data for developing engineering design parameters. The subsurface soil samples recovered during the field exploration were described by either an engineering geologist or geotechnical engineer in the field. These descriptions were later refined by a geotechnical engineer based on results of the laboratory tests performed. All recovered soil samples were classified and described, in part, using ASTM and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) procedures. Bedrock strata were described using standard geologic nomenclature. In order to determine soil characteristics and to aid in classifying the soils, classification testing was performed on selected samples as requested by the Geotechnical Engineer. The tests were performed in general accordance with the following test procedures. The classification tests are described in more detail in Appendix B (General Description of Procedures).  Moisture Content ASTM D 2216  Atterberg Limits ASTM D 4318 Additional tests were performed to aid in evaluating soil strength, volume change, and chemical characteristics, including:  Unconfined Compressive Strength of Rock Cores ASTM D 7012 (Previously ASTM D 2938)  Overburden Swell Tests The results of these tests are presented at the corresponding sample depths on the appropriate Boring Log illustrations. The classification tests are described in more detail in Appendix B (General Description of Procedures). Unconfined Compression Tests Unconfined compression tests were performed on selected sections of the in-tact rock cores. These tests were performed in general accordance with ASTM D 7012 Method C for rock samples. For each unconfined compression test performed, a cylindrical specimen was subjected to an D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 4 axial load applied at a constant rate of strain until failure or a large strain (i.e., greater than 15 percent) occurred. Overburden Swell Tests Selected samples of the near-surface cohesive soils were subjected to overburden swell tests. For this test, a sample is placed in a consolidometer and is subjected to the estimated in-situ overburden pressure. The sample is then inundated with water and allowed to swell. Moisture contents are determined both before and after completion of the test. Test results are recorded as the percent swell, with initial and final moisture content. SITE CONDITIONS 4.1 Stratigraphy Based upon our observation of the recovered samples and a review of the Geologic Atlas of Texas, Sherman Sheet, this site is in bedrock strata associated with the undivided Grayson Marl and Main Street Limestone Formation. Existing fill materials were observed within Borings B1 through B3. The fill soils extend to depths of approximately 2 feet, and generally consist of stiff to very stiff clay soils with trace amounts of sand, roots, sandstone fragments, and calcareous and ferrous nodules. Below the fill materials, and at the surface within Borings (P1, P2, P3, B4, and B5), native soils were encountered that generally consist of clay soils which are medium stiff to very stiff in consistency, and medium to dark shades of brown and reddish brown in color. These clays often contain trace amounts of sandstone fragments, roots, ferrous and calcareous nodules. The native clays extend to the termination depths of 5 feet within Borings P1, P2 and P3, and to the top of the underlying bedrock materials at depths of about 3 to 6 feet below the existing site grades within Borings B1 through B3. Weathered limestone strata were encountered below the soils. These limestone materials are generally soft to medium hard in rock hardness, tan in color, and highly argillaceous (clay bearing) and trace amounts of marine fossils. These weathered limestones extend to the top of the unweathered limestone strata at depths of about 10 feet. The unweathered limestones are hard to very hard in rock hardness, are light gray to gray in color, and contain interbedded very thin shale seams and varying amounts of marine fossils. These limestone materials extend to the top of unweathered shale strata at depths of about 18 to 22 feet. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 5 The shales encountered are generally medium hard in rock hardness and gray to dark gray in color with occasional very thin sandstone seams and trace amounts of marine fossils. The bedrock strata extend to the maximum 25-foot depth explored. Subsurface conditions at each boring location are described on the individual boring logs in Appendix A. 4.2 Groundwater Groundwater was not encountered during drilling in any of the borings during drilling and prior to the addition of drilling fluids. Groundwater levels were not recorded at the completion of drilling as water was added for core drilling purposes. Groundwater levels should be anticipated to fluctuate with seasonal and annual variations in rainfall, and also may vary as a result of development and landscape irrigation. ENGINEERING ANALYSIS 5.1 Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) was evaluated utilizing a variety of different methods for predicting movement, as described in Appendix B, and based on our experience and professional opinion. Specific information regarding final site elevations was provided to this office at the time of this report. The near-surface soils at the time of our field investigation were found to range from dry to wet of average in moisture condition. Based upon the results of our analysis, this site is estimated to possess a Potential Vertical Movement of less than 1 inch to about 2 inches at the soil moisture conditions existing at the time of the field investigation and when given free access to water. However, if the near surface soils are allowed to dry appreciably to significant depth prior to or during construction, the potential for post-construction vertical movement could exceed 3 inches. 5.2 Settlement Potential Settlement of the existing soils under the anticipated loading of the building structure are dependent on the type of foundation used and the materials present or utilized (natural or fill soils). For lightly-loaded soil-supported structures, potential settlement is estimated to be on the order of 1/2-inch or less, assuming the soil is prepared in accordance with the soil preparation recommendations included in this report. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Considering the type of structure and reported loading intensity, as well as the subsurface materials and groundwater conditions present, we recommend that the structure be supported on a conventional drilled straight-sided shaft foundation system. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 6 The soils present at the site have the potential for appreciable post-construction vertical movement with changes in soil moisture content. In view of the planned structure and the ground conditions present, we recommend using a structurally-supported floor slab. Recommendations for subgrade preparation to reduce potential post-construction movement for miscellaneous flatwork are described in the Earthwork Section of this report. Please note that a soil-supported flatwork may experience some vertical movement with changes in soil moisture content. However, with appropriate design, adherence to good construction practices, and appropriate post-construction maintenance, these potential movements can be reduced. 6.1 Straight-sided Drilled Shafts We recommend that structural loads for the new building be supported on auger- excavated, straight-sided, reinforced concrete drilled shafts founded in the unweathered limestone encountered below depths of about 10 feet. We recommend those shafts penetrate a minimum of 2 feet into the unweathered limestone to utilize the full amount of allowable end bearing. We recommend straight-sided drilled piers for structural loads be a minimum of 18- inches in diameter. Shafts bearing in unweathered limestone should be designed for an allowable end bearing of 100,000 psf and side friction of 30,000 psf. The allowable side frictions may be taken from the top the bearing stratum or from the bottom of any temporary casing used, whichever is deeper, to resist both axial loading and uplift. The shafts should be provided with sufficient steel reinforcement throughout their length to resist potential uplift pressures that will be exerted. For the near surface soils, these pressures are approximated to be on the order of 1 pounds of shaft area over an average depth of 5 feet. Often, 1/2 of a percent of steel by cross-sectional area is sufficient for this purpose (ACI 318). However, the final amount of reinforcement required should be determined based on the information provided herein, and should be the greater of that determination, or ACI 318. There is no reduction in allowable capacities for shafts in proximity to each other. However for a two-shaft system, there is an 18 percent reduction in the available perimeter area for side friction capacity for shafts in contact (tangent). The area reduction can be extrapolated linearly to zero at one shaft diameter clear spacing. Please contact this office if other close proximity geometries need to be considered. We anticipate that a straight-side drilled pier foundation system designed and constructed in accordance with the information provided in this report should limit potential settlement to small fractions of an inch. Differential settlement between adjacent foundation elements should be less than 1/2 inch. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 7 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations Groundwater seepage was not encountered during drilling operations. We anticipate that temporary casing may be required at a few of the shaft locations for the shaft installations. Temporary casing should be available on-site in the event that excessive sidewall sloughing occurs, or if excessive groundwater seepage is encountered that cannot be controlled with conventional pumps, sumps, or other means. The installation of all drilled piers should be observed by experienced geotechnical personnel during construction to verify compliance with design assumptions including: 1) verticality of the shaft excavation, 2) identification of the bearing stratum, 3) minimum pier diameter and depth, 4) correct amount of reinforcement, 5) proper removal of loose material, and 6) that groundwater seepage, if present, is properly controlled. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in support of this project. During construction of the drilled shafts, care should be taken to avoid creating an oversized cap ("mushroom") near the ground surface that is larger than the shaft diameter. These “mushrooms” provide a resistance surface that near-surface soils can heave against. If near-surface soils are prone to sloughing, a condition which can result in “mushrooming”, the tops of the shafts should be formed in the sloughing soils using cardboard or other circular forms equal to the diameter of the shaft. Concrete used for the shafts should have a slump of 8 inches ± 1 inch. Individual shafts should be excavated in a continuous operation and concrete should be placed as soon as after completion of the drilling as is practical. All pier holes should be filled with concrete within 8 hours after completion of drilling. In the event of equipment breakdown, any uncompleted open shaft should be backfilled with soil to be redrilled at a later date. This office should be contacted when shafts have reached the target depth but cannot be completed. 6.2 Pier-supported Grade Beams and Suspended Floor Slabs We recommend the new building be constructed with structurally suspended floor slabs over a void space. For a pier and grade beam foundation with a structurally suspended floor slab, a minimum void space of 6 inches should be provided beneath all structural elements. Two methods are typically utilized for constructing a suspended floor slab system. These include using pan and joist type construction utilizing either concrete or steel beams and raising the floor slab well above the underlying expansive soils (forming a crawl space), or using cardboard carton forms to create a void. If a pan and joist system is used, and if utility lines are suspended beneath the slab, the void space clearance should be increased to either a minimum of 2 feet to D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 8 provide for access to these lines, or to provide a minimum of 12 inches clearance below the lowest suspended utility, whichever is greater. Flexible connections should be considered in the design of utilities to accommodate potential future movements of soil supported utility lines, especially where these lines approach or enter the stationary structure. Provisions should be made for positive drainage of the floor slab crawl space. Sufficient ventilation should also be provided where construction with metal beams and joists is planned to limit corrosion of the metal components. Where crawl spaces are not planned side retainers must be used along the exterior of perimeter grade beams to prevent soil from infiltrating the void space. Structural cardboard carton forms (void boxes) may also be used to provide the required voids beneath the floor slab and grade beams; however, trapezoidal void boxes should not be used. Care should be taken to assure that the void boxes are not allowed to become wet or crushed prior to or during concrete placement and finishing operations. We recommend that masonite (1/4” thick) or other protective material be placed on top of the carton forms to reduce the risk of crushing the cardboard forms during concrete placement and finishing operations. Side retainers must be used along each side of the grade beams to prevent soil from infiltrating the void space after the carton forms deteriorate. Grade beams may be earth-formed, but only if the sides can be cut and maintained vertical. If sloughing occurs, or if the sides cannot be maintained vertical, the grade beams should then be formed on both sides. The bottom of all grade beam excavations should be essentially free of any loose or soft material prior to the placement of concrete. All grade beams and floor slabs should be adequately reinforced to minimize cracking. Required fill under the void boxes may be any clean soil and should be compacted in accordance with the earthwork recommendation in this report. If needed, a thin (less than 3-inches thick) leveling bed of lean concrete or flowable fill may be used. If grade beams are formed, the exterior side of the grade beams around the structure should be carefully backfilled with on-site clayey soils. The backfill soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density for the backfill material as determined by ASTM D 698 (standard Proctor). The fill should be placed at a moisture content that is at least three (3) percent above the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same test. This fill should extend the full depth of the grade beam and void box, and should extend a minimum distance of one foot away from the exterior grade beam perimeter. Soil-supported Floor System EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS If potential movements on the order of 1 to 2 inches can be tolerated, we have the following recommendations for subgrade soil modification for grade supported flatwork. Please note that more stringent tolerances limiting potential post-construction vertical movement will require more extensive rework. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 9 7.1 Soil Rework  Strip the site of all vegetation and remove any existing organic, deleterious material, aggregate and surface debris across the flatwork footprint. Typically, 4 to 6 inches is sufficient for this purpose.  After stripping the site and performing any necessary cuts, excavate the flatwork area to an additional depth of one (1) foot below the bottom of flatwork elevation. The excavated soil may be stockpiled for possible re-use.  After excavating, and prior to placement of any replacement fill, scarify, re- work and recompact the excavated subgrade to a depth of 6-inches. The scarified, re-worked soils should be compacted to between 93 and 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by Standard Moisture Density Relation test (ASTM D 698), and placed at a moisture content of at least three percentage points (+3%) above the optimum moisture content.  Within 24 hours of recompacting the reworked excavated exposed subgrade, begin fill operations.  Provide a minimum of 12-inches of select fill on top of the scarified moisture conditioned fill subgrade. Select fill should have a Liquid Limit (LL) of less than 40 and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 6 and 18. The select fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts, compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Moisture Density Relationship test (ASTM D 698), and should be placed at a moisture content that is within two percentage points (±2%) of the optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test. Crusher run screenings meeting the gradation requirements of ASTM D 448 Size Number 10, may be used in lieu of select fill. Locally available screenings that do not meet the Size Number 10 requirements should be evaluated by this office for suitability.  Each lift of fill placed should be tested for moisture content and degree of compaction by a testing laboratory at the rate of one test per flatwork areas, one (1) test per 5,000 square feet in paved areas, one (1) test per lift per 100 linear feet in sidewalk areas, and one (1) test lift per 100 linear feet of utility trench backfill.  The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained up to the time of concrete placement. Depending on the speed of the earthwork layers, on hot or windy days, sprinkling with water atop the subgrade may be required, to maintain the compaction moisture content.  We recommend placing a minimum 10-mil thick moisture barrier, such as plastic sheeting, under the floor slab to prevent the infiltration of moisture through floor slabs that will have coverings, such as tile, carpet, etc., or that will be painted. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 10 7.2 Additional Considerations In order to minimize the potential for post-construction vertical movement, consideration should be given to the following:  Trees or shrubs with a mature height greater than six feet or that require excessive amounts of water should not be planted closer than the mature tree’s height from structures.  The grade should slope away from foundations at a minimum rate of two and preferably five percent within the first 10-feet of the foundation perimeter.  Water should not be allowed to pond next to the foundation. Rainfall roof runoff should be collected and conveyed to downspouts. Downspouts should be directed to discharge at least 5-feet away from the foundation.  Every attempt should be made to limit the extreme wetting or drying of the subsurface soils since swelling and shrinkage will result. The moisture content of subgrade soils within close proximity to the structure foundations should be maintained as close to a consistent level throughout the year as possible using a suitable irrigation system. However, we strongly recommend that excessive watering near the foundation be avoided. PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS 8.1 General The pavement design recommendations provided herein are derived from the subgrade information that was obtained from our geotechnical investigation, from design assumptions based on project information provided by the design team, our experience with similar projects in this area, and on the guidelines and recommendations of the American Concrete Pavement Association (ACPA). However, it is ultimately the responsibility of the Civil Engineer of Record and/or other design professionals who are responsible for pavement design to provide the final pavement design and associated specifications for this project. 8.2 Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils beneath Pavement The near-surface soils present have an appreciable potential for post-construction vertical movement with changes in soil moisture content. The edges of pavements and sidewalks are particularly prone to moisture variations and so these areas often exhibit the most distress. When cracks appear on the surface of the pavement, these openings can allow moisture to enter the pavement subgrade. The introduction of moisture can lead to soil movement and can ultimately result in additional weakening of the pavement section and accelerated failure of the pavement surface. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 11 In order to minimize the potential impacts of soil movements on paved areas and to improve the long term performance of the pavement, we have the following recommendations:  Provide a crowned pavement, which provides maximum drainage away from the pavement (but away from structure foundations). A minimum slope of five (5) percent within the first 5 feet is considered ideal.  Subgrade treatments intended to reduce the soil’s potential for vertical movement or to increase the subgrade stability should to extend to at least 18 inches beyond the back of curbs or edges of pavements.  Avoid long areas of low-sloping roadway and adjust slopes to account for the Potential Vertical Movement. 8.3 Subgrade Preparation Recommendations For the subgrade preparation beneath rigid pavements, the pavement subgrade should be treated with lime according to the following recommendations. As an alternative to lime treatment, an aggregate base (flexible base) layer may be used. Soil Preparation – Lime Treatment  Strip the site to a minimum depth of 4 inches below existing grades and remove any remaining organic or deleterious material under the planned paved areas, including all tree stumps and root balls of existing trees under pavements.  Fill as needed to required pavement subgrade elevation. The fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum Standard Proctor density (ASTM D 698), and placed at a moisture content that is at least two percentage points above the material’s optimum moisture content (+2%). Fill materials may be imported materials that are essentially free of organic materials and particles in excess of 4 inches their maximum direction. Imported fill material should have not less than 35 percent material passing a No. 200 mesh sieve and a Plasticity Index not more than 30.  Mix lime slurry into the prepared subgrade soil after scarifying to a depth of at least 6 inches for automotive parking and 8 inches for truck areas and fire lanes to achieve a treated subgrade with an estimated minimum of 6 percent lime by dry weight measure. The actual percentage lime should be determined during construction when it is known what the final layer subgrade material comprises. The hydrated lime should be applied only in an area where the initial mixing operations can be completed the same working day. The area of lime treated subgrade should extend a minimum of 18 inches beyond the back of roadway curbs or edges of pavement. D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 12  The soil and hydrated lime should be thoroughly mixed to obtain a homogeneous, friable mixture free of clods or lumps larger than about golf ball size. After initial mixing, roll the mixed material with a suitable type and size of equipment to somewhat “seal-in” moisture and to minimize moisture loss. The rolled subgrade should be left to cure from one to four days. During the curing period, the material should be kept moist, and in no case should the subgrade surface be allowed to dry for more than 12 hours between surface moistening’s / wettings.  After the curing period, the subgrade should be thoroughly re-mixed to a depth of 6-inches until the following gradational characteristics are achieved (after the removal of non-slaking particles such as shale, concrete and/or asphalt fragments): o Minimum passing 1-3/4" sieve = 100% 0. Minimum passing No. 4 sieve = 60%  After achieving the required gradation, the treated soil-lime mixture should then be immediately compacted to at least 95 percent of Standard Proctor maximum density (ASTM D 698) at a moisture content of optimum or better, as determined by the same test.  Water should not be allowed to pond on the treated surface. To that end, the lime treated subgrade surface should be shaped in such a fashion that will cause it to shed water to one or both edges of the prepared subgrade.  Field density and moisture content testing should be performed at the rate of one test per 10,000 square feet in parking and roadway areas, whose planned use will principally consist of personal vehicles, and one test per 100 linear feet in utility trenches. For fire lanes and areas principally subjected to heavy vehicular and fire truck traffic, the rate of testing should be at one test per 5,000 square feet. Soil Preparation – Aggregate Base  Strip the site to a minimum depth of 4 inches below existing grades and remove any remaining organic or deleterious material under the planned paved areas, including all tree stumps and root balls of existing trees under pavements.  Fill as needed to required pavement subgrade elevation. The fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, compacted to at least 95 percent of its maximum Standard Proctor density (ASTM D 698), and placed at a moisture content that is either at or above the material’s optimum moisture content. Fill materials may be imported materials that are essentially free of organic materials and particles in excess of 4 inches their maximum direction. Imported fill material D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 13 should have not less than 35 percent material passing a No. 200 mesh sieve and a Plasticity Index not more than 30.  Aggregate base, should be TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 1. The base thickness should be 4 inches for automobile parking and 6 inches for truck areas and fire lanes. Aggregate base materials should be spread in maximum 4-inch loose horizontal lifts, uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D 698), and placed at a moisture content that is sufficient to achieve density.  The area of flexible base should extend a minimum of 18 inches beyond the back of roadway curbs or edges of pavement. 8.4 Rigid Pavement We recommend that reinforced Rigid Portland Cement Concrete for this site have a minimum thickness of 7 inches for all fire lanes and truck areas. A minimum thickness of 5 inches is recommended for automobile parking. The reinforced concrete paving should be placed over lime treated subgrade soil or aggregate base. The following concrete mix design recommendations are as follows:  Recommended minimum design compressive strength: 3,500 psi.  15 to 20 percent fly ash may be used with the approval of the Civil Engineer of record  Curing compound should be applied within one hour of finishing operations Pavement Joints and Cutting  The performance of concrete pavement depends to a large degree on the design, construction, and long term maintenance of concrete joints. The following recommendations and observations are offered for consideration by the Civil Engineer and/or pavement Designer-of-Record:  The concrete pavements should have adequately-spaced contraction joints to control shrinkage cracking. Past experience indicates that reinforced concrete pavements with sealed contraction joints on a 12 to 15-foot spacing, cut to a depth of one-quarter to one-third of the pavement thickness, have generally exhibited less uncontrolled post-construction cracking than pavements with wider spacing. The contraction joint pattern should divide the pavement into panels that are approximately square where the panel length should not exceed 25 percent more than the panel width. Saw cut, post placement formed contraction joints should be saw cut as soon as the concrete can support the saw cutting equipment and personnel and before shrinkage cracks appear, on the order of 4 to 6 D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 14 hours after concrete placement. Rubberized asphalt, silicone or other suitable flexible sealant could be used to seal the joints. Isolation joints should be used wherever the pavement will abut a structural element e.g., light poles, retaining walls, existing pavement, stairways, entryway piers, building walls, or manholes.  In order to minimize the potential differential movement across the pavement areas described herein, all joints including contraction, isolation and construction joints should be sealed to minimize the potential for infiltration of surface water. Maintenance should include periodic inspection of these joints and resealed as necessary. The pavement should also be maintained properly, including the use of a flexible joint material to seal cracks as they degrade and open, which can occur during the life of the pavement. SEISMIC CONSIDERATION Based on the data developed, and considering the geologic conditions present, we recommend that IBC Soil Site Class “C” be used at this site. There does not appear to be significant hazard from slope instability, liquefaction or subsurface rupture due to faulting or lateral spreading that would occur during earthquake motion. The acceleration values presented in Table 1 below were interpolated from published U.S. Geological Survey National Seismic Hazard Maps. Table 1. Seismic Design Parameters Design Parameters Values Site Class C Spectral Acceleration for 0.2 sec Period, Ss (g) 0.114 Spectral Acceleration for 1.0 sec Period, S1 (g) 0.055 Site Coefficient for 0.2 sec Period, Fa 1.2 Site Coefficient for 1.0 sec Period, Fv 1.7 LIMITATIONS The professional geotechnical engineering services performed for this project, the findings obtained, and the recommendations prepared were accomplished in accordance with currently accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices. Variations in the subsurface conditions are noted at the specific boring locations for this study. As such, all users of this report should be aware that differences in depths and thicknesses of strata encountered can vary between the boring locations. Statements in the report as to subsurface conditions across the site are extrapolated from the data obtained at the specific boring locations. The number and spacing of the exploration D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) 15 borings were largely chosen by others to obtain geotechnical information for the design and construction of lightly to moderately loaded municipal structure foundations. The information and recommendation contained herein should not be used as a basis for final design. If there are any conditions differing significantly from those described herein, D&S should be notified to re-evaluate the recommendations contained in this report. Recommendations contained herein are not considered applicable for an indefinite period of time. Our office must be contacted to re-evaluate the contents of this report if construction does not begin within a one year period after completion of this report. The scope of services provided herein does not include an environmental assessment of the site or investigation for the presence or absence of hazardous materials in the soil, surface water, or groundwater. All contractors referring to this geotechnical report should draw their own conclusions regarding excavations, construction, etc. for bidding purposes. D&S is not responsible for conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on these data. The report is intended to guide preparation of project specifications and should not be used as a substitute for the project specifications. Recommendations provided in this report are based on our understanding of information provided by the Client to us regarding the scope of work for this project. If the Client notes any differences, or if the Scope or configuration of the project changes from has is described herein, our office should be contacted immediately since this may require significant modifications to the recommendations provided in this report. APPENDIX A - BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA B2 B1 B3 B4 KINGS ROWE SHERMAN DRP2 P1 P3 B5 5*''601 6':#5 2.#01($14+0)5 (+4'56#6+1001 &'0610 065 018'/$'4&#6'1(&4+..+0) Project #15-0441 KEY TO SYMBOLS AND TERMS CONSISTENCY: FINE GRAINED SOILS CONDITION OF SOILS SECONDARY COMPONENTS WEATHERING OF ROCK MASS TCP (#blows/ft) < 8 8 - 20 20 - 60 60 - 100 > 100 Relative Density (%) 0 - 15 15 - 35 35 - 65 65 - 85 85 - 100 SPT (# blows/ft) 0 - 2 3 - 4 5 - 8 9 - 15 16 - 30 > 30 UCS (tsf) < 0.25 0.25 - 0.5 0.5 - 1.0 1.0 - 2.0 2.0 - 4.0 > 4.0 CONSISTENCY OF SOILSLITHOLOGIC SYMBOLS CONDITION: COARSE GRAINED SOILS QUANTITY DESCRIPTORS RELATIVE HARDNESS OF ROCK MASS SPT (# blows/ft) 0 - 4 5 - 10 11 - 30 31 - 50 > 50 Description No visible sign of weathering Penetrative weathering on open discontinuity surfaces, but only slight weathering of rock material Weathering extends throughout rock mass, but the rock material is not friable Weathering extends throughout rock mass, and the rock material is partly friable Rock is wholly decomposed and in a friable condition but the rock texture and structure are preserved A soil material with the original texture, structure, and mineralogy of the rock completely destroyed Designation Fresh Slightly weathered Moderately weathered Highly weathered Completely weathered Residual Soil Description Can be carved with a knife. Can be excavated readily with point of pick. Pieces 1" or more in thickness can be broken by finger pressure. Readily scratched with fingernail. Can be gouged or grooved readily with knife or pick point. Can be excavated in chips to pieces several inches in size by moderate blows with the pick point. Small, thin pieces can be broken by finger pressure. Can be grooved or gouged 1/4" deep by firm pressure on knife or pick point. Can be excavated in small chips to pieces about 1" maximum size by hard blows with the point of a pick. Can be scratched with knife or pick. Gouges or grooves 1/4" deep can be excavated by hard blow of the point of a pick. Hand specimens can be detached by a moderate blow. Can be scratched with knife or pick only with difficulty. Hard blow of hammer required to detach a hand specimen. Cannot be scratched with knife or sharp pick. Breaking of hand specimens requires several hard blows from a hammer or pick. Trace Few Little Some With Designation Very Soft Soft Medium Hard Moderately Hard Hard Very Hard < 5% of sample 5% to 10% 10% to 25% 25% to 35% > 35% Condition Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense Consistency Very Soft Soft Medium Stiff Stiff Very Stiff HardARTIFICIALAsphalt Aggregate Base Concrete Fill SOILROCKLimestone Mudstone Shale Sandstone Weathered Limestone Weathered Shale Weathered Sandstone CH: High Plasticity Clay CL: Low Plasticity Clay GP: Poorly-graded Gravel GW: Well-graded Gravel SC: Clayey Sand SP: Poorly-graded Sand SW: Well-graded Sand                                                                           ! "      ! #$%&'()$%*++$,-)   ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2 ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2         3                                              "        !     #$%&'%-%2/(%4)++$,-)  56/-7#$%&'%-%2/(%4)++$,-) 8%2#$%&'()$%*++$,-) ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2  ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2    !      " 9   9       " 9   9                 2.0 ft 6.0 ft 10.0 ft 19.0 ft 25.0 ft FILL: CLAY (CL); stiff; brown to darkbrown, reddish-brown; trace roots, sand, ferrous nodules, and sandstonefragments CLAY (CL); stiff to very stiff; brown todark brown, reddish-brown; trace roots, sand, ferrous nodules LIMESTONE; highly weathered; softto medium hard; tan; highlyargillaceous; trace marine fossils LIMESTONE; hard to very hard; light gray to gray; occasional very thinshale seams; some marine fossils SHALE; medium hard; gray to darkgray; trace marine fossils; occasional very thin sandstone seams End of boring at 25.0' Notes: -dry prior to the introduction of water at10.2 feet for coring purposes 9898 70 70 9494 0.6 41 43 22 24 19 19 184.8 315.0 12.2 108.4 141.0 149.9 115.3 31.4 24.1 22.2 20.1 18.5 18.2 6.6 4.7 14.2 2.0 2.25 3.5 3.75 3.25 3.5 50=1.0"50=1.0" S S S S S S T C C C Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B1 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 1/13/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/13/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.24976, W97.11474 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 2.0 ft 3.0 ft 10.0 ft 19.0 ft 25.0 ft FILL: CLAY (CH); stiff to very stiff;dark brown, reddish-brown; trace sand, gravel, roots, calcareous andferrous nodules CLAY (CH); stiff; dark brown,reddish-brown; trace sand, roots, calcareous and ferrous nodules LIMESTONE; highly weathered; softto medium hard; tan; highly argillaceous; trace marine fossils LIMESTONE; hard to very hard; light gray to gray; some marine fossils;occasional very thin shale seams SHALE; medium hard; gray to darkgray; trace marine fossils; occasional very thin sandstone seams End of boring at 25.0' Notes: -dry prior to the introduction of water at10.1 feet for coring purposes 9898 68 68 8080 0.852 39 26 23 26 16 213.3 90.1 12.5 96.0 144.9 141.3 126.1 35.8 28.7 24.5 19.8 17.1 16.9 4.7 2.9 12.1 1.75 3.75 3.0 4.5+ 4.5+ 4.5+ 50=1.25"50=0.5" S S S S S S T C C C Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B2 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 1/13/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/13/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.24986, W97.11457 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 2.0 ft 5.0 ft 10.0 ft 18.0 ft 25.0 ft FILL: CLAY (CH); stiff; brown to darkbrown; trace sand, calcareous nodules, ferrous nodules, sandstonefragments, and roots CLAY (CH); stiff to very stiff; brown todark brown; trace sand, calcareous nodules, ferrous nodules, and roots LIMESTONE; highly weathered; softto medium hard; tan; highlyargillaceous; trace marine fossils LIMESTONE; hard to very hard; light gray; some marine fossils; occasionalvery thin shale seams SHALE; medium hard; gray; tracemarine fossils; occasional very thin sandstone seams End of boring at 25.0' Notes: -dry prior to the introduction of water at10.0 feet for coring purposes 8888 78 78 5252 1.567 29 39 15 28 14 156.2 94.3 7.1 92.4 139.9 148.3 116.4 25.1 25.4 31.0 24.7 20.5 16.8 5.3 5.0 16.5 1.75 2.75 3.5 3.75 2.0 4.5+ 4.5+ 50=0.25"50=0.25" S S S S S S S T C C C Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B3 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 1/13/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/13/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.24994, W97.11476 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 4.0 ft 7.0 ft 11.0 ft 22.0 ft 25.2 ft CLAY (CH); dark brown to brown;stiff to very stiff; few to some calcareous nodules and sandstonefragments LIMESTONE; very soft; highly tocompletly weathered; tan; argillaceous LIMESTONE; soft; slightlyweathered; tan LIMESTONE; hard to very hard; gray SHALE; dark gray End of boring at 25.2' Notes: -dry during drilling 1.7603129 92.2 26.3 29.3 21.6 18.3 14.4 2.25 4.5+ 3.5 4.5+ 5=6"7=6" 37=6" 47=6" 50=1.75"50=1.25" 50=3" 50=1.25" 50=2.25" 50=0.75" 50=1.25" 50=0.75" 50=1.25" 50=1.25" S S S T S T T T T T T Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B4 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Charles Ray Stephens (D&S) START DATE: 3/25/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: John Anderson (D&S) FINISH DATE: 2/25/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.250117, W97.114396 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 0.5 ft 4.0 ft 5.6 ft 9.0 ft 22.5 ft 23.5 ft CLAY (CH); stiff; brown to darkbrown; trace sand; calcareous nodules, ferrous nodules, sandstonefragments, and roots CLAY (CH); very stiff; light brown todark brown; few to some calcareous and ferrous nodules LIMESTONE; very soft; highly tocompletely weathered; tan; highly argillaceous LIMESTONE; soft; slightlyweathered; brown LIMESTONE; very hard; brown, gray; occasional thin shale seams SHALE; medium hard; dark gray;fissile End of boring at 23.5' Notes:-dry during drilling -dry upon completion 7373 9292 69 69 15 15 2.2 63.6 109.2 132.8 27.1 24.3 16.7 8.1 3.25 3.5 3.5 3.0 4.5+ S S S S S C C C C Atterberg Limits Clay(%) B5 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 3/11/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: John Anderson D&S) FINISH DATE: 3/11/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.250196, W97.114608 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 1.8 ft 4.0 ft 5.0 ft FILL: CLAY (CL); stiff; brown; traceto little gravel CLAY (CH); stiff; dark brown; traceorganics CLAY (CH); medium stiff; light brown;little to some calcareous nodules End of boring at 5.0' Notes:-dry during drilling -dry upon completion 53 3221 20.6 27.8 16.9 3.0 2.75 3.25 1.0 4.0 S S S S S Atterberg Limits Clay(%) P1 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 1/14/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/14/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.24962, W97.11438 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 5.0 ft CLAY (CL); medium stiff to stiff;brown to dark brown; trace silt, sand, ferrous nodules, roots and calcareousnodules End of boring at 5.0' Notes: -dry during drilling-dry upon completion 33 191420.1 26.2 1.25 1.0 1.5 2.25 1.75 S S S S S Atterberg Limits Clay(%) P2 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 1/14/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/14/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N33.24979, W97.11498 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 3.5 ft 5.0 ft CLAY (CH); very stiff; dark brown tobrown, some sand, calcareous and ferrous nodules LIMESTONE; very soft; highlyweathered; tan; highly argillaceous End of boring at 5.0' Notes: -dry during drilling-dry upon completion 42 2319 2.8 122.1 29.3 19.3 21.0 17.6 3.0 4.5+ 3.25 4.5+ 4.5+ S S S S S Atterberg Limits Clay(%) P3 PAGE 1 OF 1 Legend: S-Shelby Tube N-Standard Penetration T-Texas Cone Penetration C-Core B-Bag Sample - Water Encountered REC (%)RQD (%) Swell(%)LL(%)PI TotalSuction(pF) Passing #200Sieve (%) BORING LOG GraphicLog PL(%) Unconf.Compr.Str (ksf) DUW(pcf)MC(%)Depth(ft) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP Hand Pen. (tsf)orSPT orTCP SampleType CLIENT: City of Denton LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) START DATE: 3/11/2016 DRILL METHOD: HSA/Core LOGGED BY: John Anderson D&S) FINISH DATE: 3/11/2016 GROUND ELEVATION: GPS COORDINATES: N32.250405, W97.11499 PROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 B1 3-4 20.1 20.6 521 0.6 B2 1-2 28.7 29.2 261 0.8 B3 2-3 31.0 34.8 389 1.5 B4 1-2 29.3 31.5 254 1.7 Vertical Swell, % SWELL TEST RESULTS Boring Number Depth feet Initial Moisture Content, % Final Moisture Content, % Applied Pressure, psf LOCATION: Denton, TXPROJECT: Fire Station No. 4 CLIENT: City of Denton START DATE: 1/13/2016 DRILLED BY: Kevin Kavadas (D&S) FINISH DATE: 1/13/2016 LOGGED BY: Ricky Ybarra (D&S) DRILL METHOD: HSA/CorePROJECT NUMBER: 15-0441 APPENDIX B - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) ANALYTICAL METHODS TO PREDICT MOVEMENT CLASSIFICATION TESTS Classification testing is perhaps the most basic, yet fundamental tool available for predicting potential movements of clay soils. Classification testing typically consists of moisture content, Atterberg Limits, and Grain-size distribution determinations. From these results a general assessment of a soil’s propensity for volume change with changes in soil moisture content can be made. Moisture Content By studying the moisture content of the soils at varying depths and comparing them with the results of Atterberg Limits, one can estimate a rough order of magnitude of potential soil movement at various moisture contents, as well as movements with moisture changes. These tests are typically performed in accordance with ASTM D 2216. Atterberg Limits Atterberg limits determine the liquid limit (LL), plastic limit (PL), and plasticity index (PI) of a soil. The liquid limit is the moisture content at which a soil begins to behave as a viscous fluid. The plastic limit is the moisture content at which a soil becomes workable like putty, and at which a clay soil begins to crumble when rolled into a thin thread (1/8” diameter). The PI is the numerical difference between the moisture constants at the liquid limit and the plastic limit. This test is typically performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. Clay mineralogy and the particle size influence the Atterberg Limits values, with certain minerals (e.g., montmorillonite) and smaller particle sizes having higher PI values, and therefore higher movement potential. A soil with a PI below about 15 to 18 is considered to be generally stable and should not experience significant movement with changes in moisture content. Soils with a PI above about 30 to 35 are considered to be highly active and may exhibit considerable movement with changes in moisture content. Fat clays with very high liquid limits, weakly cemented sandy clays, or silty clays are examples of soils in which it can be difficult to predict movement from classification testing alone. Grain-size Distribution The simplest grain-size distribution test involves washing a soil specimen over the No. 200 mesh sieve with an opening size of 0.075 mm (ASTM D 1140)). This particle size has been defined by the engineering community as the demarcation between coarse-grained and fine- grained soils. Particles smaller than this size can be further distinguished between silt-size and clay-size particles by use of a Hydrometer test (ASTM D 422). A more complete grain-size distribution test that uses sieves to relative amount of particles according is the Sieve Gradation Analysis of Soils (ASTM D 6913). Once the characteristics of the soil are determined through classification testing, a number of movement prediction techniques are available to predict the potential movement of the soils. Some of these are discussed in general below. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION METHOD 124-E The Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) has developed a generally simplistic method to predict movements for highways based on the plasticity index of the soil. The TxDOT method is empirical and is based on the Atterberg limits and moisture content of the subsurface soil. This method generally assumes three different initial moisture conditions: dry, “as-is”, and wet. Computation of each over an assumed depth of seasonal moisture variation (usually about 15 feet or less) provides an estimate of potential movement at each initial condition. This method requires a number of additional assumptions to develop a potential movement estimate. As such, the predicted movements generally possess large uncertainties when applied to the analysis of conditions under building slabs and foundations. In our opinion, estimates derived by this method should not be used alone in determination of potential movement. SUCTION Suction measurements may be used along with other movement prediction methods to predict soil movement. Suction is a measure of the ability of a soil to attract or lose moisture between the soil particles. Since changes in soil moisture result in volume changes within the soil mass of fine-grained soils (clays and to some degree silts), a knowledge of the suction potential of a soil mass at a given point in time may be used to estimate potential future volume changes with changes in soil moisture content. For this analysis, a series of suction measurements versus depth is typically performed on a number of soil samples recovered from a boring in order to develop a suction profile. SWELL TESTS Swell tests can lead to more accurate site specific predictions of potential vertical movement by measuring actual swell volumes at in situ initial moisture contents. One-dimensional swell tests are almost always performed for this measurement. Though swell is a three-dimensional process, the one-dimensional test provides greatly improved potential vertical movement estimates than other methods alone, particularly when the results are “weighted” with respect to depth, putting more emphasis on the swell characteristics closer to the surface and less on values at depth. WIRE REINFORCEMENT INSTITUTE The Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) has developed a design methodology using a weighted plasticity index. This index is modified for ground slope and the strength of the soil. These values are also used as input into the movement potential. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) POTENTIAL VERTICAL MOVEMENT A general index for movement is known as the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR). The actual term PVR refers to the TxDOT Method 124-E mentioned above. For the purpose of this report the term Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) will be used since PVM estimates are derived using multiple analytical techniques, not just TxDOT methods. It should be noted that slabs and foundations constructed on clay or clayey soils may have at least some risk of potential vertical movement due to changes in soil moisture contents. To eliminate that risk, slabs and foundation elements may be designed as structural elements physically separated by some distance from the subgrade soils (usually 4 to 12 inches). In some cases, a floor slab with movements as little as 1/4 of an inch may result in damage to interior walls, such as cracking in sheet rock or masonry walls, or separation of floor tiles. However, these cracks are often minor and most people consider them 'liveable'. In other cases, movement of one inch may cause significant damage, inconvenience, or even create a hazard (trip hazard or others). Vertical movement of clay soils under slab on grade foundations due to soil moisture changes can result from a variety causes, including poor site grading and drainage, improperly prepared subgrade, trees and large shrubbery located too close to structures, utility leaks or breaks, poor subgrade maintenance such as inadequate or excessive irrigation, or other causes. The potential for post-construction vertical movement can be minimized through adequate design, proper construction, and adherence to the recommendations contained herein for post- construction maintenance. POTENTIAL VERTICAL MOVEMENT (PVM) PVM is generally considered to be a measurement of the change in height of a foundation from the elevation it was originally placed. Experience and generally accepted practice suggests that if the PVM of a site is less than one inch, the associated differential movement will be minor and acceptable to most people. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) SETTLEMENT Settlement is a measure of a downward movement due to consolidation of soil. This can occur from improperly placed fill (uncompacted or under-compacted), loose native soil, or from large amounts of unconfined sandy material. Properly compacted fill may settle approximately 1 percent of its depth, particularly when fill depths exceed 10 feet. EDGE AND CENTER LIFT MOVEMENT (ym) The Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI) has developed a parameter of movement defined as the differential movement (ym) estimated using the change in soil surface elevation in two locations separated by a distance em within which the differential movement will occur; em being measured from the exterior of a building to some distance toward the interior. All calculations for this report are based on the modified PTI procedure in addition to our judgment as necessary for specific site conditions. The minimum movements given in the PTI are for climatic conditions only and have been modified somewhat to account for site conditions which may increase the actual parameters. “Center lift” occurs when the center, or some portion of the center of the building, is higher than the exterior. This can occur when the soil around the exterior shrinks, or the soil under the center of the building swells, or a combination of both occurs. “Edge lift” occurs when the edge, or some portion of the exterior of the building, is higher than the center. This can occur when the soil around the exterior swells. It is not uncommon to have both the center lift and the edge lift phenomena occurring on the same building, in different areas. D&S ENGINEERING LABS, LLC Fire Station No. 4 – Denton, Texas (15-0441) SPECIAL COMMENTARY ON CONCRETE AND EARTHWORK RESTRAINT TO SHRINKAGE CRACKS One of the characteristics of concrete is that during the curing process shrinkage occurs and if there are any restraints to prevent the concrete from shrinking, cracks can form. In a typical slab on grade or structurally suspended foundation there will be cracks due to interior beams and piers that restrict shrinkage. This restriction is called Restraint to Shrinkage (RTS). In post tensioned slabs, the post tensioning strands are slack when installed and must be stressed at a later time. The best procedure is to stress the cables approximately 30 percent within one to two days of placing the concrete. Then the cables are stressed fully when the concrete reaches greater strength, usually in 7 days. During this time before the cables are stressed fully, the concrete may crack more than conventionally reinforced slabs. When the cables are stressed, some of the cracks will pull together. These RTS cracks do not normally adversely affect the overall performance of the foundation. It should be noted that for exposed floors, especially those that will be painted, stained or stamped, these cracks may be aesthetically unacceptable. Any tile which is applied directly to concrete or over a mortar bed over concrete has a high probability of minor cracks occurring in the tile due to RTS. It is recommended if tile is used to install expansion joints in appropriate locations to minimize these cracks. UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION Trench excavation for utilities should be sloped or braced in the interest of safety. Attention is drawn to OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1926/1910), Subpart P, regarding trench excavations greater than 5 feet in depth. FIELD SUPERVISION AND DENSITY TESTING Construction observation and testing by a field technician under the direction of a licensed geotechnical engineer should be provided. Some adjustments in the test frequencies may be required based upon the general fill types and soil conditions at the time of fill placement. We recommend that all site and subgrade preparation, proofrolling, and pavement construction be monitored by a qualified engineering firm. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in support of this project. Density tests should be performed to verify proper compaction and moisture content of any earthwork. Inspection should be performed prior to and during concrete placement operations.                   14805 Trinity Boulevard, Fort Worth, Texas 76155  Geotechnical 817.529.8464     Corporate 940.735.3733   www.dsenglabs.com  Texas Engineering Firm Registration # F‐12796  Oklahoma Engineering Firm Certificate of Authorization CA 7181  City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SUMMARY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 011000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Access to site. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Replacement Fire Station, No. 4. 1. Project Location: NEC Sherman Drive and Kings Row, Denton, Texas B. Owner: City of Denton, Texas C. Architect: Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. 12,589 s.f. one story (plus 778 s.f. equipment mezzanine) fire station with three apparatus bays, living quarters, and all associated site work. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Alerting System. 2. Refrigerators. 3. Washers and dryers. 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by Owner’s use of existing facility which must remain in operation until new facility is completed. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SUMMARY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 011000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ALLOWANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ALLOWANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare an Allowance Expenditure Authorization Form based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 2. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allow the lump sum of $1,800 for purchase and installation of cast bronze dedication plaque. B. Allow the lump sum of $3,200 for LEED Signage. C. Allow the lump sum of $75,000 for Owner’s betterment. D. Allow the lump sum of $10,000 for the relocation of existing utility pole (ID 3520) in conflict with driveway along Sherman Drive. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas UNIT PRICES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012200 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Drilled Piers: 1. For actual depth versus anticipated depth indicated on Drawings. 2. Reconciliation: Per pier diameter category for net add or deduct, not per individual pier. 3. For each diameter category pier required, provide: a. Unit price per additional lineal foot of completed pier. b. Unit price per deleted lineal foot of completed pier. c. Unit price per additional lineal foot of steel casings. d. Unit price per deleted lineal foot of steel casings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ALTERNATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012300 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: To be determined. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use [facsimile of form provided in Project Manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES or other agency approved by local authority . j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within sevendays of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within the stated period during bidding phase or within 60days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. c. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012500.13 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: _______________________________ (After Contract Award) TO: _________________________________ _________________________________ NO. ____________ DATE: _________________________________ Contractor hereby requests acceptance of the following product or system as a substitution in accordance with provisions of Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures:” 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM Substitution request for: _________________________________________________ Specification Section No.: _________________ Article/ Paragraph: _________________ 2. REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST SPECIFIED PRODUCT . . . PROPOSED PRODUCT . . .  Is no longer available.  Will reduce construction time  Is unable to meet project schedule.  Will result in cost savings of  Is unsuitable for the designated application. $ _________________ to Project  Cannot interface with adjacent materials.  Is for supplier’s convenience  Is not compatible with adjacent materials.  Is for subcontractor’s convenience  Cannot provide the specified warranty.  Other:________________________________  Cannot be constructed as indicated _________________________________________  Cannot be obtained due to one or more of the following:  Strike  Bankruptcy of manufacturer or supplier  Lockout  Similar occurrence (explain below) 3. SUPPORTING DATA  Drawings, specifications, product data, performance data, test data, and any other necessary information to facilitate review of the Substitution Request are attached.  Sample is attached.  Sample will be sent if requested. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. QUALITY COMPARISON Provide all necessary side-by-side comparative data as required to facilitate review of Substitution Request: SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED PRODUCT Manufacturer: __________________________ ___________________________ Name / Brand: __________________________ ___________________________ Catalog No.: __________________________ ___________________________ Vendor: __________________________ ___________________________ Variations: __________________________ ___________________________ (Add Additional Sheets If Necessary) Local Distributor or Supplier: ___________________________________________ Maintenance Service Available:  Yes  No Spare Parts Source: __________________________________________________ Warranty:  Yes  No _____ Years 5. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS Identification of at least three similar projects on which proposed substitution was used: PROJECT #1: Project: _______________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ Architect: _______________________________________________________ Owner: _______________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________ Date Installed: _______________________________________________________ PROJECT #2: Project: _______________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________ Architect: _______________________________________________________ Owner: _______________________________________________________ Contractor: _______________________________________________________ Date Installed: _______________________________________________________ Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION Proposed substitution affects other work or trades:  No  Yes (if Yes, explain) _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Proposed substitution requires dimensional revisions or redesign of architectural, structural, M-E-P, life safety, or other work:  No  Yes (if Yes, attach data explaining revisions) 7. STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF REQUEST TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Contractor and Subcontractor have investigated the proposed substitution and hereby represent that: A. They have personally investigated the proposed substitution and believe that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above; B. The proposed substitution is in compliance with applicable codes and ordinances; C. The proposed substitution will provide same warranty as specified for specified product; D. They will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution into the Work, and will include modifications to the Work as required to fully integrate the substitution; E. They have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution (attached); F. They will pay any redesign fees incurred by the Architect or any of the Architect’s consultants, and any special inspection costs incurred by the Owner, caused by the use of this product; G. They waive all future claims for added cost or time to the Contract related to the substitution, or that become known after substitution is accepted. H. The Architect’s approval, if granted, will be based upon reliance upon data submitted and the opinion, knowledge, information, and belief of the Architect at the time decision is rendered and Addendum is issued; and that Architect’s approval therefore is interim in nature and subject to reevaluation and reconsideration as additional data, materials, workmanship, and coordination with other work are observed and reviewed. Contractor:______________________________________________________________ (Name of Contractor) Date: ___________________ By: _______________________________________ Subcontractor:__________________________________________________________ (Name of Subcontractor) Date: ___________________ By: _______________________________________ Note: Unresponsive or incomplete requests will be rejected and returned without review. 8. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION  Substitution is accepted.  Substitution is accepted, with the following comments:______________________ ___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012500.13 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016  Resubmit Substitution Request:  Provide more information in the following areas: ______________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________  Provide proposal indicating amount of savings / credit to Owner  Bidding Contractor shall sign Bidder's Statement of Conformance  Bidding Subcontractor shall sign Bidder's Statement of Conformance  Substitution is not accepted:  Substitution Request received too late.  Substitution Request received directly from subcontractor or supplier.  Substitution Request not submitted in accordance with requirements.  Substitution Request Form is not properly executed.  Substitution Request does not indicate what item is being proposed.  Insufficient information submitted to facilitate proper evaluation.  Proposed product does not appear to comply with specified requirements.  Proposed product will require substantial revisions to Contract Documents. By: ___________________________________________ Date:________________________ Architect has relied upon the information provided by the Contractor, and makes no claim as to the accuracy, completeness, or validity of such information. If an accepted substitution is later found to be not in compliance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide the specified product. 9. OWNER’S REVIEW AND ACTION  Substitution is accepted; Architect to prepare Change Order.  Substitution is not accepted.  Owner will pay Architect directly for redesign fees.  Include Architect’s Additional Service fee for implementing the substitution in the Change Order. By: ____________________________________________ (Owner/Owner’s Representative) Date:_____________________________________________ END OF FORM Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012600 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified,after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." or other form acceptable to Architect. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012600 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or other form acceptable to Architect. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. ConstructionChange Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the ConstructionChange Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703 . 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values prior to the next Applications. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 25 day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. G. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. H. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAYMENT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 012900 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. K. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. Schedule of values. 2. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. 3. LEED action plans. 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. L. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. M. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 7. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. c. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. d. Indicate required installation sequences. e. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format. 3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Refer to Section 011000 "Summary" for digital data software program. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Sustainability Coordination Conference: Owner will schedule and conduct a LEED coordination conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner Architect, and Contractor. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent and Sustainability coordinator; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect meeting requirements for Sustainability certification, including the following: a. Sustainability Project Checklist. b. General requirements for Sustainability-related procurement and documentation. c. Project closeout requirements and Sustainability certification procedures. d. Role of Sustainability coordinator. e. Construction waste management. f. Construction operations and Sustainability requirements and restrictions. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect , and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Options. b. Related RFIs. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Sustainable design requirements. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013100 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Status of submittals. 3) Status of sustainable design documentation, including review of action plans. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. G. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. May be an employee of the Contractor. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 7 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Provisions for future construction. b. Seasonal variations. c. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, LEED documentation, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of separate contractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 6. Accidents. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (see special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Partial completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013200 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013233 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 4. Preconstruction video recordings. 5. Periodic construction video recordings. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Basis for Bids: Base number of construction photographs on average of 20 photographs per week over the duration of Project. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For photographer. B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. Mount camera on a fixed pole at a location and height as approved by Architect. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013233 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs and video of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag excavation areas before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take photographs with web cam mounted on pole and connected to internet via IP address. 1. Frequency: Take photographs at 1 minute intervals each day construction activities occur. 2. Vantage Points: Confirm location with Architect. F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. will inform photographer of desired vantage points. 1. Do not include date stamp. G. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. b. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. d. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. c. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 28 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. e. . E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Send electronic submittals as PDF electronic files to Architect. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Color charts for full available range of colors. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013300 - 7 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 013520 - LEED REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: This Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Silver certification based on LEED- 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovations. 1. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on material selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements. Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests. 2. Additional LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of the Work of the Contract. 3. A copy of the LEED Project checklist is included in the Appendix for information only. B. Related Sections: Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-FSC-accredited certification body. B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool. D. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value. E. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value. 1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. 2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. F. Inside Weatherproofing System: Building materials and products that are applied on site within rooms, spaces, and portions of the Project in which air is heated and air-conditioned and recirculated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sections. B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to that submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements. C. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project for divisions 3-10, 31, and 32. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items: 1. Plumbing. 2. Mechanical. 3. Electrical. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Specialty items and equipment. 5. Wood-based construction materials. D. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met: 1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste management plan complying with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 2. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. 3. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. 4. Credit MR 7: List of proposed certified wood products. Indicate each product containing certified wood including its source and cost of certified wood products. 5. Credit EQ 3.1: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. E. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the following: 1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Waste reduction progress reports complying with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 2. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Recycled content. 3. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Regional materials. 4. Credit MR 7: Certified wood products. F. LEED Documentation Submittals: 1. Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2: Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 2. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. 3. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. 4. Credit MR 7: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. 5. Credit EQ 3.1: a. Construction indoor-air-quality management plan. b. Product data for temporary filtration media. c. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. d. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the construction period along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-air- quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials 6. Credit EQ 3.2: Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air-quality testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-quality testing procedures and requirements. 7. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 8. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 9. Credit EQ 4.3: a. Product data for carpet indicating compliance with Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus Program. b. Product data for hard surface flooring indicating compliance with FloorScore standard. c. Product data for concrete sealer, dye, and finish indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. d. Product data for tile setting adhesives and grout indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 10. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood adhesives indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin. 11. Product information must be certified by manufacturer. 12. Custom fabricated product information may be certified by manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. LEED Coordinator: Contractor shall be the single point of contact responsible for the coordination of the LEED documentation and implementation. LEED coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator. LEED coordinator must have a LEED AP BD+C designation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. The contractor shall have a copy on site of “LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, 2009 Edition” with a copy of the latest addenda, published by the United State Green Building Council. C. Many LEED points are dependent on the Contractor’s performance, collaboration, and attention to plans and specifications. Cooperation of the Contractor and subcontractors is crucial in achieving LEED certification. PART – PRODUCTS 2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS A. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project. 1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post- consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. 2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of pre- consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item. 3. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items and equipment in the calculation. 4. To comply with the requirements of this point, the Architect has specified the recycled content of certain materials. However, because the point relies on costs of materials, the Contractor is responsible for the achievement of this point. 2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Credit MR 5.1and Credit MR 5.2. Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials.. 2.3 CERTIFIED WOOD A. Credit MR 7: Provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01- 001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to, the following materials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products: a. Rough carpentry. b. Miscellaneous carpentry. c. Heavy timber construction. d. Wood decking. e. Metal-plate-connected wood trusses. f. Structural glued-laminated timber. g. Finish carpentry. h. Architectural woodwork. i. Wood paneling. J Wood veneer wall covering. k. Wood flooring. l. Wood lockers. m. Wood cabinets. n. Doors 2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants with VOC contents that comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, effective date July 1, 2005, and the rule amendment date of January 7, 2005 .and calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. The requirements are listed below for the Contractor’s convenience: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Indoor Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L 10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. 20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 23. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 24. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 25. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 26. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 27. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 28. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 29. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight. 30. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 31. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 32. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 33. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 34. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 35. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 36. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 37. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that comply with the following standards for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D and the following chemical restrictions: 1. Green Seal Standard GS-11, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993: Architectural coatings and applied to interior walls and ceilings. 2. Green Seal Standard GS-03, 2nd Edition, January 7, 19 97: Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates. 3. SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect on January 1, 2004: Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs. 4. The requirements are listed below for the Contractor’s convenience: a. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. b. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. c. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. d. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. e. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. f. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. g. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. h. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. i. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. j. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). k. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: i. Acrolein. ii. Acrylonitrile. iii. Antimony. iv. Benzene. v. Butyl benzyl phthalate. vi. Cadmium. vii. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. viii. Di-n-butyl phthalate. ix. Di-n-octyl phthalate. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 x. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. xi. Diethyl phthalate. xii. Dimethyl phthalate. xiii. Ethylbenzene. xiv. Formaldehyde. xv. Hexavalent chromium. xvi. Isophorone. xvii. Lead. xviii. Mercury. xix. Methyl ethyl ketone. xx. Methyl isobutyl ketone. xxi. Methylene chloride. xxii. Naphthalene. xxiii. Toluene (methylbenzene). xxiv. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. xv. Vinyl chloride. C. Credit EQ 4.3: 1. Provide carpet compliant with the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus Program. 2. All carpet adhesives must comply with IEQc4.1. 3. All hard surface flooring must meet the requirements of FloorScore standard as shown with testing by an independent third-party. Mineral-based finish flooring products and unfinished/untreated solid wood flooring qualify for credit without any IAQ testing requirements. 4. Concrete sealer, stain, and finish must meet the requirements of SCAQMD Rule 113, Architectural Coatings, rules effective January 1, 2004. 5. Tile adhesives and grout must meet VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168, effective date of July 1, 2005 and the amendment date of January 7, 2005. D. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives that contain urea-formaldehyde resin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Credit SSpr1: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Comply with Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and SWPP as shown in Civil Drawings as well as the requirements of the EPA General Permit 2003 and Oklahoma Department of Environmental Quality. Compliance requires the implementation of the ESC Plan prior to construction, the monitoring of the indicated BMPs and strategies, the implementation of different BMPs as site conditions require and the maintaining of the BMPs until the latter of the end of the project or the requirements for stabilization have been met. 2. Particular attention should be given to the often overlooked requirements for temporary stabilization of portions of the site as required in the ESC Plan and dust control. These requirements will be strictly enforced. B. Action Plans and Progress Reports: 1. Within 5 days of the Notice to Proceed and prior to any construction activity or site, including demolition, provide a plan showing the implementation of the plan, including the phasing of the work, the location for the job trailer and storage containers, areas to be used for staging, location of concrete washout, location of the topsoil stockpile, and slope protection. 2. Contractor inspection forms shall be emailed to the Architect weekly. 3. Maintain an ESC Plan noting all changes to BMPS, the phasing of the grading, and other events required by the SWPPP. C. Documentation for LEED Submission: The Contractor shall provide a written letter that the ESC Plan was implemented, monitored, and maintained according to the ESC Plan and standards referenced above. 3.2 Credit EA 1 and EA 3: COMMISSIONING AND ENHANCED COMMISSIOING A. Contractor responsibility 1. Coordinate, through the Architect, a pre-construction meeting with all necessary subcontractors to explain the commissioning process what will be required of them 2. Allow the commission agent access to the work 3. Cooperate with the commissioning agent through-out the process 4. Distribute and collect commissioning forms created by the commissioning agent B. Documentation for LEED Submission: Collect forms and reports from subcontractors. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2: CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Contractor responsibility: As detailed in Section 017419, Contractor is to develop and implement a Construction Waste Management Plan prior to construction. During construction, the Contractor is to monitor the Plan and ensure compliance. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: Comply with documentation requirements of LEED On-Line. 3.4 Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre- consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project. 2. To comply with the requirements of this point, the Architect has specified the recycled content of certain materials. However, because the point relies on costs of materials, the Contractor is responsible for the achievement of this point. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: 1. Provide material cost data as described above. 2. Provide product data for all building materials and products in Divisions 2 through 10 that includes a. Manufacturer’s name and contact information b.. Description of product c. Cost to general contractor d. Recycled Content broken down into pre consumer and/or post-consumer content e. Source of recycled content data. 3. Complete credit templates on “LEED Online” Web site. 3.5 MRc5.1 and 5.2 REGIONAL OF MATERIALS A. Contractor Responsibility: 1. Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials. 2. To comply with the requirements of this point, the Architect has specified products that are required to be a regional material. However, because the point relies on costs of materials, the Contractor is responsible for the achievement of the point. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: 1. Provide material cost data as described above. 2. Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 3. Provide product data for all building materials and products in Divisions 2 through 10 that includes: a. Manufacturer’s name and contact information b. Description of product c. Cost to general contractor d. Extraction location(s) e. Manufacture location(s) f. Weight g. Percentage by weight material that is compliant 4. Complete credit template on “LEED Online” Web site. 3.6 Credit MRc7 – CERTIFIED WOOD A. Contractor Responsibility: 1. Provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materials that are certified in accordance with the Forrest Stewardship Council’s principles and criteria, for wood building components. 2. To comply with the requirements of this point, the Architect has specified products that are required to be certified. However, because the point relies on costs of materials, the Contractor is responsible for the achievement of the point. 3. Track certified wood purchases and retain associated COC documentation. 4. Collect copies of vendor invoices for each certified wood product. Invoice must include vendor’s COC number. 5. The invoice shall be supplemented by a letter from the vendor stating that the products invoiced are FSC Certified. 6. The invoice or the letter must state whether the products are FSC Pire, FSC Mixed Credit, or FSC Mixed (%). 7. Collect copies of vendor invoices for all wood products. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 7 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 2. Prepare all invoices, letters, and documentation for submittal to LEED On-line Web site. 3. Complete credit template on “LEED Online” Web site. 3.7 IEQ 3.1 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT – DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Section 015720. 3.8 Credit IEQ 3.2: CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT – BEFORE OCCUPANCY A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Conduct baseline indoor-air-quality testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with the EPA’s "Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air," and as additionally detailed in the USGBC’s LEED-NC Reference Guide.” 2. Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentrations listed below are not exceeded: a. Formaldehyde: 27 ppb b. Particulates (PM10): 50 micrograms/cu. m. c. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 micrograms/cu. m. d. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 micrograms/cu. M (Only required if carpets and fabrics with styrene butadiene (SBR) latex backing are installed as part of the base building systems.) e. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor levels. 3. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting non-complying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the first test. 4. Air-sample testing shall be conducted as follows: a. All measurements shall be conducted prior to occupancy but during normal occupied hours, and with building ventilation system starting at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outside air flow rate for the occupied mode throughout the duration of the air testing. b. Building shall have all interior finishes installed including, but not limited to, millwork, doors, paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Nonfixed furnishings such as workstations and partitions are encouraged, but not required, to be in place for the testing. c. Number of sampling locations will vary depending on the size of building and number of ventilation systems. For each portion of building served by a separate ventilation system, the number of sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. for each contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and shall include areas with the least ventilation and greatest presumed source strength. d. Contractor should include in his bid one test for each air handler and one test for the apparatus bays. 4. Air samples shall be collected between 3 and 6 feet from the floor to represent the breathing zone of occupants, and over a minimum four-hour period. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: 1. Letter from testing agency on their letterhead showing compliance and describing the protocol taken. 2. Complete credit template on “LEED Online” Web site. 3.9 Credit IEQ 4.1: LOW-EMMITTING MATERIALS – ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Apply adhesives and sealants complaint with requirements noted above. 2. All adhesives and sealants shall be included in Submittal Process 3. Prior to application in field the any adhesive or sealant shall be reviewed by the Contractor. 4. Contractor shall post signs (in English and in Spanish) through-out the building reading “Have all sealants and adhesives approved by Superintendent before applying.” 5. Contractor shall track the amounts of each adhesive and sealant used on site. 6. The application even one non-compliant adhesive or sealant will disqualify the team from achieving this credit. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: 1. Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 2. Complete credit template on “LEED Online” Web site. 3.10 Credit IEQ 4.2: LOW-EMMITTING MATERIALS – PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Apply paints and coatings complaint with requirements noted above. 2. All paints and coatings, including shop applied, shall be included in Submittal Process 3. Prior to application in field the any paint or coating shall be reviewed by the Contractor. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas LEED REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 013520 - 8 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Contractor shall track the amounts of each paint and coating used on site. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 3.10 Credit IEQ 4.3: LOW-EMMITTING MATERIALS – CARPET AND FLOORING A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Install carpet and flooring compliant with requirements noted above. 2. Use adhesive compliant with requirements noted above. B. Documentation for LEED Submission: Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 3.11 Credit IEQ 4.4: LOW-EMMITTING MATERIALS – COMPOSITE WOOD AND AGRIFIBER PRODUCTS A. Contractor responsibility: 1. Install composite and wood agrifiber compliant with requirements noted above B. Documentation for LEED Submission: 1. Refer individual specification section for Submittal requirements. 2. For products without a specification section, submit product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer, stating that the product does not contain any added urea formaldehyde resins. 3. For composite wood and agrifiber assemblies, provide a letter or literature from the responsible party, stating that the laminating adhesive used in the fabrication does not contain any added urea formaldehyde resins. 4. Schedule of where the various products or assemblies were installed. 5. Complete credit templates on “LEED Online” Web site. END OF SECTION LEED 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovations City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 Project Checklist 5/18/2016 14 1 12 Possible Points: 26 Y ?N Y ?N Y Prereq 1 1 1 Credit 4 1 to 2 1 Credit 1 1 2 Credit 5 1 to 2 5 Credit 2 5 1 Credit 6 Rapidly Renewable Materials 1 1 Credit 3 Brownfield Redevelopment 1 1 Credit 7 1 6 Credit 4.1 6 1 Credit 4.2 1 13 2 Possible Points: 15 3 Credit 4.3 Alternative Transportation—Low-Emitting and Fuel-Efficient Vehicles 3 1 Credit 4.4 2 Y Prereq 1 1 Credit 5.1 Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat 1 Y Prereq 2 1 Credit 5.2 Site Development—Maximize Open Space 1 1 Credit 1 1 2 Credit 6.1 Stormwater Design—Quantity Control 1 1 Credit 2 1 2 Credit 6.2 Stormwater Design—Quality Control 1 1 Credit 3.1 1 1 Credit 7.1 Heat Island Effect—Non-roof 1 1 Credit 3.2 1 1 Credit 7.2 1 1 Credit 4.1 1 1 Credit 8 Light Pollution Reduction 1 1 Credit 4.2 1 1 Credit 4.3 1 6 4 Possible Points: 10 1 Credit 4.4 1 1 Credit 5 1 Y Prereq 1 1 Credit 6.1 Controllability of Systems—Lighting 1 2 2 Credit 1 Water Efficient Landscaping 2 to 4 1 Credit 6.2 1 2 Credit 2 Innovative Wastewater Technologies 2 1 Credit 7.1 1 4 Credit 3 2 to 4 1 Credit 7.2 Thermal Comfort—Verification 1 1 Credit 8.1 1 9 9 17 Possible Points: 35 1 Credit 8.2 1 Y Prereq 1 5 1 Possible Points: 6 Y Prereq 2 Y Prereq 3 1 Credit 1.1 1 6 3 10 Credit 1 1 to 19 1 Credit 1.2 1 7 Credit 2 1 to 7 1 Credit 1.3 1 2 Credit 3 2 1 Credit 1.4 1 2 Credit 4 2 1 Credit 1.5 1 1 2 Credit 5 3 1 Credit 2 1 2 Credit 6 2 3 1 Possible Points: 4 5 3 7 Possible Points: 14 1 Credit 1.1 1 Y Prereq 1 1 Credit 1.2 1 3 Credit 1.1 1 to 3 1 Credit 1.3 1 1 Credit 1.2 Building Reuse—Maintain 50% of Interior Non-Structural Elements 1 1 Credit 1.4 1 1 2 Credit 2 1 to 2 2 Credit 3 1 to 2 55 17 40 Possible Points: 110 Regional Priority: SSc5.1 Regional Priority: SSc6.1 Regional Priority: SSc6.2 Regional Priority: MRc2 Measurement and Verification Exemplary Performance: SSc5.2 Innovation in Design: Education Innovation in Design: Reduced Mercury in Lamps Exemplary Performance: WEc3 45% Exemplary Performance: MRc5 30% Materials Reuse Storage and Collection of Recyclables Materials and Resources Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems Total Construction Waste Management Enhanced Commissioning On-Site Renewable Energy Enhanced Refrigerant Management Construction IAQ Management Plan—Before Occupancy Materials and Resources, Continued Water Efficiency Building Reuse—Maintain Existing Walls, Floors, and Roof Alternative Transportation—Parking Capacity Heat Island Effect—Roof Recycled Content Regional Materials Certified Wood Alternative Transportation—Bicycle Storage and Changing Rooms Sustainable Sites Alternative Transportation—Public Transportation Access Site Selection Development Density and Community Connectivity Construction Activity Pollution Prevention Low-Emitting Materials—Adhesives and Sealants Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings Optimize Energy Performance Energy and Atmosphere Water Use Reduction—20% Reduction Low-Emitting Materials—Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products Low-Emitting Materials—Flooring Systems Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control Thermal Comfort—Design Controllability of Systems—Thermal Comfort Green Power Water Use Reduction Minimum Energy Performance Fundamental Refrigerant Management Daylight and Views—Views LEED Accredited Professional Daylight and Views—Daylight Certified 40 to 49 points Silver 50 to 59 points Gold 60 to 79 points Platinum 80 to 110 Construction IAQ Management Plan—During Construction Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring Indoor Environmental Quality Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control Increased Ventilation Regional Priority Credits Innovation and Design Process (This page intentionally left blank) RECYCLED CONTENT is the proportion of preconsumer and postconsumer recycled material in a product as defined by ISO 14021. Some materials may have one, both or neither types of recycled content included but the total overall percentage will never exceed 100%. PRECONSUMER RECYCLED CONTENT (also referred to as postindustrial content) is the percentage of recycled material in a product that is created from manufacturing waste. This content is typically the waste stream from one manufacturing process that is then used as source material in a secondary process. . Examples include aluminum shavings from a mill that are then melted and recast into aluminum hinges, or wood scrap created from milling lumber that is then used as source material for OSB (oriented strand board). Materials that are reused within the same process are excluded, and are typically referred to as rework or regrind. An example of material that would be excluded is clay waste generated during the brick extrusion process that is put back into the extruder and continued to use for bricks. POSTCONSUMER RECYCLED CONTENT is the percentage of recycled material in a product that is created from waste that has already been utilized by a consumer, and can no longer serve its intended purpose. Examples include acoustical ceiling tiles that include content from recycled newspapers, or terrazzo that includes glass chips from recycled glass containers. REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED MATERIALS are materials that are assembled as a finished product within 500 miles of the project site. Manufactured materials are materials that are purchased and then installed by the trades workers. Assembly for materials is does not include on-site assembly, erection, or installation of finished components. For example, in order for sheetrock to contribute to this credit, the raw materials for sheetrock (gypsum) would need to be extracted within 500 miles of the project site. The assembly point for the sheetrock would be the manufacturing plant that creates the sheetrock. The assembly point would not be the installation of the sheetrock at the project site. Only materials that are permanently installed in the project should be included (i.e. exclude shoring, scaffolding, etc.) REGIONALLY EXTRACTED MATERIALS are raw materials that are sourced within 500 miles of the project site. In terms of LEED, extracted materials are defined as materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered. FSC WOOD is wood that has been certified by the Forest Stewardship Council. Proof of FSC wood is show by submitting vendor invoices that include the materials broken out by line item, and include the COC certificate number for each FSC product. CHAIN OF CUSTODY (COC) is a tracking procedure for a wood product that allows tracking throughout the manufacturing process. This process starts at the point of harvest or extraction and continues through the successive stages of processing, transforming, manufacturing and distributing the material. SAMPLE MATERIAL REPORTING FORM http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. Material Reporting Form for LEED™ Projects Subcontractor: Click here to enter text. Division #/ Submittal # Click here to enter text. Contact Name: Click here to enter text. Phone Click here to enter text. E-mail Address: Click here to enter text. Total Material Cost: $ Click here to enter text. Subcontract Amount: $ Click here to enter text. Include CSI Division 3-10, 31.60.00, 32.10.00, 32.30.00, 32.90.00 Exclude Equipment, Labor, Overhead and Profit I hereby certify that the material information and cost data included below is an accurate representation of the materials provided to us, as components of the final building construction. Authorized Representative Signature Date Click here to enter text. Material Manufacturer Dollar Amount Recycled Content Regional Materials Wood Products Cutsheet? % Post % Pre Extracted Distance Manufactured Distance % FSC Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. Page # of # Material Reporting Form for LEED™ Projects Material Manufacturer Dollar Amount Recycled Content Regional Materials Wood Products Cutsheet? % Post % Pre Extracted Distance Manufactured Distance % FSC Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % Click here to enter text. Click here to enter text. $ Enter Amount Enter % Enter % Enter Distance Enter Distance Enter % http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. Page # of # (This page intentionally left blank) Architectural Applications VOC Limit (g/L less water) Specialty Applications VOC Limit (g/L less water) Sealant Primers VOC Limit (g/L less water) Indoor carpet adhesives 50 PVC welding 510 Architectural, nonporous 250 Carpet pad adhesives 50 CPVC welding 490 Architectural, porous 775 Wood flooring adhesives 100 ABS welding 325 Other 750 Rubber floor adhesives 60 Plastic cement welding 250 Aerosol Adhesives VOC Limit (% by weight) Subfloor adhesives 50 Adhesive primer for plastic 550 Ceramic tile adhesives 65 Contact adhesive 80 General purpose mist spray 65% by weight VCT adhesives 50 Special purpose contact adhesive 250 General purpose web spray 55% by weight Drywall/panel adhesives 50 Structural wood member adhesive 140 Special purpose aerosol adhesives 70% by weight Cove base adhesives 50 Sheet applied rubber lining operations 850 Paints/ Coatings VOC Limit (g/L less water) Multipurpose construction adhesives 70 Top and trim adhesive 250 Structural glazing adhesives 100 Anti-Corrosive/ Anti-Rust 250 Substrate Specific Applications VOC Limit (g/L less water) Sealants VOC Limit (g/L less water) Clear Wood Lacquer 550 Clear Wood Sanding Sealer 350 Metal to metal 30 Architectural 250 Clear Wood Varnish 350 Plastic foams 50 Nonmembrane roof 300 Floor Coatings 100 Porous material (except wood) 50 Roadway 250 Interior Flat Coating 50 Wood 30 Single-ply roof membrane 450 Interior Non-Flat Coating 150 Fiberglass 80 Other 420 Primer 200 Shellac/ Clear 730 Shellac/ Pigmented 550 Stain 250 SAMPLE VOC REPORTING FORM http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. VOC Reporting Form for LEED™ Projects Subcontractor: Click here to enter text. Division #/ Submittal # Click here to enter text. Contact Name: Click here to enter text. Phone Click here to enter text. E-mail Address: Click here to enter text. Subcontract Amount: $ Click here to enter text. I hereby certify that: Below is a full list of all adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings included within the waterproofed interior of the project for our scope of work. Our scope of work includes no adhesives, sealants, paints or coatings within the waterproofed interior of the project. Authorized Representative Signature Date Click here to enter text. Product Voc Level Allowed VOC Level (Per Table) Compliant? (Yes/No) Cutsheet? Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. Page # of # VOC Reporting Form for LEED™ Projects Product Voc Level Allowed VOC Level (Per Table) Compliant? (Yes/No) Cutsheet? Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No Click here to enter text. Click here to enter VOC Click here to enter VOC Yes/No http://www.axiomsustainable.com This document is the property of Axiom Sustainable Consulting and is intended for direct project utilization. It may be freely distributed and reused as long as this statement of authorship is included. This form may not be resold or included as part of any combined material without prior written permission of the author. ©2010 Axiom Sustainable Consulting, LLC. Page # of # (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of commencement of construction , and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Refer to Section 014339. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency and special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014000 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas REFERENCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014200 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014339 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 014339 - MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A An Envelope Pre-construction meeting shall be held with all of the subcontractors responsible for erecting the envelope related materials. B. Work includes: Constructing mock-up, including all reviewed submittals required by the Contract Documents, to establish compliance with the design intent as well as the specified requirements to provide a complete and watertight facility. C. Providing a photo manifest of as-built conditions as the mock-up is being constructed. Photos shall be kept at the job site during construction for reference. D. Mock-up fabrication must be completed and reviewed and approved by the Owner and Architect prior to starting installation of envelope material. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination of product submittals and construction installation: 1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted. 2. Verify that each item being submitted is in conformance in all respects with the specified requirements. 3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal for the mock-up, the contractor certifies that this coordination has been performed. 4. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same manner of specified construction as the new construction. 5. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same workmanship and quality as being implemented on the new construction. 6. All material to be installed shall be reviewed by architect and consultants for conformance. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Mock-ups construction shall be coordinated by the General Contractor and constructed by the subcontractor responsible for the actual construction work. All conditions and materials to be used on the job shall be included in the mock-up. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. B. Contractor shall start the construction of the mock-up based on, but not limited to, the following list: 1. Waterproofing membrane 2. Damproofing material 3. Flexible Through-Wall Flashing Membrane 4. Metal Through-Wall Flashing 5. Preformed Flashing Pieces 6. Face Brick with Mortar and Weeps 7. CMU with mortar and weeps 8. Wall Ties 9. Weather Barrier 10. Weeps 11. Window Unit C. Samples and Manufacturer's Submittals: Submit prior to delivery or installation. 1. Samples of all building system components including all specified accessories. 2. Submit samples of proposed warranties complete with any addenda necessary to meet the warranty requirements as specified. 3. Submit latest edition of manufacturer's specifications and installation procedures. Submit only those items applicable to this project. 4. A written statement from the materials manufacturer approving the installer, specifications and drawings as described and/or shown for this project and stating the intent to guarantee the completed project. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014339 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 5. Follow submitted shop drawings, product data of all sheet metal. D. Scale and Measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. E. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all conditions, projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in the drawings. 1. Manufacturer's Details: All termination details and other details normally required by the manufacturer's Technical Specifications, including both standard details and special details, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer, the company project manager, and the Owner's representative prior to final installation. F. Provide manufacturer's approved details, of all perimeter conditions, project conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in the drawings. 2.2 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Work provided on the mock-up shall follow all of the submitted literature from manufacturers. B. Manufacturer’s literature shall be the minimum for basis of design and shall be in conjunction with construction documents. All manufacturers' warranties shall remain in effect as specified. 2.3 SAMPLES A. Provide sample or samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. 2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Unless the precise color and pattern are specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect/Project Manager for selection. B. Contractor shall coordinate with Architect for exact layout or design of patterns and textures and how they are to be installed on the mock-up. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS A. Contractor shall install all materials on mock-up in same manner required for the main structure. Refer to specification sections for basis of design of all material being installed on this mock-up. B. Contractor shall maintain a photo manifest of mock-up construction for Architect and Owner to review. C. Quality of installation is of utmost importance and shall be monitored for completeness and conformance. D. Once mock-up is complete, it shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner’s Representative for conformance to construction documents. E. Contractor shall install material in same sequencing as required by industry standards. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS AND ASSOCIATED FLASHING A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the window with associated trades to maintain proper compatibility of material. B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. C. Install all perimeters flashing as detailed to create a sealed and watertight condition. D. Once window and flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING AT THROUGH-WALL LOCATION A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the wall flashing with associated trades to maintain proper compatibility of material. B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 014339 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Once flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 7. WiFi connection. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures". C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. b. Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following: 1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed. 2. Memory: 4 gigabyte. 3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive. 4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM. 5. Full-size keyboard and mouse. 6. Network Connectivity: 02/110BaseT Ethernet. 7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista Business. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 8. Productivity Software: a. Microsoft Office 2010 or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook. b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher. c. WinZip 7.0 or higher. 9. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015000 - 7 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and largest diameters at 6 inches above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch size; and 12 inches above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size. B. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings. C. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and [defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated. D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following: 1. Organic Mulch: 1-pint volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. 2. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from full-size components. 3. Protection-Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation. C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction. 1. Species and size of tree. 2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 3. Reason for pruning. 4. Description of pruning to be performed. 5. Description of maintenance following pruning. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm. B. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. C. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA. B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following: a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Enforcing requirements for protection zones. c. Arborist's responsibilities. d. Field quality control. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. 1. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inchesdeep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. B. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Type: Ground or shredded bark. 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Natural. C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting[ one of] the following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening, 0.148-inch- diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. a. Height: 6 feet. 2. Gates: Single swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches. D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering and as follows: 1. Size and Text: As shown on Drawings. 2. Lettering: 3-inch- high minimum, white characters on red background. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. C. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. D. Cut underbrush under all trees throughout the entire site. 3.3 TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. 3. Access Gates: Install where indicated; adjust to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. Install one sign spaced approximately every 20 feet on protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction. C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. D. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. E. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1. Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction and as required for root pruning. D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.5 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends . 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches outside of the protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.6 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following: a. Type of Pruning: Cleaning. b. Specialty Pruning: Restoration. 3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site. 3.7 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015639 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.9 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs. 2. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and shrubs. 3. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions. 4. Perform repairs within 24 hours. 5. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. Confirm with Architect that intent of Tree Preservation Plans are being met. 1. Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 6 inches or smaller in caliper size. For trees over 6 inches, provide twice the caliper size. 2. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 329300 "Plants." C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inchesdeep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 015713 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes providing temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporary measures include the following. 1. Silt fences. 2. Sediment barriers and check dams. 3. Stabilized construction entrance. 4. Construction of temporary swales and sedimentation basins as required. 5. Seeding, sodding, and hydromulching. 6. Dust control. 7. Slope protection. B. Comply with all local, state, and federal regulations regarding erosion control including the applicable provisions of the National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) regulations from the Federal Clean Water Act. C. Should any provisions of this section be at variance with erosion control plan prepared by the civil engineer, the civil engineer’s directive shall take precedence. 1.2 NOTICE OF INTENT A. Contractor and Owner shall jointly submit an EPA Notice of Intent (NOI) prior to construction. B. Contractor shall prepare the report, coordinate with Owner, and file in accordance with regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILT FENCE A. Filter Fabric: Non-woven polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide thermoplastic fibers with non-raveling edges. The fabric shall be non-biodegradable, inert to most soil chemicals, ultraviolet resistant, unaffected by moisture or other weather conditions, and permeable to water while retaining sediment. The filter fabric shall be supplied in rolls a minimum of 36 inches wide. 1. Acceptable Products: Lundin "Silt Buster", Mirafi "Envirofence" or acceptable substitution. B. Wire Fence Support: Welded wire fabric 2 x 4 - W1.0 x W1.0. C. Fence Posts: Painted or galvanized steel Tee or Y-posts with anchor plates, not less than 5 feet in length with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot . Hangers shall be adequate to secure fence and fabric to posts. Posts and anchor plates shall conform to ASTM A-702. D. Dust Retardent: Equal to one of the following: 1. Coherex by Golden Bear Div of Witco Corp, Chandler, AZ. 2. Soil-Sement by Midwarst Insustrial Supply, Canton, OH. 3. Soil Seal Concentrate by Soil Seakl Corp., Los Angeles, CA. 2.2 SEDIMENT TRAPS A. Standard manufacture designed to fit the intended inlet. 2.3 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Aggregate: Graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448 and TEX 401-A coarse-aggregate; with 0 percent being retained by a 5-inch sieve and 100 percent being retained by a 3-inch sieve. 2.4 GRASS A. Materials and seeding and sodding shall conform to applicable Division 32 section. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.5 FERTILIZER A. Use commercial grade fertilizers to insure germination and growth. Analysis by weight shall be 16-4-8 or 15-5-10 for Nitrogen, Phosphoric Acid and Potash. 2.6 WATER A. Use clean potable water for maintaining the grass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Keep disturbed areas to a minimum required to adequately perform the work. At all times maintain the site in such a manner that minimizes erosion of the site. The execution of work under this section shall be in conformance with the NPDES rulings and the site Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 3.2 SILT FENCES A. Silt fence shall be a minimum of 24 inches (0.6 meter) high. Posts shall be embedded a minimum of 12 inches in the ground, placed a maximum of 8 feet apart and set on a slight angle toward the anticipated runoff source. 1. When directed by the Engineer or designated representative, posts shall be set at specified intervals to support concentrated loads. B. Securely attach filter fabric to posts and wire support fence, with the bottom 12 inches of filter fabric buried in a trench a minimum of 6 inches deep and 6 inches (150 mm) wide to prevent sediment from passing under the fence. 1. When silt fence is constructed on impervious material, a 12-inch flap of fabric shall be extended upstream from the bottom of the silt fence and weighted to limit particulate loss. 2. No horizontal joints will be allowed in the filter fabric. 3. Vertical joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches with the ends sewn or otherwise securely tied. C. Silt fence shall be maintained for the duration of the project, and repaired, replaced, and/or relocated when necessary or as directed by the Engineer or designated representative. Accumulated silt shall be removed when it reaches a depth of 6 inches. 3.3 EROSION CONTROL BARRIERS A. Provide erosion control barriers at intervals along swales and ditches as shown on the Drawings or as necessary to meet the requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Barriers: Silt fence or hay bales placed as indicated on the Drawings. C. Maintain barriers in good working condition and replace when damaged. 3.4 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Remove trees, brush, stumps, obstructions, and other objectionable material and disposed of in a manner that will not interfere with the excavation, grading, and construction of the entrance as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Stabilized construction entrance shall not drain onto the public right-of-way and shall not allow surface water runoff to exit the construction site. 2. When necessary, vehicle wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right of way. a. When vehicle washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized with crushed stone, which drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin. 3. Sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse through use of sand bags, gravel, boards, silt fence or other methods approved by the Engineer or designated representative. B. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or disposition of sediment onto public right of way. Provide periodic top dressing with additional stone as conditions demand, as well as the repair and/or cleanout of any measures used to trap sediment. Sediment that is spilled, dropped, washed, or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.5 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SWALES A. Description: 1. Provide temporary and permanent drainage swales as required to carry drainage away from the work area to an approved outfall point. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, swales shall be earthen "V" shaped channels graded to a sufficient depth and slope to carry the anticipated runoff, but at least 2 feet deep with a slope of 0.1 percent. 3. Swales not designated to remain in place at the completion of the contract shall be cleaned of any muck, debris and other unsuitable material and filled with approved fill before final grading operations begin. 4. Swales shall have erosion control barriers as required. 5. All permanent swales shall be sodded to a minimum width of 10 feet on either side of the centerline of the swale. B. Maintenance: 1. During the course of construction maintain temporary swales constructed for this contract so as to allow proper drainage from the construction area. Before Contractor leaves the site at the end of construction, place temporary swales to remain in good working condition. 2. Work with other contractors at the site in maintaining existing swales and ditches. 3. Where necessary for access to the work areas, install adequately sized culverts and maintain to provide the access without disturbing the site drainage. 4. Take care not to rut and damage sodded swales. Immediately repair damaged swales. 5. Keep sodded swales mowed. 3.6 DRAINAGE DITCHES A. Immediately hydromulch drainage ditches upon final grading. B. Repair erosion of the banks of the drainage ditches immediately and re-stabilize. C. Place sediment barriers at intervals along the ditch as shown on the plans or as necessary to help trap sediment on the site. Daily remove sediment and other debris trapped by the barriers. D. Maximum Ditch Side Slopes: 3 feet horizontal to 1 foot vertical. E. Maintenance of the ditches during construction shall include but not be limited to mowing, re-grading, sediment removal, re-hydromulching, bank repair and debris removal. F. Sediment removed from the ditches may be respread on the site as directed by the Owner. 3.7 FILL AND CUT SLOPES A. Fill slopes in all cases shall be no steeper than 3:1 unless specifically stated on the plans or approved by the Owner's soils engineer. B. When cut slopes exceed 2:1 for depths over 3 feet, proper bracing and shoring per OSHA requirements shall be used and maintained. C. For permanent slopes, cut or fill, between 2:1 and 10:1, erosion protection shall be provided with hydromulching, sodding, seeding, or other method as approved. 3.8 SEDIMENTATION BASINS A. Description: 1. Provide sedimentation ponds where indicated. 2. Route drainage from cleared areas through the sedimentation basin. 3. Operate and maintain the pond during construction. B. Maintenance: 1. Maintain the pond and the outfall and sediment retarding structure in good working condition throughout the time the pond is to be in operation. 2. When sediment and debris fill the pond to over one third (1/3) its designed capacity, clean out the pond. 3. Stockpile, in its’ own separate area, the sediment from the clearing operation, or remove from the site, as required. Make adequate drainage provisions such that drainage from the sediment stockpile drains back into the sediment pond. When approved by the Owner, sediment removed from the pond may be spread over the site. 3.9 SEEDING A. Seed disturbed portions of the site and stockpile areas within 14 days if the phasing of the construction operations are anticipated to leave those portions of the areas unworked for 21 days or more. B. Maintain seeded areas until the project is accepted by the Owner. Maintain by watering, fertilizing, reseeding, mowing and erosion repair as may be required. Cut grass when the average height of the grass reaches 6 inches. Clippings may be mulched back into the seeded areas. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015713 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.10 DUST RETARDENT A. Apply with mobile pressure type distributor truck at 300 gallons per acre. Initiate dust retardent treatment once site grading has been initiated and during windy conditions (forcasted or actual 20 mph or greater). Perform not less than 3 times per day during the months of May-Sept and once per day the remaining months or whenever dryness of the soil warrants. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015720 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 015720 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements to develop and utilize an indoor air quality plan for the construction operation. 2. A sample plan applicable to all interior construction and trades. 3. Reference: a. “IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction”, 2nd Edition, 2007, by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 1.2 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide copies of the plan and training to all subcontractors and appropriate personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Contractor shall utilize a plan to protect the indoor environments from contamination during construction and finish out similar to the following plan. B. Contractor shall enforce and verify compliance by all personnel and subcontractors. C. Contractor shall take pictures of the related construction operations to verify conformance to each section of the plan. These pictures will be provided to the Architect. A minimum of 18 pictures (6 pictures taken on three separate occasions) will be submitted. Each set of photos shall be date stamped, highlighting the indoor air protection measures listed in paragraph 3.2A1a-e below. 3.2 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS A. Introduction 1. This plan outlines the processes required to assure acceptable air quality. Elements of the program include: a. HVAC Protection and Containing the work area, b. Source Control and Modifying HVAC Operation and Reducing Emissions, c. Pathway Interruptions, d. Intensifying Housekeeping, and e. Scheduling or Relocation of Occupants. 3.3 THESE REQUIREMENTS APPLY TO ALL PARTIES INVOLVED IN DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND BUILDING MOVE IN: A. CONTAMINANTS 1. Air contaminants include many different materials. These may include; gases, vapors, chemicals, mold/fungus, pathogens, allergens, particulates and radiation. Eliminating all of these is not possible but reducing the introduction and distribution of these contaminants is possible and desirable. The programs outlined in the following pages is intended to reduce contaminants and provide as clean a building as possible for the residents. 2. The following sections outline procedures and precautions to reduce building contamination and meet the requirements for a healthy environment. B. CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS 1. HVAC PROTECTION: The air conditioning system is the distribution method for air and potentially contaminants throughout the building. Keeping the system clean is a necessity. a. All air handling equipment, spiral and fabricated ducts and accessories shall be kept clean during transportation, storage and assembly. All equipment, ductwork, and accessories stored on- site shall be raised off of the floor on pallets. b. All lined, spiral and assembled ducts shall be wrapped and protected from dirt and water during transportation and storage. All equipment, ductwork, and accessories stored on site shall be raised off of the floor or ground on pallets. c. All insulation and lined duct shall be kept dry at all times. Any insulation that has become wet shall be removed and replaced. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015720 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 d. Fiberglass ductboard in the air handlers and bases shall be kept dry and clean. Exposed fiberglass subject to erosion shall be coated with a sealer to prevent the entry of raw fiberglass into the air stream. 1) Water will not be allowed to stand on any mechanical equipment. f. All open ends of installed duct and equipment shall be covered and sealed to prevent the entry of dirt. g. All zone boxes shall be wrapped and sealed from dirt and water before installation. Installed zone boxes shall have the openings sealed until permanently connected to the ductwork. h. All dampers and attenuators into open chases and ducts shall be covered to reduce dirt entry. i. The air handlers shall not be started without MERV 8 filtration in place. Upon system activation, install sheet media on all return openings and filters in zone box plenum openings. These filters must be monitored and changed as necessary to prevent the entry of dirt into the system. The temporary media shall be removed after building flush out and before occupancy. j. The return air system should not be used during sheet rock installation, sanding or painting operations. k. The building should be kept under a positive pressure as much as possible. l. Chase dampers shall be kept closed until the system is activated. m. Complete the initial mechanical checklists at system startup. n. Replace final filters with new filters before flush out or occupancy per design requirements. 2. SOURCE CONTROL a. No smoking or tobacco materials shall be allowed in the building. b. No gasoline or fuel fired equipment shall be used inside any enclosed building. c. Wet processes within the building shall be kept to a minimum. d. All chase and wallboard materials shall be protected from water. All damaged materials shall be removed and replaced. e. Use low emission materials and chemicals. f. All cleaning involving chemicals shall be performed outside the building wherever possible. g. All carpet materials shall be unrolled or unboxed and aired out in a well-ventilated ware- house for a minimum of three days before installation unless the carpet meets the require- ments of The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green label Plus program and the cushion meets the requirements of The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green label program. Carpet and cushion should be installed a minimum of three days prior to conducting indoor air qual- ity testing.carpet materials shall be unrolled or unboxed and aired out in a well-ventilated warehouse for a minimum of three days before installation. h. All modular furniture shall be aired out in a well-ventilated warehouse for seven days before entry into the building unless the modular furniture is Greenguard certified. i. Trash shall be cleaned up and removed daily to the appropriate recycle container. j. Any mold growth shall be treated according to the procedures shown in the New York City Department of Health “Guidelines on Assessment and Remediation of Fungi in Indoor Environments. k. Clean the inside of all walls at the base track to remove excess materials and dirt with a vacuum cleaner before enclosing the wall. This is particularly critical on walls with plumbing or water piping included. l. HEPA vacuum all concrete floors before installation of floor covering materials. m. No obvious mold or chemical contamination shall be enclosed, hidden or painted. 3. PATHWAY INTERRUPTION a. Dust producing operations shall be exhausted to the outside to the extent possible. b. Exhaust fans may be installed on each floor to remove dust and contaminants. c. The air handler shall supply conditioned air to the floors. Floors with heavy dust or chemical operations shall be exhausted to the outside. d. During rain or high humidity conditions, the air supply coming from the coils shall be cooled to 55 degrees F or the air handler stopped to prevent moist air entry into the building. Ex- haust fans shall not draw moist air into the building. It is preferable to have little airflow to moist air entering the building. e. Return air dampers and openings shall be covered with filter media during operations that may contaminate the system. 4. HOUSEKEEPING a. Food or food residues shall be properly disposed after meals or breaks. b. Once the building is enclosed with finishes applied, keep dirt entry to a minimum with walk off mats at all entrances. Clean the mats at least daily. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 015720 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 c. All sweeping shall be done with dust reducing wax-based sweeping compounds. d. All materials shall be kept clean and stored neatly on dunnage or pallets as required by the manufacturer. e. Coils, fans, and air handler chambers including return air chambers shall be inspected and cleaned if required before start up, final testing and commissioning, and air testing. f. All workers shall utilize the proper personal protective equipment per OSHA standards dur- ing any operation involving chemicals and dust production. No food, drink, or smoking shall be allowed within the building after the building is enclosed. 5. SCHEDULING a. Complete all dust producing and chemical operations before the installation of “sink” mate- rials such as carpet and ceiling tile. b. Complete the HVAC control system sufficient to allow the operation of the supply and ex- haust systems to control pressurization and contaminants. c. Group contaminating operations where possible to maximize exhaust use. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 016000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by . E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 013520. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a licensed surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concreteand Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas EXECUTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017300 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. Comply with Indoor Air Quality Plan During Construction (Section 015720). 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphalt paving. b. Concrete. c. Concrete reinforcing steel. d. Brick. e. Concrete masonry units. f. Rough hardware. g. Roofing. h. Insulation. i. Doors and frames. j. Door hardware. k. Windows. l. Glazing. m. Metal studs. n. Gypsum board. o. Acoustical tile and panels. p. Carpet. q. Carpet pad. r. Equipment. s. Cabinets. t. Plumbing fixtures. u. Piping. v. Supports and hangers. w. Valves. x. Sprinklers. y. Mechanical equipment. CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 z. Refrigerants. aa. Electrical conduit. bb. Copper wiring. cc. Lighting fixtures. dd. Lamps. ee. Ballasts. ff. Electrical devices. gg. Switchgear and panelboards. hh. Transformers. 2. Construction Waste: a. Masonry and CMU. b. Lumber. c. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. g. Insulation. h. Carpet and pad. i. Gypsum board. j. Piping. k. Electrical conduit. l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. G. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. This can be an employee of the Contactor. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. Representatives of each subcontractor shall sign a form confirming they have been trained. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. E. Recycling Receivers and Processors area limited to list below: 1. City of Denton Solid Waste and Recycling, 1527 South Mayhill Road, Denton, Texas 76208. (940) 349-8700. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. B. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. C. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. D. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. E. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphalt Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 1. Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for use as general fill. B. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase. D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-inch size. a. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for use as general fill. b. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use as mineral mulch. 2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. E. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. F. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories. G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. H. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. J. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive. 1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. CONSTRUCTION WASTE Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017419 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. D. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Section 013520 and in individual Sections. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 7 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first [and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor]. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017700 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Also provide two hard copies of the O&M Manual. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017823 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit of each submittal. E. Reports: Submit written report ]indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017839 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as . 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as . 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as . 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 017900 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. C. Training for mechanical systems and emergency generator shall be provided by the manufacturer. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. B. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. C. . D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 018119 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 018119 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality during construction to achieve LEED Indoor Air Quality Management Plan – During Construction and LEED Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - Before Occupancy. 1.2 PROJECT GOALS A. See Section 01 35 04 LEED Requirements, for overall project goals relating to environment and energy. B. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. C. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 3. Perform either a building flush-out or indoor air quality testing to assure indoor air pollutant levels are at a minimum. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 1 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 018119 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. 8. Describe coordination with commissioning procedures. C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivering and storing of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Store such materials on pallets to avoid exposure to moisture on the ground. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. 4. Discard and replace such materials damaged by moisture. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. HVAC equipment and supply air ductwork may be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Ensure that air filters are correctly installed prior to starting use; replace filters when they lose efficiency. D. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. E. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. F. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. G. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. H. Contractor is responsible for choosing, performing or contracting, and managing one of the following options to obtain 1 point under IEQ Credit 3.2 – Construction Indoor Air Quality City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 018119 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Management Plan – Before Occupancy. 1. Option 1: Flush-Out a. Path 1: After construction ends, prior to occupancy and with all interior finishes installed, install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying volume of 14,000 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60 degrees F and relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. i. Provide monitoring and documentation of temperature and humidity 3 times per day during flush-out period. ii. Coordinate with trades to ensure HVAC system operates as per requirements and schedule referenced above. iii. Work within the building can’t be completed while flush-out is being completed prior to occupancy. iv. Coordinate with Engineer of Record for the exact flush out duration and airflow prior to occupancy. OR b. Path 2: If occupancy is desired prior to completion of the flush-out, the space may be occupied after delivery of a minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor area. Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cfm per square foot of outside air or the design minimum outside air rate determined in IEQp1, whichever is greater. During each flush-out period ventilation must begin a minimum of 3 hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy. These conditions must be maintained until a total 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outside air has been delivered to the space. i. Provide monitoring and documentation of temperature and humidity 3 times per day during flush-out period. ii. Coordinate with trades to ensure HVAC system operates as per requirements and schedule referenced above. iii. Work within the building can’t be completed while flush-out is being completed prior to occupancy. iv. Coordinate with Engineer of Record for the exact flush out duration and airflow both prior to and post occupancy. 2. Option 2: Air Testing a. Conduct baseline IAQ testing after construction ends and prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air. i. The contractor shall contract with a qualified sub-contractor to provide IAQ testing. ii. The contractor is to coordinate construction activities to prepare for the IAQ testing, which will take place after all construction activities are complete and prior to owner furniture move in. iii. The building is to be cleaned with Green Seal or equivalent cleaning chemicals. vi. Vacuum cleaners with HEPA filters to be used. vii. Outside air to be used flush out the building as much as practical. viii. Filtration media to be replaced prior to testing. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION A. This Section 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS shall form the basis of the construction phase commissioning process and procedures. The Commissioning Agent shall add, modify, and refine the commissioning procedures, as approved by the Owner, to suit field conditions and actual manufacturer's equipment, incorporate test data and procedure results, and provide detailed scheduling for all commissioning tasks. B. Various sections of the project specifications require equipment start-up, testing, and adjusting services. Requirements for start-up, testing, and adjusting services specified in the Division 7, Division 08, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27, Division 28, and Division 31 series sections of these specifications are intended to be provided in coordination with the commissioning services and are not intended to duplicate services. The Contractor shall coordinate the work required by individual specification sections with the commissioning services requirements specified herein. C. Where individual testing, adjusting, or related services are required in the project specifications and not specifically required by this commissioning requirements specification, the specified services shall be provided and copies of documentation, as required by those specifications, shall be submitted to the OWNER and the Commissioning Agent to be indexed for future reference. D. Commissioning is a systematic process of verifying that the building systems perform interactively according to the construction documents and the OWNER’s operational needs. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training. Commissioning during the construction, acceptance, and warranty phases is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the contract documents: 1. Verify that the applicable equipment and systems are installed in accordance with the contact documents and according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Verify and document proper integrated performance of equipment and systems. 3. Verify that O&M documentation is complete. 4. Verify that all components requiring servicing can be accessed, serviced and removed without disturbing nearby components including ducts, piping, cabling or wiring. 5. Verify that the OWNER’s operating personnel are adequately trained. 6. Document the successful achievement of the commissioning objectives listed above. E. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a finished and fully functioning product. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning activities have been developed to support the United States Green Building Council (USGBC) LEED ™ rating program and to support delivery of project performance in accordance with the OWNER requirements developed for the project. 1. Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on “Energy and Atmosphere” and the prerequisite of “Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning.” 2. Commissioning activities and documentation for the LEED™ section on “Energy and Atmosphere” requirements for the “Enhanced Building System Commissioning” credit. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Architect: Includes Architect identified in the Contract for Construction between the Department of Veterans Affairs and Contractor, plus consultant/design professionals responsible for design of fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, controls for HVAC systems, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, as well as other related systems. B. CxA: Commissioning Agent. C. Commissioning Plan: a dynamic document that describes how the commissioning process will be applied to this project. It is an overall plan that provides the structure, schedule and coordination for the commissioning process. D. Commissioning Issue: a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that affects the system operations, maintenance, and/or repair. E. Commissioning Observation: a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that may not be in compliance with the Contract Documents, or may not be in compliance with the manufacturer’s installation instruction, or may not be in compliance with generally accepted industry standards. F. Systems Functional Performance Test: a test, or tests, of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Systems Functional Performance Testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB’s primary work is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been set up. The Commissioning Agent develops the Systems Functional Test Procedures in a City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 sequential written form, coordinates, directs and documents the actual testing. Systems Functional Testing is performed by the Contractor. Systems Functional Performance Tests are performed after System Readiness Checklists, startups, and control systems are complete and functional, and TAB functions are complete. G. System: A system is defined as the entire complex which must be coordinated to work together during normal operation to produce results for which the complex is designed. For example, air conditioning supply air is only one component of an entire system which provides comfort conditions for a building. Other related components are return air, exhaust air, steam supply, chilled water supply, refrigerant supply, hot water supply, controls and electrical service, etc. System Readiness Checklist: a list of items provided by the Commissioning Agent to the Contractor that require inspection and elementary component tests conducted to verify proper installation of equipment. System Readiness Checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some System Readiness Checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three-phase pump motor of a chiller system). The term “System Readiness” refers to before functional testing. System Readiness Checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist and the Contractor’s Quality Control checklists. H. Seasonal Performance Tests Functional Performance Test: a test or tests that are deferred until the system will experience conditions closer to their design conditions. I. OWNER: Includes the OWNER, or other authorized representative of the Owner. J. TAB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.4 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified for this project is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the OWNER’s Operation and Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the OWNER and the Commissioning Agent. B. The following systems will be commissioned as part of this project: 1. Plumbing (Division 22) a. Domestic Hot Water systems (Domestic water heaters, steam-to-hot water converters, hot water circulating pumps and motors, controls, combustion burners/fans/motors). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. HVAC (Division 23) a. Split System DX Unit with Furnace (Fans, motors, cooling coils and control valves, heating coils and control valves, filters, dampers, safeties such as smoke detectors or freeze stats and damper end switches, controls, and gages.) b. Exhaust fans (Fan, motor, Variable Speed Drives, controls and safeties). c. Direct Digital Control system (BACnet or similar Local Area Network (LAN), Operator Work Station hardware and software, building controller hardware and software, terminal unit controller hardware and software, all sequences of operation, system accuracy and response time). d. Commercial Kitchen Hoods & Associated Fire Suppression Systems (Fans, motors, Variable Speed Drives, automatic shut down on fire suppression discharge, and gas valve operation). 3. Electrical (Division 26) a. Lighting controls (Control system hardware and software, scene settings, zone settings, occupancy sensor interface, and unoccupied cycle control). 1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM A. Members Appointed by Contractor: 1. Contractor: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules and coordinates the commissioning activities for the construction team. 2. Contractor’s Commissioning Representative(s): Individual(s), each having authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated actions. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project Superintendent and sub-contractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the OWNER and Commissioning Agent. B. Members Appointed by OWNER: 1. Commissioning Agent: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. The OWNER will engage the CxA under a separate contract. 2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. 3. Architect and engineering design professionals. 1.6 OWNER'S COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Appoint an individual, company or firm to act as the Commissioning Agent. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination meetings. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, sub-systems, and equipment. 3. Testing meetings. 4. Witness and assist in systems functional testing. 5. Demonstration of operation of systems, sub-systems, and equipment. C. Provide the Construction Documents, prepared by Architect and approved by OWNER, to the Commissioning Agent and for use in directing the commissioning process, developing the commissioning plan, systems manuals, and reviewing the operation and maintenance training plan. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall assign a Commissioning Manager to manage commissioning activities of the Contractor, and sub-contractors. B. The Contractor shall ensure that the commissioning responsibilities outlined in these specifications are included in all sub-contracts and that sub-contractors comply with the requirements of these specifications. C. The Contractor shall ensure that each installing sub-contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on behalf of the sub-contractor and schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning team activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Participate in construction-phase commissioning coordination meetings. 2. Conduct operation and maintenance training sessions in accordance with approved training plans. 3. Verify that Work is complete and systems are operational according to the Contract Documents, including calibration of instrumentation and controls. 4. Evaluate commissioning issues and commissioning observations identified in the Commissioning Issues Log, field reports, test reports or other commissioning documents. In collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. 5. Review and comment on commissioning documentation. 6. Participate in meetings to coordinate systems functional testing. 7. Provide information to the Commissioning Agent for developing construction-phase commissioning plan. 8. Participate in training sessions for OWNER's operation and maintenance personnel. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 9. Provide technicians who are familiar with the construction and operation of installed systems and who shall develop specific test procedures to conduct systems functional performance testing of installed systems. 1.8 COMMISSIONING AGENT’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Organize and lead the commissioning team. B. Prepare the construction-phase commissioning plan. See Paragraph 1.10-A of this specification Section for further information. C. Review and comment on selected submittals from the Contractor for general conformance with the Construction Documents. Review and comment on the ability to commission the system and/or equipment, including providing gages, controls and other components required to operate, maintain, and test the system. Review and comment on performance expectations of systems and equipment and interfaces between systems relating to the Construction Documents. D. At the beginning of the construction phase, conduct an initial construction-phase coordination meeting for the purpose of reviewing the commissioning activities and establishing tentative schedules for operation and maintenance submittals; operation and maintenance training sessions; TAB Work; Systems Readiness Checklists, Systems Functional Performance Testing; and Project completion. E. Observe construction and report progress, observations and issues. Observe systems and equipment installation for adequate accessibility for maintenance and component replacement or repair, and for general conformance with the Construction Documents. F. Prepare Project-specific Systems Readiness Checklists and Systems Functional Performance Test procedures. G. Coordinate Systems Functional Performance testing schedule with the Contractor. Witness selected systems startups. Verify selected Systems Readiness Checklists completed and submitted by the Contractor. Direct, witness, and document Systems Functional Performance testing. H. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates and include them in the systems manual and commissioning report. I. Review and comment on operation and maintenance (O&M) documentation and systems manual outline for compliance with the Contract Documents. Operation and maintenance documentation requirements are specified in Division 01 78 23 Section "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA." J. Review operation and maintenance training program developed by the Contractor. Verify training plans provide qualified instructors to conduct operation and maintenance training. K. Prepare commissioning reports. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 L. Return to the site at 10 months into the 12 month warranty period and review with facility staff the current building operation and the condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning. Also interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns they have operating the building as originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals. Identify areas that may come under warranty or under the original construction contract. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. M. Assemble the final commissioning documentation, including the Final Commissioning Report and Addendum to the Final Commissioning Report. 1.9 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by Commissioning Agent, that outlines the schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process, and shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports. Identification of the relationship of these documents to other functions and a detailed description of submittals that are required to support the commissioning processes. Submittal dates shall include the latest date approved submittals must be received without adversely affecting commissioning plan. 2. Identification of systems and equipment to be commissioned. 3. Description of schedules for testing procedures along with identification of parties involved in performing and verifying tests. 4. Identification of items that must be completed before the next operation can proceed. 5. Description of responsibilities of commissioning team members. 6. Description of observations to be made. 7. Identification of installed systems, sub-systems, and equipment, including design changes that occurred during the construction phase. B. Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures: The Commissioning Agent will develop Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures for each system to be commissioned, including sub-systems, or equipment and interfaces or interlocks with other systems. Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures will include a separate entry, with space for comments, for each item to be tested. Preliminary Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures will be provided to the OWNER, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor for review and comment. The Systems Performance Test Procedure will include test procedures for each mode of operation and provide space to indicate whether the mode under test responded as required. Each System Functional Performance Test procedure, regardless of system, sub- system, or equipment being tested, shall include, but not be limited to, the following: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Name and identification code of tested item. 2. Time and date of test. 3. Indication of whether the record is for a first test or retest following correction of a problem or issue. 4. Dated signatures of the person performing test and of the witness, if applicable. 5. Individuals present for test. 6. Observations and Issues. 7. Issue number, if any, generated as the result of test. C. System Readiness Checklists: The Commissioning Agent will prepare Systems Readiness Checklists that describe the minimum conditions necessary prior to testing. System Readiness Checklists shall be completed and signed by the Contractor, verifying that systems, sub-systems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing. The Commissioning Agent will spot check System Readiness Checklists to verify accuracy and readiness for testing. Inaccurate System Readiness Checklists shall be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. D. Test and Inspection Reports: The Commissioning Agent will record test data, observations, and measurements on Systems Functional Performance Test Procedure forms. Photographs, forms, and other means appropriate for the application shall be included with data. CxA shall compile test and inspection reports and test and inspection certificates and include them in systems manual and commissioning report. E. Corrective Action Documents: The Commissioning Agent will document corrective action taken for systems and equipment that fail tests. The documentation will include any required modifications to systems and equipment and/or revisions to test procedures, if any. The Commissioning Agent will direct and document any retesting of systems and/or equipment requiring corrective action and document retest results. F. Issues Log: The Commissioning Agent will prepare and maintain Master Commissioning Issues Log that describes Commissioning Issues and Commissioning Observations that are identified during the Commissioning process. These observations and issues include, but are not limited to, those that are at variance with the Contract Documents. The Master Commissioning Issues Log will identify and track issues as they are encountered, the party responsible for resolution, progress toward resolution, and documenting how the issue was resolved. The Master Commissioning Issues Log will also track the status of unresolved and resolved issues. G. Final Commissioning Report: The Commissioning Agent will document results of the commissioning process, including unresolved issues, and performance of systems, sub-systems, and equipment. The Commissioning Report will indicate whether systems, sub-systems, and equipment have been completed and are performing according to the Contract Documents. The commissioning report will include, but is not limited to, the following: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Owner’s Project Requirements prepared by the OWNER 2. Design Narrative documentation prepared and maintained by the A/E. 3. Commissioning plan. 4. System Readiness Checklists completed by the Contractor, with annotation of the Commissioning Agent review and spot-check. 5. Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures, with annotation of test results. 6. Corrective Action Reports with annotation of corrective action taken by the Contractor. 7. Commissioning Master Issues Log. 8. Listing of deferred or off-season test(s) not performed, including the schedule for their completion. H. Addendum to Final Commissioning Report: The Commissioning Agent will prepare an Addendum to the Final Commissioning Report near the end of the Warranty Period. The Addendum will indicate whether systems, sub-systems, and equipment are complete and continue to perform according to the Contract Documents. I. Systems Manual: The Commissioning Agent will gather required information and compile the Systems Manual. The Systems Manual will include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Owner’s Project Requirements 2. Design Narrative, including system narratives, schematics, single-line diagrams, flow diagrams, equipment schedules, and changes made throughout the Project. 3. Reference to the Final commissioning plan. 4. Reference to the Final Commissioning report. 5. Operation and maintenance data as specified in Division 01 78 23 Section "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA." 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Construction Commissioning Plan Submittal: The Commissioning Agent will submit the Preliminary Construction Commissioning Plan. Deliver two copies to the Contractor, one to the OWNER, and one to the Architect/Engineer. Present submittal in sufficient detail to evaluate data collection and arrangement process. One copy, with review comments, will be returned to the Commissioning Agent for preparation of the final construction-phase commissioning plan. B. Construction Commissioning Plan Final Submittal: The Commissioning Agent will submit three hard copies and three sets of electronically formatted information of final commissioning plan. Deliver one hard copy and one set of electronic files to the Contractor, and one hard copy and one set of electronic files to the OWNER, and one hard copy and one set of electronic files to the Architect/Engineer. The final City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 submittal must address previous review comments. The final submittal shall include a copy of the preliminary submittal review comments along with a response to each item. C. Functional Test Procedures and Report Forms: The Commissioning Agent will submit preliminary functional test procedures and forms to the Contractor, the OWNER, and the Architect/Engineer for review and comment. The Contractor shall return review comments to the OWNER and the Commissioning Agent. The OWNER and Architect/Engineer will also return review comments to the Commissioning Agent. The Commissioning Agent will incorporate review comments into the Final Functional Test Procedures to be used in Systems Functional Performance Testing. D. System Readiness Checklists: The Commissioning Agent will submit System Readiness Checklists to be completed by the Contractor. E. Test and Inspection Reports: The Commissioning Agent will submit test and inspection reports to the OWNER with copies to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer. F. Corrective Action Documents: The Commissioning Agent will submit corrective action documents to the OWNER Resident Engineer with copies to the Contractor and Architect. G. Commissioning Report Submittal: The Commissioning Agent will submit two hard copies and two sets of electronically formatted information of the final commissioning report to the OWNER. The Commissioning Agent will also deliver one hard copy and one set of electronic files to the Contractor, and one copy to the Architect/Engineer. The final submittal must address previous review comments and shall include a copy of the preliminary commissioning report review comments along with a response to each item. H. Data for Commissioning: 1. The Commissioning Agent will request in writing from the Contractor specific information needed about each piece of commissioned equipment or system to fulfill requirements of the Commissioning Plan. 2. Typically this information will include manufacturer and model number, detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any required testing, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the OWNER to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be completed and submitted to the Commissioning Agent. 3. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation as is necessary for the commissioning process. 4. Much of this information will also be included with the O&M manual submittals normally submitted for the project. Typically, this information is required to be used in the commissioning process prior to the formal O&M manual submittals. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.11 COMMISSIONING PROCESS A. The Commissioning Agent will be responsible for the overall management of the commissioning process as well as the specific scheduling of all procedures. Commissioning tasks will be coordinated with the Contractor’s Master Construction Schedule. B. Prior to the start of mechanical or electrical system installation, the Contractor shall designate a specific individual as the Commissioning Manager (CxM) to manage and lead the commissioning effort on behalf of the Contractor. The Commissioning Manager shall be the single point of contact and communications for all commissioning related services by the Contractor. C. Prior to the start of mechanical or electrical system installation, the Contractor shall ensure that each sub- contractor designates specific individuals as Commissioning Representatives (CxR) to be responsible for commissioning related tasks. The Contractor shall ensure the designated Commissioning Representatives participate in the commissioning process as team members providing commissioning testing services, equipment operation, adjustments, and corrections if necessary. The Contractor shall ensure that all Commissioning Representatives shall have sufficient authority to direct their respective staff to provide the services required, and to speak on behalf of their organizations in all commissioning related contractual matters. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Management: The Commissioning Agent will direct and coordinate the commissioning activities and the commissioning reports to the OWNER. All commissioning team members shall work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the contract documents. B. Scheduling: The Commissioning Agent will work with the Contractor and the OWNER to schedule the commissioning activities. The Commissioning Agent will provide sufficient notice to the Contractor and the OWNER for scheduling commissioning activities. The Contractor shall integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process. C. Systems Functional Performance Testing Coordination: The Commissioning Agent will coordinate the sequence of testing activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. The Commissioning Agent will coordinate the schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide all standard and specialized testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and Systems Functional Performance Testing. Required test equipment will be City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 identified in the detailed System Performance Test Procedure checklists prepared by the Commissioning Agent. B. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. C. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5 C (1.0 F) and a resolution of + or - 0.1 C (0.2 F). Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 START-UP, SYSTEM READINESS CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT A. The following procedures shall apply to all equipment and systems to be commissioned, according to Part 1, Systems to Be Commissioned. 1. System Readiness Checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are hooked up and operational. These ensure that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment shall receive a full System Readiness Checklist checkout. No sampling strategies are used. The System Readiness Checklist for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or sub-systems of the given system. a. The Commissioning Agent will develop System Readiness Checklists and procedures with the assistance of the Contractor. These checklists indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup and initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution. b. The Contractor shall determine which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution. 2. Sensor and Actuator Calibration a. All field-installed temperature, relative humidity, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on all equipment shall be calibrated using the methods described in Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 specifications. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. All procedures used shall be fully documented on the System Readiness Checklists or other suitable forms, clearly referencing the procedures followed and written documentation of initial, intermediate and final results. 3. Execution of System Readiness Checklists and Startup a. Four weeks prior to startup, the Contractor shall schedule startup and checkout with the OWNER and Commissioning Agent. The performance of the System Readiness Checklists, startup and checkout shall be directed and executed by the Contractor. b. The Commissioning Agent will observe the startup procedures for selected pieces of primary equipment. c. The Contractor shall execute startup and provide the OWNER and Commissioning Agent with a signed and dated copy of the completed start-up, System Readiness Checklists, and initial tests. d. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the System Readiness Checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms. 3.2 DEFICIENCIES, NON-CONFORMANCE, AND APPROVAL IN CHECKLISTS AND STARTUP A. The Contractor shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and system readiness procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the OWNER and the Commissioning Agent within two days of completion. B. The Commissioning Agent will review the report and submit comments to the OWNER. The Commissioning Agent will work with the Contractor to correct and verify deficiencies or uncompleted items. The Commissioning Agent will involve the OWNER and others as necessary. The Contractor shall correct all areas that are non-compliant or incomplete in the checklists in a timely manner, and shall notify the OWNER and Commissioning Agent as soon as outstanding items have been corrected. The Contractor shall submit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the Commissioning Agent will recommend approval of the checklists and startup of each system to the OWNER. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolution of deficiencies identified by the OWNER or Commissioning Agent. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. This paragraph applies to commissioning Systems Functional Performance Testing of equipment and systems for all referenced specification Divisions. B. Objectives and Scope: The objective of Systems Functional Performance Testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the Contract Documents. Systems Functional Performance Testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of non-compliant performance are identified and corrected, thereby improving the operation and functioning of the systems. In general, each system shall be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load, fire alarm and emergency power) where there is a specified system response. The Contractor shall verify each sequence in the sequences of operation. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested. C. Development of Systems Functional Performance Test Procedures: Before Systems Functional Performance Test procedures are written, the Contractor shall submit all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. Using the testing parameters and requirements found in the Contract Documents and approved submittals and shop drawings, the Commissioning Agent will develop specific systems functional test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system to be commissioned. The Contractor shall assist the Commissioning Agent in developing the Systems Functional Performance Test procedures as requested by the Commissioning Agent i.e. by answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc. Prior to execution, the Commissioning Agent will provide a copy of the Systems Functional Performance Test procedures to the OWNER, the Architect/Engineer, and the Contractor, who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. D. Test Methods: Systems Functional Performance Testing shall be achieved by manual testing (i.e. persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) and/or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system's trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The Contractor and Commissioning Agent shall determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method specified. 1. Simulated Conditions: Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be allowed, although timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical. 2. Overwritten Values: Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as overwriting the outside air temperature reading in a control system to be something other than it really is, shall be allowed, but shall be used with caution and avoided when possible. Such testing methods often can only test a part of a system, as the interactions and responses of other systems will be erroneous or not applicable. Simulating a condition is preferable. e.g., for the above case, by heating the outside air sensor with a hair blower rather than overwriting the value or by altering the appropriate City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 15 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 setpoint to see the desired response. Before simulating conditions or overwriting values, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated. 3. Altering Setpoints: Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a sequence is acceptable. For example, to see the Air Conditioning compressor lockout initiate at an outside air temperature below 12 C (54 F), when the outside air temperature is above 12 C (54 F), temporarily change the lockout setpoint to be 2 C (4 F) above the current outside air temperature. E. Setup: Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as closely as is practically possible. The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Contractor shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications, to their pretest condition. F. Sampling: No sampling is allowed in completing System Readiness Checklists. Sampling is allowed for Functional Test procedures execution. The Commissioning Agent will determine the sampling rate. If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the Commissioning Agent may stop the testing and require the Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units. G. Cost of Expanded Sample Testing: The costs for expanded sample System Functional Performance Test shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Any required expanded sample testing by the Contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the Contractor. H. Coordination and Scheduling: The Contractor shall provide sufficient notice to the Commissioning Agent and the OWNER regarding the completion schedule for the System Readiness Checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The Commissioning Agent will schedule Systems Functional Performance Tests with the Contractor and OWNER. The Commissioning Agent will direct, witness and document the Systems Functional Performance Testing of equipment and systems. The Contractor shall execute the tests. I. Testing Pre-Requisites: In general, Systems Functional Performance testing will be conducted only after system readiness checklists and startup has been satisfactorily completed. The control system shall be sufficiently tested and approved by the Commissioning Agent and the OWNER before it is used to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing and water balancing shall be completed before Systems Functional Performance Testing of air-related or water-related equipment or systems are scheduled. Systems Functional Performance Testing will proceed from components to sub-systems to systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems will be checked. J. Problem Solving: The Commissioning Agent will recommend solutions to problems found, however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the Contractor. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 019113 - 16 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.4 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS A. Documentation: The Commissioning Agent will direct, witness, and document the results of all Systems Functional Performance Tests using the specific procedural forms developed by the Commissioning Agent for that purpose. Prior to testing, the Commissioning Agent will provide these forms to the OWNER and the Contractor for review and approval. The Contractor shall include the filled out forms with the O&M manual data. B. Cost of Retesting: The cost to retest a System Functional Performance Test shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Any required retesting by the Contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the Contractor. C. Approval: The Commissioning Agent will note each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the Functional Test shall be made later after review by the Commissioning Agent and by the OWNER. The Commissioning Agent will evaluate each test and report to the OWNER using a standard form. The OWNER will give final approval on each test using the same form, and provide signed copies to the Commissioning Agent and the Contractor. 3.5 DEFERRED TESTING A. Deferred Seasonal Testing: Deferred Seasonal Systems Functional Performance Tests are those that must be deferred until weather conditions are closer to the systems design parameters. The Commissioning Agent will review systems parameters and recommend which Systems Functional Performance Tests should be deferred until weather conditions more closely match systems parameters. The Contractor shall review and comment on the proposed schedule for Deferred Seasonal Testing. The OWNER will review and approve the schedule for Deferred Seasonal Testing. Deferred Seasonal Systems Functional Performances Tests shall be directed, witnessed, and documented by the Commissioning Agent. Deferred Seasonal Systems Functional Performance Tests shall be executed by the Contractor in accordance with these specifications. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 024100 - DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for every type of required demolition. B. Furnish equipment of every type required to demolish and transport construction debris away from the site. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE [Not Used] 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 23 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 1.04 STANDARDS Work shall be performed in accordance with the codes and ordinances of the agency having jurisdiction over the Place of Record. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Stockpile construction debris at the site only as long as necessary to arrange hauling to a disposal site. Stack materials neatly and handle in an orderly manner until removed from site. Construction debris shall be placed in trash containers. Do not allow trash to blow around the construction site. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine the extent of demolition required and the site conditions that might affect his proposal. Include costs of covering all aspects of the demolition as part of the proposal. B. The drawings shall be carefully reviewed to determine the extent of necessary demolition. Property lines and limits of demolition shall be accurately located prior to beginning site demolition. Demolition outside the limits indicated on the plans, or outside the property lines shall not be performed. C. Material removed from the construction site during demolition, and any equipment not otherwise designated to remain the property of the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the construction site. D. Remove and dispose of off-site all drilled pier spoils. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [Not Used] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Mark areas to be cleared and grubbed prior to commencing clearing additional requirements. Program Manager shall approve clearing and grubbing limits prior to commencement of clearing operations. B. The clearing limits shall not extend beyond the project limits, plus adequate distance as approved by the Program Manager to allow for construction procedures. 3.02 BACKFILLING City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. Backfill cavities resulting from demolition. Fill cavities occurring within the limits of building, structures, or pavements in accordance with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill and compact cavities outside the construction limits to the same density as the surrounding earth. B. Except where further excavation extends beyond the cavities resulting from work performed under this section, fill holes with appropriate backfill material and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. Finish the site by blading or other methods to smooth the area, remove ditches, mounds, or other natural or manmade irregular features. Blend grades together in a smooth uniform manner. 3.03 EXISTING LANDSCAPING A. Remove trees and brush of all sizes and description within the limits of construction. Cut trees approximately 12" above ground line and grub out and remove the remaining stumps and roots. Remove root systems larger than one (1) inch to 12" below the lowest foundation line. B. Protect trees and landscaping not designated to be removed from damage. Contractor and Program Manager shall visit the site and mark trees that are to remain. In the event that these trees are in close proximity to the construction, wrap trunks with 2” x 4” timber and take precautions to prevent damage to limbs and root systems. C. Scrape the entire site within the limits of construction, including structures, building, streets, parking lots or other pavements clear of brush, under-growth, or other vegetation. D. Felled trees, brush, lumber, concrete, and other debris shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the site. E. Areas that have gravel parking or areas that are HMAC surfaces shown to be removed will be excavated down to natural soil. All gravel will be stockpiled on site as per Engineer. Gravel may be used in other areas requiring gravel if approved by Engineer. All HMAC surfaces shall be disposed of legally off site. 3.04 EXISTING STRUCTURES Remove any concrete or masonry structures within the limits of the construction, or as otherwise indicated, including concrete slabs, foundations, brick or other masonry work, concrete steps, septic tanks, sidewalks, pavements, curbs and gutters or other components. 3.05 BURIED STRUCTURES Remove underground structures such as abandoned manholes, vaults, septic tanks and distribution field piping, inlets, buried trash, or debris. 3.06 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES Take precautions during excavation procedures to guard against damage to active underground piping. In the event that inactive or abandoned pipelines are uncovered, determine that the lines are inactive, then remove buried piping within the limits of construction, or 4'-0" beyond the limits of buildings or other structures, or as needed to clear excavations. Plug both ends of such abandoned piping with concrete plugs. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL No burning will be permitted on the site. 3.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST At conclusion of demolition, remove all remaining trash and debris from the construction site. Clean site to remove wind-blown paper, trash or other debris. END OF SECTION 024100 (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements. 2. Removing below-grade construction. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place removing site utilities. 4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before the Work begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 3. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review and finalize protection requirements. 5. Review procedures for noise controland dust control. 6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 7. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with or. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used) 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. C. Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 024116 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation. C. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated D. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feetoutside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon below-grade construction outside this area. 1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, completely. E. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area. 1. Fill abandoned utility structures with according to backfill requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Rough grade below-grade areas ready for further excavation or new construction. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. 1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE FORMING FOR CIVIL WORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMING FOR CIVIL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish material and labor to form, tie, brace and support wet concrete, reinforcing steel and embedded items until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to remove forms. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete, the temperature of the concrete, and all other pertinent factors shall be taken into consideration when determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An additional design live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be used on horizontal surfaces. B. ALIGNMENT CONTROL True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be controlled and checked by the following procedures: 1. Forming shall be arranged with provisions for adjusting the horizontal alignment of a form, after the form has been filled with concrete to grade, using wedges, turn-buckles, or other adjustment methods. Establish a transit line or other reference so that adjustments can be made to an established line while the concrete in the top of the form is still plastic. 2. Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals which permit adjustments to a straight line. Concrete shall not be placed until adequate adjusting facilities are in place. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and shall include drawings or descriptions of construction joint locations. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) specifications: ACI 361 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) publication: AISC Manual of Steel Construction C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) publication: D. American Plywood Association (APA) standards 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Lumber for forms shall be stacked neatly on platforms raised above ground. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of various portions of the work required for placing concrete so that compliance with the plans and specifications may be monitored. The Engineer will authorize the Contractor to proceed with the placement after this has been completed and corrections, if required, have been made. B. In hot weather, both sides of the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to prevent warping and to secure tight joints. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE FORMING FOR CIVIL WORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. LUMBER: Properly seasoned and of good quality; free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. B. FIBER BOARD FORM LINING: Hardboard finished smooth on one (1) side; minimum thickness of 3/16"; thoroughly wet with water at least 12 hours before using. C. PLYWOOD FORM LINING: Conforming to APA HDO; exterior exposure waterproof adhesive, 3/8" thick. D. FORM OIL: Light, clear oil; shall not discolor or injuriously affect the concrete surface, subsequent coatings, or delay or impair curing operations 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. LUMBER: Lumber for facing or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one (1) side and two (2) edges, and sized to uniform thickness. Lumber of nominal 1" thickness or plywood of 3/4" thickness shall be permitted for general use on structures, if backed by a sufficient number of studs and wales. B. SPECIAL FORM LUMBER 1. Molding for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of redwood, cypress, or pine materials of a grade that will not split when nailed, and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. The form shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Fillet forms at sharp corners, both inside and outside and at edges, with triangular chamfer strips at all non-contiguous edges exposed to view. Thoroughly oil chamfer strips before installation on forms. 2. Construct forms for railings and ornamental work to standards equivalent to first class mill work. 3. All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall be straight and true with neatly mitered joints, and designed so that the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut. C. FORMS 1. Forms shall be built mortar-tight and of material sufficient in strength to prevent bulging between supports. 2. Reused forms or form lumber shall be maintained clean and in good condition as to accuracy, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. 3. All forms shall be so constructed as to permit removal without damage to the concrete. Exercise special care in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing and ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to the concrete when the forms are removed. D. METAL FORMS 1. The specifications for "Forms” regarding design, mortar tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, re-use, oiling, and wetting shall apply equally to metal forms. 2. The metal used for forms shall be of such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape. Bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. 3. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Exercise special care to keep metal free from rust, grease, or other foreign material that discolors the concrete. E. FORM LININGS 1. Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be given a rubbed finish shall be facelined with an approved type of form lining material. 2. If plywood is used for form lining, it shall be made with waterproof adhesive and have a minimum thickness of 3/4". It shall preferably be oiled at the mill and then be oiled or lacquered on the job before using. 3. If fiber beard is used, apply water to the screen side on the board. Stack the boards screen side to screen side. Use the smooth hard face as the contact surface of the form. Such surfaces may be formed with 3/4" thick plywood made with waterproof adhesive if backed with adequate studs and wales. The greatest strength of the outer plies should be at right angles to the studding. In this case, form lining will not be required. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE FORMING FOR CIVIL WORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Carefully align edges and faces of adjacent panels and fill the joints between panels with patching plaster or cold water putty to prevent leakage. Lightly sand with No.0 sandpaper to make the joints smooth. 5. Forms which are reused shall have all unused form tie holes filled and smoothed as specified above. F. FORM TIES 1. Metal form ties shall be used to hold forms in place and to provide easy metal removal. The use of wire for ties shall not be permitted. 2. Remove metal appliances which are used inside the forms to hold the forms in correct alignment to a depth of at least 1-1/2" from the surface of the concrete, without undue injury to the surface from chipping or spalling. Such devices, when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface no larger than 1" in diameter. 3. Burning off rods, bolts, or ties shall not be permitted. 4. Metal ties shall be held in place by devices attached to wales. Each device shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie. 5. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be wired from the top of form and shall be entirely removed as the concrete is placed. 6. The use of metal form ties which are encased in paper or other material to allow the removal of complete tie, and which leave a hole through the concrete structure, shall not be permitted in the construction of basement or water bearing walls. G. FALSEWORK 1. Falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no excessive settlement or deformation occurs. Falsework shall provide necessary rigidity. 2. Timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in good condition and free from defects which impair its strength. 3. Steel members shall be of adequate strength and shape for the intended purpose. 4 Timber piling used in falsework may be of any wood species which satisfactorily withstands driving and which adequately supports the superimposed load. 5. When sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework Columns, unless founded on solid rock, shale or other hard materials, place them in excavated pits. Backfill to prevent the softening of the supporting material from form drip or from rains that may occur during the construction process. Sills or grillages shall be of ample size to support the superimposed load without settlement. 6. Falsework not founded on a satisfactory spread footing shall be supported on piling, which shall be driven to a bearing capacity to support the superimposed load without settlement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Before placing concrete, insure that embedded items are correctly, firmly and securely fastened into place. Embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact locations by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pre-placement 1. During the elapsed time between building the forms and placing the concrete, maintain the forms to eliminate warping and shrinking. 2. Treat the facing of forms with suitable form oil before concrete is placed. Apply oil before the reinforcement is placed. Wet form surfaces which will come in contact with the concrete immediately before the concrete is placed. 3. At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other extraneous matter at the time. Forms for slab, beam and birder construction shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, matches or any other matter which would mar the appearance of the finished construction. Clean forms and keep them free of foreign matter during concrete placement. B. PLACEMENT 1. Set and maintain forms to the lines designated, until the concrete is sufficiently hardened to permit form removal. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, immediately remove that portion of the concrete causing this condition. If necessary, reset the forms and securely brace against further movement. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE FORMING FOR CIVIL WORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Provide adequate cleanout openings where access to the bottom of the forms is not otherwise readily attainable. 3. Carefully and accurately place and support reinforcement in concrete structures. C. REMOVAL Remove forms so that the underlying concrete surface is not marred or damaged in any way. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength (minimum of 28-day compressive strength) to safely carry the dead load, but in no case less than the number of curing days set forth in the following table. Forms for concrete paving. 7 day min. OR 75%design strength END OF SECTION 031100 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 031100 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes: 1. Shoring formwork and re-shoring of structure 2. Furnish, install and remove formwork for concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Codes and Specifications 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. b. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. c. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. d. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Joints: Submit diagrams of construction joints. B. Form Ties: For Architecturally exposed concrete, submit layout of form tie spacing. C. Product Data: 1. Form oil 2. Form release agent 3. Form sealer 4. Fiberboard void forms 5. Void retainer panels D. Samples: 1. Rustication forms 2. Reglet 3. Dove-tailed anchor slots E. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Recycled Content: a. Indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. b. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Local / Regional Materials: a. Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. b. Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 3. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 product. F. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials off of the ground and protected from weather. 1. Prevent warpage, twisting and excessive moisture gain of wood materials. 2. Discard damaged or deformed materials. B. Protect smooth faces of form liner materials from abrasion, denting or scarring during handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Design and construct forms to withstand stresses due to weight of fresh concrete, vibration during consolidation and loads of equipment and workmen. B. Limit deflections of forms to provide smooth, straight surfaces without unsightly bulges and deformations. C. Limit deformations of forms for architecturally exposed surfaces to 0.0025 times the span of each component (facing material, studs and walers). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces: No. 2 Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir dressed to uniform and smooth contact surfaces. B. Wood forms for concrete surfaces exposed to view: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir concrete form plywood, moisture resistant, not less than 5 plies, minimum thickness of 9/16 inch with one smooth face. Line forms with one of the following: 1. Plywood: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir, concrete form, exterior, 3 ply, not less 1/4 inch thick with one smooth face. 2. Fiberboard: Treated, hard pressed fiberboard having low degree of water absorbability, not less than 3/16 inch thick with one smooth side. C. Forms for sidewalks and paving: nominal 2 inch thick wood or steel secured in place by stakes or pins. D. Void retainers shall be one of the following: 1. Precast Concrete Panels. 1 ½” thick, 3000 psi lightweight or normal weight concrete, reinforced with 4x4-W1.4 welded wire mesh. 2. Lightweight, ribbed, high density polyethylene panels specially made to prevent migration of backfill soil under foundation elements. Required minimum panel height: 14" for 8" void space and smaller; 20" for larger than 8" and up to 14" void space; 26" for larger than 14" and up to 20" void space. Example product: a. Motzblock by M&M Construction Specialties, San Antonio, Texas 3. Extruded polystyrene foam panel. Two inch minimum thickness with square edges. Minimum compressive strength of 25 psi (ASTM D1621) and minimum flexural strength of 60 psi (ASTM C203). Example products: a. Foamular 250 Rigid Foam Insulation by Owens Corning b. Styrofoam Highload 40 Extruded Polystyrene Insulation by Dow City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Rustications and bevels: steel, polyvinyl chloride or milled and sealed white pine. B. Corner chamfers: 3/4 inch white pine or pvc. C. Dove-tailed anchor slots: compatible with specified dove-tailed anchors for masonry veneer. 2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fiberboard void forms (void boxes): manufactured using corrugated paper material with a water resistant fiberboard material exterior, capable of supporting weight of wet concrete without crushing but non-durable in long term (deteriorates over time with the absorption of moisture). Void forms to be laminated using moisture resistant adhesive. 1. Provide all shapes required (rectangular, trapezoidal, etc.) 2. Provide special shapes adjacent to round or skewed components a. Do not cut fiberboard void forms in the field 3. Provide caps at each end of units. 4. Provide a layer of protective cover board over slab void forms to distribute working load and protect the void forms from puncture and other damage during concrete placement. a. Protective cover board to be ¼-inch minimum thickness hardboard/fiberboard or approved equal. 5. Do not use material that is entirely wax impregnated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Form ties: bolt rods or patented devices of sufficient strength to withstand pressure due to wet concrete (3000 lbs. minimum tensile strength); adjustable in length, and removable to a depth of at least 1 inch from the face of the concrete. 1. Ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be equipped with plastic cones 5/8 inch in diameter. 2. Do not use wire ties, or makeshift ties that leave unsightly marks or depressions on the face of the concrete. B. Form oil: non-staining, paraffin-base oil having specific gravity of between 0.8 and 0.9; shall not prevent bonding of finish materials; shall not stain surface of concrete. C. Form release agent: non-staining, chemically inert D. Form sealer 1. Example product: Formfilm by W.R. Grace Co. 2.6 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS A. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. B. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. C. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 2.7 RECYCLED CONTENT A. To the greatest extent possible, provide materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 20% of the total value of the materials in the project. 2.8 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Provide materials and products to the greatest extent possible that are extracted and manufactured within the region. 1. Provide materials and products that use a minimum of 20% of building products that are extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a radius of 500 miles from the project site. a. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is furnished and installed by the tradesman. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Design forms to withstand pressure and weight of wet concrete without bulging or excessive deflection. Comply with ACI 318. B. Construct forms to required shapes, lines and dimensions; provide necessary studs, walers, ties, centering, molds and supports. 1. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 2. Construct forms to be easily removable without damage to finished surfaces. 3. Forms shall not have unsightly marks or deformations on exposed faces. 4. Thoroughly clean forms of concrete laitance before re-use. 5. Provide clean-outs at the base of vertical forms for removal of foreign materials before placement of concrete. C. Support of forms: provide adequate shoring under forms to support loads imposed by wet concrete, equipment and workmen. 1. Shores shall be sufficiently strong and closely spaced to prevent excessive deflections or distortion during placement of concrete. 2. Comply with ACI 347. D. Tying of forms: provide sufficient form ties to prevent bulging or collapse of forms under weight of wet concrete. 1. Place ties in a uniform and orderly pattern. 2. Lubricate ties to prevent bonding with concrete. E. Special features: place in forms any wood strips, blocking, molding, and liners necessary to produce required shapes. 1. Attach feature strips to forms in a manner that will not leave unsightly marks on exposed concrete surfaces. 2. Coat wood strips, blocking and molding with form sealer. 3. Provide chamfer strips in corners of formwork. 4. Provide dove-tailed anchor slots coordinated with masonry. F. Coatings: 1. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for un-exposed concrete surfaces with form oil. 2. Coat contact surfaces of wood forms for exposed surfaces with form release agent before each use. G. Construction joints: 1. Locate construction joints only where required as shown on submittals. a. Do not locate construction joints between lateral bracing elements of walls and columns. b. Locate construction joints in beams, slabs and joists approximately at midspan between supports. c. Construction joints shall be plumb and level. In order to avoid irregular lines at horizontal construction joints in exposed concrete faces, tack a continuous strip of dressed lumber, one inch thick, to inside of wall or grade beam form, with its lower edge at line of construction joint. About one hour after placing concrete in lower part of wall or grade beam, remove strip, level off irregularities which appear in joint line with wood float and remove any laitance present. d. Provide shear keys and waterstops as required in construction joints. H. Fiberboard Void Boxes: 1. Subgrade shall be clean and dry before installing void boxes. 2. Place void cartons tightly end-to-end and secure with waterproof tape. Protect cartons from rain and mud. 3. Do not cut fiberboard void box components in the field. 4. Replace cartons partially or wholly collapsed. 5. Cartons for slabs shall have a protective cover board vapor retarder. a. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. b. Overlap joints at least 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. c. Seal all penetrations per manufacturer's instructions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 031100-5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 d. Repair damaged areas by applying patches of vapor retarder, overlapping at least 6 inches, and taping all sides. 6. Place and arrange void cartons so that all horizontal concrete surfaces that would otherwise be in contact with soil are protected by void boxes. 7. Secure void cartons firmly in place so that their position will not be altered by activities of workmen or placement of concrete. I. Void Retainers: 1. Prior to installing retainers, inspect void spaces to insure voids are intact and that concrete has not entered the void space. a. Where concrete has entered void space, remove excess concrete prior to installing void retainers. 2. Install void retainers as shown on Drawings or in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, including overlap on side of beam or wall and penetration into subgrade. Where discrepancies occur, the most stringent shall govern. 3. Cut retainer material for a tight fit at corners. Tape corners to ensure panels remain accurately in place during backfilling and that backfill soil does not enter the void space. 4. Monitor performance of retainer panels continuously during backfilling. If panels shift, or soil enters the void space, stop work and adjust the installation so that satisfactory performance is assured. 5. Void height tolerance: accurate to plus 2 inches, minus 0 inches than height shown on Drawings. J. Grade Beams: 1. Sides of grade beams shall be formed unless specifically noted or shown otherwise on the Drawings. a. Dimensional tolerances shall conform to ACI requirements for formed beams b. Bulges and offsets and any condition of the formwork that would cause beam sides to become skewed or wider than void box bottom forms shall be repaired before placing concrete. 3.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Remove forms completely, unless specifically required otherwise. B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damage to concrete surfaces. C. Do not remove forms until concrete has adequately set. 1. Clamps and tie rods may be loosened after 24 hours following placement of concrete. a. Maintain sufficient ties to hold forms in place. b. Withdraw through-wall ties toward the inside (or unexposed) face of walls and beams. c. Prevent spalling during removal of ties. 2. Concrete strength tests may be used as evidence that concrete has adequately set for form removal. a. Minimum strength shall be 75% of design strength. b. For post-tensioned concrete, minimum strength shall be as required for tensioning of strands, and post-tensioning shall be complete before removing forms. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING FOR CIVIL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor and reinforcing materials required to cut, bend, tie, splice, place and support the reinforcement in the material grades, sizes, quantities and locations specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE TOLERANCES Reinforcement shall be placed where specified, with the following maximum tolerances, plus or minus: A. Cover 1/4" B. Spacings 1/4" in 12" 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Record data for layouts (shop drawings with bar lists clearly marked with reference to plans. B. Certifications of steel quality, size, grade and manufacturers origin. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards: ASTM A615 “Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement” B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) publications: ACI 301 “Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings” ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete” C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) publication: CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Store steel reinforcement above the surface of the ground upon platform skids or other supports. Protect from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, steel reinforcement shall be free from dirt, scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign material. Tag and store steel reinforcement for ease of correlation with shop drawings. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proposed deviations from reinforcing indicated on the plans or specifications shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to fabrication. B. Bar lengths shall be of the length shown on the plans or tables, not the minimum code length. C. Specified cover for reinforcing shall be maintained throughout construction. Bars shall be cut to lengths necessary to allow for proper clearances. D. Stirrups shall be hooked. E. Steel reinforcing bars shall be produced in the United States of America. F. Cover of concrete shall be measured from face of forms to outside face of reinforcement bar, stirrup or tie. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. STEEL REINFORCING BARS: Billet-Steel bars for concrete reinforcement conforming to ASTM A615; Grade 60 with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. B. SUPPORTS: Bar supports shall be of the proper type for the intended use. Bar supports shall be uniform high density polyethylene (plastic) or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) conforming to CRSI Class 1, Maximum Protection. C. SPACERS: Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. D. MECHANICAL BAR SPLICES: Cadweld splices as manufactured by Erico Products, Inc., or equal, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. The mechanical devices shall develop at least 125% of the specified yield of the spliced bars. E. MECHANICAL THREADED SPLICES: Mechanical threaded connections shall utilize a metal coupling sleeve with internal threads which engage threaded ends of the bars to be spliced and shall develop in tension or compression 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. 2.02 FABRICATIONS BENDING: Reinforcement shall be bent cold by machine to shapes indicated on the plans; true to shapes indicated; irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise noted, all hook and bend details and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of ACI 315 and ACI 318. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION The reinforcing steel in all concrete walls shall be spaced its proper distance from the face of the forms using chairs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Place the reinforcement carefully and accurately in the concrete structures. Rigidly tie and support the reinforcement. Welding of any type of reinforcement shall not be permitted. B. SPLICES 1. Splicing of bars, except where indicated on the plans, shall not be permitted. Lap splices which are permitted shall have a lap in accordance with ACI 318. Rigidly clamp or wire the bars at all splices, in accordance with ACI. Welding of reinforcing steel splices shall not be permitted. 2. Make mechanical splices using “Cadweld” reinforcing bar connectors, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. The mechanical device shall develop at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. 3. Lap splice locations not shown on the plans shall be approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication. Splices shall be kept to a minimum. Splices shall occur only at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. C. PLACEMENT 1. Place steel reinforcement, as indicated on the plans, with the specified tolerances. Hold securely in place during the placing of the concrete. The minimum clear distance between bars shall be per ACI 318. Always pass vertical stirrups around the main tension members and securely attach thereto. Wire reinforcing together at a sufficient number of intersections to produce a sound, sturdy mat or cage of reinforcement that will maintain the reinforcement in correct positions when the concrete is placed. 2. Hold the reinforcing steel in concrete slabs firmly in place with wire supports or “chairs”. Sizing and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to properly support the steel, and shall be in accordance with CRSI Publications “Manual of Standard Practice”. 3. Space the reinforcing steel in concrete walls the proper distance from the face of the forms, as indicted on the drawings, using galvanized metal spacers. 4. Where reinforcing conflicts with location of anchor bolts, inserts, etc., required to be cast in concrete, submit prompt notifications so that revisions can be made before concrete is placed. No cutting of reinforcing shall be permitted without the prior approval of the Engineer. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Concrete shall not be deposited until the Engineer has observed the final placing of the reinforcing steel, and has given permission to place concrete. END OF SECTION 032000 (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Preparation of shop drawings 2. Fabrication and placement of reinforcing B. Products Furnished, not Installed Under This Section 1. Pier reinforcing 1.2 REFERENCES A. Codes and Specifications 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. b. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 3. American Welding Society, AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" 4. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. b. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. c. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. d. ASTM A775, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. e. ASTM D3963, Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. f. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop and installation drawings for review by Architect, including: a. Sizes and quantities of reinforcing b. Reinforcing lengths and details of bending c. Placement instructions d. Details and spacing of supports for reinforcing e. Reference Engineer's reinforcing designations f. Reproduce Engineer's notes regarding placement of reinforcing. 2. Review of Shop Drawings will be for reinforcing sizes, spacing, and general detail only, excluding quantities, lengths and fit of materials. 3. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings. B. Quality Control Submittals 1. Submit certified copies of mill reports, evidencing compliance with requirements of Specifications. 2. Submit copies of laboratory testing and inspection reports. C. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Recycled Content: a. Indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. b. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Local / Regional Materials: a. Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. b. Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 3. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of product. D. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in tagged bundles grouped as to reinforcing size and length. B. Store reinforcing on skids off of the ground and stacked to permit drainage. Prevent build-up of rust and dirt on reinforcing. Protect reinforcing from contamination that would prevent bonding of concrete. C. Do not bend, twist or warp reinforcing during handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel 1. Deformed bars: new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 of required grades. 2. Welded wire mesh: conform to ASTM A185. 3. Reinforcing bars to be welded: conform to ASTM A706 Grade 60. 4. Provide product with an average recyceled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 80 percent, typical unless noted otherwise. B. Reinforcing Fabric 1. Provide product with an average recyceled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 75 percent, typical unless noted otherwise. C. Tie Wire 1. Provide product with an average recyceled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 75 percent, typical unless noted otherwise. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Full-tension sleeve bar splices: sleeve with ferrous filler capable of developing 125% of the yield strength of the required bar size. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Example product: Cadweld Rebar Splice C-Series by Erico Products B. Compression sleeve splice: sleeve with ferrous filler capable of developing 100% of the ultimate compression strength of the required bar size. 1. For use where compression lap splices are not permitted. 2. Example product: Cadweld Rebar Splice Series C-16 C. Compression bar splice: bolted sleeve capable of developing 100% of the ultimate compression strength of the required bar size. 1. For use where compression lap splices are allowed. 2. Example product: Erico Speed Sleeve D. Mechanical couplings: taper threaded hexagonal steel couplers conforming to ACI 318. 1. Provide end caps for future construction applications. 2. Example product: Lenton Rebar Splicing System by Erico Products. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing supports: comply with ACI 315, Chapter 5. 1. Provide concrete bricks or chairs with bearing plates where supports are in contact with soil or vapor barrier. 2. Provide plastic-tipped chairs of suitable color where concrete soffitts will be exposed to view. 3. Provide continuous supports with spacers for slab reinforcing. 4. Recycled Content of steel accessories: Minimum 75 percent post-consumer recycled content 2.4 BAR COATINGS A. Rust inhibitor: epoxy-polyamide 1. Example product: Hi-Build Epoxoline by the Tnemec Co. B. Epoxy Coating: conform to ASTM A775, ASTM D3963. C. Hot-dip galvanizing: conform to ASTM A153. D. Galvanizing repair: zinc-rich compound 1. Example product: Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA. Tel: (800) 831-3275 (www.zrcworldwide.com). 2.5 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS A. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. B. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. C. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 2.6 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: All materials in this section to be a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication 1. Cut reinforcing to required lengths 2. Bend reinforcing cold with suitable equipment. Do not heat or stretch material. Bend radii and extensions shall comply with ACI 318. 3. Do not use reinforcing with kinks or unrequired bends. 4. Do not re-straighten reinforcing bent more than 30 degrees. B. Tolerances: comply with ACI 318. C. Marking: mark reinforcing to correspond with shop drawings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CONCRETE REINFORCING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 032000-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory Services 1. Inspect fabricating and bending procedures 2. Inspect fabricated materials PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean reinforcing of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil and grease. B. Repair damaged epoxy coating with material conforming to Annex A1 of ASTM D3963. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Where required, coat reinforcing with rust inhibitor and touch-up shop coatings. 3.2 PLACEMENT A. Place reinforcing of required sizes and quantities in proper position. Use sufficient supports and spacers to maintain position during placement of concrete. 1. Do not place reinforcing supports against exposed faces of precast panels, beams, walls or copings. B. Secure reinforcing in position with wire ties complying with ACI 318. 1. Clip or bend tails of tie wire away from exposed faces, do not leave tie wire within 1 1/2" of any exposed surface. C. Maintain position of reinforcing mats in walls with metal spacers between the mats. D. Tolerances 1. Top reinforcing in slabs and beams a. Members 8 inches deep or less: + 1/4 inch b. Members more then 8 inches but not over 2 feet deep: + 1/2 inch c. Members more than 2 feet deep: + one inch 2. Lengthwise of members: + 2 inches 3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: + 1/4 inch 4. Minimum spacing between reinforcing bars: 1/4 inch E. Support reinforcing in slabs-on-grade and slabs-on-deck on bolsters or blocks. Do not lift reinforcing during concrete placement. 3.3 COLD BENDING OF BARS IN THE FIELD A. Dowels connecting concrete of different pour sequences may be bent in the field to facilitate form placement and removal with the following conditions: 1. Maximum bar size is #4, 2. Maximum angle of bend is 90 degrees, and 3. Bars may be bent and straightened one time only. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory Services 1. Inspect reinforcing sizes, quantities and placement. 2. Inspect support and securement of reinforcing. 3. Inspect condition of reinforcing. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Place reinforcing to provide required coverage of concrete. B. Comply with minimum requirements ACI 318. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FOR CIVIL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards: ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.” ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection.” ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual for Standard Practice.” B. Workmanship: Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerance, and finishes. Correct deficient unsatisfactory concrete as directed by Engineer. C. Provide testing and inspection service for quality control testing during concrete operations in accordance with General Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Concrete Reinforcement: Submit in accordance with General Conditions. Include drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 ”Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete structures”; shows bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood-faced or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable size to minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly- placed concrete without bow or deflection. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standards PS-1 “B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form,” Class 1. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs and spacers, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. Wood, brick, plastic, and other devices will not be acceptable 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, domestic manufacture. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project. 1. Regional Materials: Provide product that are a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Regional Materials: Provide product that are a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. 2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bankrun gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½". C. Water: Clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Fly ash and calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. 2.04 RELATED MATERIAL A. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. B. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Weldcrete; Larsen Products EucoWeld; Euclid Chemical Co. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mix for concrete, to produce a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,500 psi, as indicated on Contract Documents. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Proportion mixes by laboratory trial batch, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. D. Admixtures: 1. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content of 5% (±1%) with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement of not less than 3" and not more than 5". 2.06 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein specified. No additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump with approval of Architect/Engineer. B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85° F and 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniforms smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1½" inside concrete and which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and locations of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate leaks. I. Forms which are destroyed or damaged and are not capable of supporting the design load shall be replaced with new forms prior to placing concrete. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars,” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete-placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers. D. Place reinforcement to obtain the minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.03 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1½" deep in all construction joints in grade beams. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. D. Control Joints per details. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screeds required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike-off templates. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Pre-Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, where form-coatings are not used. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least one (2) working days prior to concrete placement. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barrier with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. E. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in grade beam forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 48" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place continuously where possible. Start placing at ends of section and progress toward the center. Do not place concrete in beams supported on piers until the concrete in the piers is no longer plastic. F. Consolidate place concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. G. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. H. Placing Concrete: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 I. Consolidate concrete during placing operation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. J. Bring surfaces to the correct level with a straight-edge and strikeoff. Use bull floats and darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollow. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations or while seep water is present on slab surface. K. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. L. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliances with ACI 306. M. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305. 3.07 FINISH OR FORMED SURFACES A. Related Unformed Surfaces: At horizontal offset and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces. 3.08 PAVING FINISHES A. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.09 CONCRETE CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively proper hardening. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Begin Final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50° F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Concrete surfaces shall be cured by application of curing compound. Provide membrane curing by applying membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as water film has disappeared. Apply uniformly in 2-coat continuous operation by power-spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Apply second coat at right angle to first coat. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, and similar parts of the work, may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, provide concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.11 RE-USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound materials to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use “patched” forms for exposed concrete surfaces. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033000 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Remove and replace damaged concrete as directed by Engineer. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over ½” diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edge of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: 1. Slump: ASTM C 143: One test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 2. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens. 3. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. Yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any day or for each 5,000 sq. Ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days and the remaining specimen held for future testing, if required. Report test results in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests. B. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. C. Concrete shall meet the compressive strength as shown on the plans and specifications regardless of ACI 318. ACI 318 shall have no bearing on pass/fail of all site concrete. END OF SECTION 033000 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 033100 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Design of concrete mixes 2. Furnish and place cast-in-place concrete 3. Curing and finishing of concrete 4. Non-shrink grout for structural steel B. Products Furnished, not Installed, under this Section 1. Concrete for drilled piers 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117, Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 211.1, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete. 3. ACI 211.2, Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete. 4. ACI 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 5. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 6. ACI 302, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 7. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 8. ACI 305, Hot Weather Concreting. 9. ACI 306, Cold Weather Concreting. 10. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 11. SP15, Field Reference Manual, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings with Selected ACI and ASTM References. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C42, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 7. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 8. ASTM C156, Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. 9. ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 10. ASTM C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. 11. ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 12. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 13. ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 14. ASTM C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 15. ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 16. ASTM C567, Test for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 17. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 18. ASTM C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 19. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non- Shrink). 20. ASTM C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 21. ASTM E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the "F Number" System (Inch-Pound) Units. 22. ASTM E1745, Standard Specification for Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. C. Corps of Engineers: 1. CRD-C13, Standard Specification for Air- Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 2. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Water Stops. 3. CRD-C621, Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. D. Field Reference Manual: Contractor shall have available in field office a copy of ACI SP-15. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: submit manufacturers data indicating product compliance for the following: 1. Admixtures 2. Floor hardener 3. Curing compound 4. Curing and Sealing Compound 5. Vapor Retarder 6. Reglets 7. Masonry anchors 8. Waterstops 9. Non-shrink grout B. Material Certifications: submit certifications showing compliance for the following: 1. Fly ash. 2. Sieve analyses for structural concrete aggregates: a. Coarse aggregate. b. Fine aggregate. C. Structural Concrete Mix Designs for each class of concrete D. Concrete Delivery Tickets: Submit sample ready-mixed concrete delivery tickets in accordance with ASTM C94 for each class of concrete. E. Construction Joints: submit drawings indicating proposed locations of construction joints. F. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of product. G. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Batch Plant Qualifications - conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transporting: Ready-mixed concrete supplier shall have sufficient capacity and adequate facilities to provide continuous delivery at the rate required for continuous placement throughout any sequence of placement. B. Storage of Materials 1. Store cement in weathertight buildings or bins which prevent intrusion of moisture or contaminants. Store different types of cement in separate facilities. 2. Stockpile aggregates to prevent segregation and contamination with other materials. Thaw frozen aggregates before use. 3. Sand shall be drained to a uniform moisture content before use. 4. Store admixtures securely to prevent contamination, evaporation, damage or temperature variation in excess of the range recommended by the manufacturer. C. Delivery: Truck mixers, agitators and non-agitating units shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ardex Inc. B. Dayton Superior C. Euclid Chemical Company D. W.R. Grace & Company E. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc. F. Master Builders G. W.R. Meadows H. Sika Corporation I. Sonneborn 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland cement: shall be Type I, II or III Portland Cement and meet the requirements of ASTM C150, typical. 1. Regional Materials: Provide product that is a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. B. Fine aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, natural bank or river sand, washed and screened, consisting of hard, durable, uncoated particles free of deleterious matter, and graded from coarse to fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids. 1. Regional Materials: Provide product that is a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. C. Coarse aggregate: conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33, gravel or crushed stone, suitably processed, washed and screened; consisting of hard, durable particles without adherent coatings. 1. Regional Materials: Provide product that is a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. D. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: conform to ASTM C330, expanded clay or shale, producing a minimum split cylinder ratio of 5.0. E. Water: shall be clear, potable, city water free of all substances which would be harmful to the concrete. F. Fly Ash: conform to ASTM C618, carbon content not greater than 3% by volume. 1. Recycled Content: Minimum 40 percent pre-consumer recycled content. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Regional Materials: Provide product that are a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. G. Admixtures: Water-reducing, set-controlling admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A or D (F or G – High Range) and shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Products as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company, Master Builders, W.R. Grace, or approved equal. H. Air Entraining Admixtures: Shall conform to ASTM C260 and CRD C-13. Products as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company, Master Builders, W.R. Grace, or approved equal. I. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixture containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions shall not be permitted in concrete mixtures. J. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used in concrete to be poured on metal floor deck, nor in post-tensioned concrete. 2.3 CURING AND FINISHING PRODUCTS A. Liquid Curing Compound 1. Conform to ASTM C309, Types 1 and 1D, Class B, water based. 2. Meet federal and state VOC/AIM regulations. 3. Shall be dissipating resin type, which chemically breaks down after approximately eight (8) weeks. 4. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives. 5. Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable. 6. Sodium silicates prohibited. 7. Use on all interior slabs to receive subsequent floor coverings and parking structures. B. Curing and Sealing Compounds: 1. Conform to ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class B. 2. Minimum 25 percent solids by volume. 3. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.30 Kg/M2 when applied at 300 square feet per gallon. 4. Toxicity/IEQ: zero VOC. C. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Shall be a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss from the concrete surface. 2. Use when concrete operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, or high temperatures. D. Waterproof Paper: 1. Waterproof paper for curing concrete - 2 ply fiber-reinforced, asphaltic kraft paper, conform to ASTM C171. E. Abrasive Aggregate: aluminum oxide aggregate. F. Floor Hardener: 1. Penetrating liquid for subsequent application. 2. Non-staining. 3. Combination curing compound and hardener shall not be used. G. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: Free flowing, self –leveling, pumpable, cementitious compound specially formulated for feather-edge application. H. Liquid Densifier / Sealer: 1. Shall be siliconate based sealer that penetrates concrete surfaces, increases abrasion resistance, and provides a “low sheen” surface. 2. Clear, non-yellowing, fast curing, chemically neutral, without oils, fillers, extenders and stabilizers. 3. Shall not inhibit bonding of flooring adhesives. 4. Shall not inhibit bond breaker, where applicable. I. Curing and finishing products and their application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental regulations. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. Waterstops: shall be one of the following, or an approved equal, installed per manufacturer's recommendations: 1. Bulb type with minimum 3 inch ribbed extension into concrete each side of joint. One side shall be split for anchoring to formwork. a. Representative product: "Sealtight No. 6316", W.R. Meadows Co. 2. Self-sealing non-swelling preformed joint sealant. a. Representative product: "SF302 Synko-Flex Waterstop", Henry Company 3. Expanding preformed strip utilizing high sodium-bentonite content. a. Representative product: "Volclay Waterstop-RX, Model RX101", American Colloid Company B. Non-Shrink Grout: pre-mixed, non-shrinking, minimum compressive strength 5000 psi in 28 days, conform to U.S. Army Corp of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C621. 1. Grout exposed to view shall be non-oxidizing 2.5 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Environmentally Preferable Products a. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. b. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. c. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXES A. General: Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures where applicable. Design concrete mixes to be workable and appropriate for each application, to bond readily to reinforcement, without segregation or the formation of excessive free water on surfaces. B. Selection of Proportions 1. Determine proportions of ingredients in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5 to provide required strength, slump, resistance to weathering, placeability, durability and surface hardness for each class of concrete. 2. Provide admixtures as required or appropriate to enhance workability, control set or improve strength. C. Required Average Strength for Mix Design: 1. Where suitable strength test records for the concrete production facility are available, design strength may be based on the standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318. 2. Where strength test records are not available, design strength shall be based on the following: Specified Strength Required Average Strength F'c - psi F'cr - psi ---------------------- ------------------------- F'c <3000 F'c + 1000 3000 <= F'c <=5000 F'c + 1200 F'c > 5000 1.10 F'c + 700 D. Documentation of Average Strength: provide evidence of average strength for each class of concrete in accordance with ACI 318 by field strength tests, strength test records or trial mixtures. E. Concrete Mix Designs: submit mix designs for each class of concrete. 1. Indicate the following for each mix design: a. Class designation. b. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 c. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content. d. Type of cement and aggregates. e. Type and dosage of admixtures. 2. Mix designs shall be adjusted as required by weather and jobsite conditions to maintain specified strengths throughout the course of the work without additional cost to the Owner. 3. As strength data becomes available during the progress of the work, mix designs may be adjusted in accordance with ACI 318. 4. Minimum Cement Content: Cement content shall not be less than 320 pounds per cubic yard. 5. Fly ash content shall not exceed 15 percent of total cementitious material content by weight. F. Strength Gain: design concrete mixes to obtain required strengths in 28 days or less from date of placement. 2.7 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE A. Do not mix concrete for placement in the work until mix designs and corresponding strength tests reflect that each proposed mix will develop strengths required and mix designs have been reviewed for compliance. B. Batching and Mixing: 1. Batch and mix ready-mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. 2. Batch site-mixed concrete with scales accurate to within 0.4 percent of their total capacities. Operation of batching equipment shall consistently measure ingredients within 1 percent for concrete and water, 2 percent for aggregates and 3 percent for admixtures. Mixing of site-batched concrete shall be in accordance ACI 301. C. Admixtures: Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into mixer as solutions and shall be accurately measured by means of a mechanical dispenser. The liquid shall be considered as part of mixing water. D. Shrinkage-Compensating concrete shall be made by either of the following methods. 1. Job site addition – The approved concrete mix for the specified strength shall be delivered to the job site. The shrinkage-compensating component, at the specified dosage, and water, at the specified water/cementitious ratio for the amount of component added, shall be added to the truck and mixed as follows prior to placement. The truck shall be run at mixing speed for 3 minutes and then backed up until the concrete reaches the discharge point. This procedure shall be repeated 2 more times and the concrete can then be discharged after the third mixing cycle. 2. Batch plant addition - Shrinkage-Compensating component may be added at concrete suppliers plant by adding the specified dosage of component in a uniform manner, so as to achieve complete distribution thoroughout the batch, to either the cement or the sand as it is being batched. Concrete shall then be thoroughly mixed as per the concrete supplier’s standard method. If necessary, component can be added at the batch plant following the method described as job site addition. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Inspection 1. Verify required plant certifications 2. Inspect batching equipment periodically 3. Inspect batching and loading of transit-mix trucks at the start of each day of production. B. Materials Testing 1. Sieve analysis of aggregates PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not begin delivery of concrete materials until formwork, reinforcement, and all items required to be embedded in the concrete are complete, properly positioned and secured in place. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Remove snow, ice, debris and excessive water from forms. 2. Pre-wet soil and sand subgrades and surfaces of precast concrete to receive fresh concrete. 3. Position and secure expansion joint materials, anchors, waterstops, screeds, control joint forms, and expansion caps on slip-dowels. 4. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from the inner surfaces of conveying equipment, formwork and reinforcing. B. Prepare and have ready in good working condition chutes, tremies, pumps, buggies, vibrators and all other equipment necessary for the orderly and continuous placement of concrete. C. Where carton-form void forms are used, inspect condition before placing concrete. Replace crushed or weakened boxes and tape all joints. Repair sides of grade beam or wall excavations so that not more than 3 inches of ground is visible beyond the edge of void boxes. D. Inspect and repair vapor barrier where applicable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conveying: 1. Prevent separation, segregation and loss of ingredients. 2. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as possible. 3. Take special precautions with belt conveyors to prevent segregation of ingredients, drying and rise in temperature during conveying. 4. Pumps or pneumatic equipment shall have adequate pumping capacity. Slump loss due to pumping shall not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipes made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. 5. Thoroughly clean conveying equipment at the end of each placement sequence. B. Depositing: 1. Place concrete continuously in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches deep. Exercise care to avoid seams or weakened planes within the concrete. Deposit concrete into (not away from) previously deposited concrete. 2. Do not place fresh concrete on partially hardened or contaminated concrete. 3. Do not place concrete which has partially set. 4. Exercise care to avoid splashing forms and reinforcing with concrete. 5. Place concrete in forms as near as possible to its final position, do not transport in the forms with vibrators or screeds. 6. Do not drop concrete directly into standing water, use a tremie with the outlet near the bottom of the place of deposit. 7. Use tremies, chutes or hoppers to place concrete where a vertical drop greater than 5 feet is required. 8. Do not place concrete when slump tests indicate plasticity that is greater than required limits. 9. Continuously monitor the condition of void box forms during placement of concrete. Avoid piling concrete on void forms. Replace void boxes that partially or wholly collapse under weight of concrete. C. Consolidating: 1. As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate by means of mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools, to work the mixture well into all parts and corners of the forms, and entirely around the reinforcement and inserts. Consolidation of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 309. 2. Mechanical vibrators shall have minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions per minute. 3. Do not over-vibrate concrete or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert vibrators vertically at frequent intervals, do not drag vibrators through concrete. 4. Do not insert vibrators into lower courses that have begun to set. 5. Maintain spare vibrators on the job site during all concrete placing operations. D. Bonding: 1. Before depositing new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has partially or entirely set, thoroughly clean and roughen surfaces to receive fresh concrete. 2. Re-tighten and thoroughly clean forms and reinforcement. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Apply 1 to 2 inches of grout to concrete surfaces. Grout shall be of identical mix to concrete without coarse aggregate. 4. Deposit new concrete before grout attains initial set. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construction Joints 1. Each unit of structure (beam, column, pier, footing, joist, slab or wall) shall be monolithic in construction except where specifically required to be otherwise. 2. Where required, construction joints shall be located near the midspan of beams, joists and slabs. 3. Construction joints shall be located only where required or shown on accepted submittals. B. Weather Conditions: 1. Cold Weather: Conform to ACI 306 2. Hot Weather: Temperature of concrete delivered at job site shall not exceed 95 degrees F. Add ice to mixing water as required to control temperature of mixture. a. Conform to ACI 305. b. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling or wet cover when necessary. c. Use evaporation retarders, and finishing aids when necessary to achieve sound, durable surfaces. C. Composite Concrete/Steel Construction 1. Do not place concrete until inspection and measuring requirements of the structural steel and composite metal floor deck and field welded shear stud specifications are complete. 2. Where concrete is to be placed on unshored steel beams, take special care to prevent excessive deflection of beams during construction. 3. For beam spans greater than forty feet, place concrete from the center of the beams, working towards both ends simultaneously. 4. Concrete slabs placed on unshored steel beams shall be screeded to the required slab thickness above the metal deck (i.e., shall not be leveled). D. Floor Flatness and Levelness Tolerances: 1. General: Tolerances in floor slab elevation shall not exceed the following: a. For slabs on grade, and level suspended slabs shored until after testing: plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 ft in any direction, maximum 1 inch variation between columns, but not to exceed Fl and Ff limits below. Laser leveling of floor slab surface may be used. b. For unshored suspended slabs: floor slab thickness shall not vary by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet in any direction, but not to exceed Ff limits below. See Division 5 Sections for steel frame tolerances. Laser leveling of floor slab surface shall not be used. 2. Definitions: a. Ff - maximum variation in floor elevation within any 2-foot length; "flatness." b. Fl - maximum variation in floor elevation between any 2 points separated by 10 feet; "levelness." c. Specified overall value - minimum average for Project. d. Local value - minimum within each column bay. 3. Floor flatness and levelness measurements: a. Measurements shall be made where requested by Owner or Architect, at Owner's expense. b. Measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM E-1155 and ACI 117. 4. Typical a. Slab-on-Grade - Misc Site Pads (1) Specified Overall Value - Ff20 / Fl15 (2) Minimum Local Value - Ff15 / Fl2 b. Level Suspended Slabs Shored Until After Testing (1) Specified Overall Value – Ff30 / Fl20 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 (2) Minimum Local Value - Ff18 / Fl12 c. Unshored Suspended Slabs (1) Specified Overall Value - Ff25 (2) Minimum Local Value - Ff15 3.4 FINISHING EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES A. General 1. Comply with ACI 302. 2. Double screed slabs at required elevations. 3. Provide camber as required. 4. Apply finishing products and cure in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. B. Slab Surfaces 1. Float Finish a. Locations (1) Initial finish for all horizontal surfaces (2) Final finish where topping slabs, waterproofing membrane or roofing is to be placed over finished surface. b. Method - after concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled begin first float. Check levelness and correct as required during first float. Second float shall produce a uniform and true surface with a sandy texture. 2. Trowel Finish a. Locations - all floor slabs except where specifically required otherwise. b. Method - First apply float finish, then power-trowel and finally hand trowel to produce a dense, smooth surface free of trowel marks and blemishes, and uniform in texture and appearance. Do not add cement slurry or water to surface during finishing. Grind high spots and fill low spots with specified materials. 3. Broom Finish a. Locations - Concrete ramp surfaces and tiled areas. b. Method: After float finish, power-trowel and provide coarse transverse striations with a stiff fiber brush. After brushing, provide indentations perpendicular to the slope of the ramp approximately 1/4th inch wide and deep and at 6 inch intervals with a metal grooving tool. 4. Non-Slip Finish: a. Locations: Interior steel pan type stair treads and platforms, exterior concrete stair and ramps. b. Method: After floating, but before troweling, apply abrasive aggregate to surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, then steel trowel to a smooth, even finish. Rub finished surfaces with abrasive stone or sandblast to remove laitance or cement coating in order to expose abrasive aggregate. C. Saw-Cutting Concrete Slabs-on-Grade 1. Saw joints as soon as possible after finishing, but only after concrete is hard enough. Concrete is hard enough when saw blade does not dislodge aggregate and when edges of sawcut do not ravel. 2. Joints shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch wide and 1/4 of the slab thickness deep. 3. Formed strips may be used in lieu of saw-cutting in the same locations and to equal depth as sawn joints. D. Formed Surfaces 1. General: Holes resulting from the removal of bolts or tie rods shall be solidly filled with cement grout. Fill holes passing entirely through concrete members from the inside face with a plunger-type grease gun or other device that will force the mortar through to the outside face. 2. Rough Form Finish: for surfaces not exposed to view a. Remove fins exceeding 1/4th inch in height, and grind bulges that interfere with other trades. b. Fill holes and honeycombs. 3. Smooth Form Finish: for surfaces exposed to view City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 a. Remove all fins, bulges and unsightly form marks. b. Fill holes and honeycombs to match surrounding concrete surfaces. c. Provide rubbed finish where satisfactory form finish cannot be achieved. 4. Rubbed Finish a. Apply finish as soon as possible after casting concrete, no later than the day following form removal. b. Wet surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive to produce uniform color and texture. c. Form tie holes and honeycombs shall be patched and dressed to match color and texture of surrounding concrete. 5. Grout Cleaned Finish a. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be finished. b. Mix 1 part Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint. Use white cement as necessary to match color of surrounding concrete. Wet concrete surfaces to prevent absorption of water from the grout. Apply grout uniformly, filling all holes and air bubbles. Remove excess grout. After initial set, rub surface with burlap. Wet cure for minimum 36 hours after final rubbing. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical damage. B. Preservation of Moisture: protect surfaces not in contact with forms from moisture loss with one of the following methods immediately after finishing and continuing for a period of at least 7 days: 1. Ponding, continuous fogging, or continuous sprinkling 2. Application of mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 3. Application of sand kept continuously wet. 4. Continuous application of steam or mist. 5. Application of waterproof sheet materials. 6. Application of curing compound in conformance with ASTM C309, "Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete". Apply curing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use curing compound on any surface against which additional concrete is to be placed or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the compound will not inhibit bonding, or positive measures are taken to completely remove the compound from areas to received bonded materials. For shrinkage-compensating concrete, only curing methods 1 & 2 are permitted. C. Protect surfaces cast against forms from moisture loss by keeping forms wet until removed. After form removal, protect exposed surfaces by one of the methods specified. D. Curing shall be continued for a period of 7 days for Type I cement, or 3 days for Type III cement, or until tests indicate that the concrete has attained 70 percent of required strength. E. Cure shrinkage-compensating concrete in accordance with specified curing methods for Portland Cement concrete. Curing membrane, if used, shall be applied so as to provide 95% retention of moisture in the concrete. 1. Curing compound acceptable to the concrete manufacturer. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 1. Concrete Compression Testing: Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Make one strength test for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof of each mix design of concrete placed in any single day. A single strength test shall consist of 4 cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days age; two to be tested at 28 days age; and one reserved for future test if requested. Mold and cure specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Test concrete specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143. 3. Determine total air content of normal-weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C231. 4. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. 5. Inspection and Monitoring: a. Inspect concrete mixing and loading of transit-mix trucks at plant. b. Monitor addition of water to concrete at job site and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck during pour. c. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered (or poured), amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were discharged into truck, and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. B. Contractor's Responsibilities 1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at job-site. 2. Advise testing agency in advance of operations to allow for assignment of testing personnel and testing. 3. Provide and maintain for use of testing agency adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test specimens on project site in accordance with ASTM C31. C. Evaluation and Acceptance: 1. Strength level of a given class of concrete will be considered satisfactory if each of the three following requirements is met for that class of concrete: a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength. b. No individual strength test result (average of two cylinders) falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi. c. 90 percent of strength test results equal or exceed specified strength. 2. Concrete strength tests made and tested by testing laboratory shall be sole criteria of concrete strength unless in-situ tests are made in accordance with Building Code by a qualified independent testing laboratory. Concrete for which strength tests do not meet criteria for acceptance shall be considered inadequate until proven otherwise. 3. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of ACI 301, Chapter 18, have been complied with. 4. In any case, where strength tests of concrete fail to meet criteria specified herein, Architect shall be sole judge of structural adequacy of concrete. In such case, burden of proof of structural adequacy shall be responsibility of Contractor. Strength evaluation shall conform to requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 5 and 20. If strength evaluation testing indicates, in opinion of Architect, that structure is of inadequate strength; portions of structure in question shall be repaired or removed and replaced as directed by Architect at no additional expense to Owner. If strength tests fall below specified strength, but not so low as to cause concern for structural adequacy, Architect may request improved conditions of curing or modification of design mixes to improve strength. 3.7 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish resulting therefrom from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition, satisfactory to the Owner. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, and mud, wash concrete floors and platforms with soapsuds and scrub with a steel fiber brush. Mop up the suds and flush the surfaces with clean water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to keep excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage occasioned to such floors by or on account of such operations shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily repaired. B. Remove all concrete not required by the Drawings caused by overpour, bulging or collapse of forms or error in form construction. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033100-12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Remove “mushrooms” from tops of piers so that pier shafts are of constant diameter throughout their length. 2. Remove bulges from sides of beams and walls. 3. Remove excess concrete at intersections of grade beams. 3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT: As specified in Section 017419-Construction Waste Management and Disposal an as follows: A. Formwork: Reuse forms to greatest extent possible wihtout damanging structural integreity of concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. B. Mixing equipment: return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used to wash equipment. Moisture curing: Prevent water run-off. C. Hardened, cured waste concrete: Hardened, cured waste concrete may be crushed and resued as fill or as a base course for pavement. Hardened, cured waste concrete may be used as aggregate in concrete mix if approved by Engineer. D. Before concrete pours, designate locations or uses for excess concrete. Options include: 1. Additional site flatwork and/or paving. 2. Parking wheel stops 3. Other construciton items opportunities to be identified. E. Before concrete pours, designate a location for cleaning out concrete trucks. Options include: 1. Build on-site wash-out per SWPPP. 2. Provide manufactured wash-out. Must be pre-approved by Architect. F. Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area of recycling. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 033536 - POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanically Grind, Hone and Polished concrete floor system that includes: a. Trained and manufacturer certified installers b. Integrally Troweled Cured & Polished Concrete (ITCP) Treatments c. Flatwork, schedule and on-site consulting by Manufacturer d. Surface Profile: Class B Fine Aggregate e. Environmentally wet process with supporting equipment for IAQ standards f. Concrete Abrasives. g. Concrete Treatments: ITCP Treatments and Impregnating Sealer h. Concrete Colorants [Indoor] i. Post-Installment Monitoring j. Post-Installment Maintenance 2. Concrete protective treatment. a. Concrete Treatments that are compatible with concrete colorants. b. Concrete Treatments that are: pH neutral, Chloride Screen, Non-Resinous Polymers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. A1264-2 - Standard for the Provision of Slip Resistance on Walking/Working Surfaces. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C779 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 2. C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. 3. ASTM C672 Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance to Deicing Chemicals 4. 244 NCHRP- Chloride Ingress Testing 5. ASTM D-1308 Effect of Chemicals on Organic Clear and Pigmented Finishes 6. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 7. G23 - Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 8. D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 9. E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F- Number System (Inch-Pound Units). 10. F 2170-09- Standard Test Method for Relative Humidity Test 11. F 710- Standard Test Method for ph 12. D5767-95 Standard Test Methods for Instrumental Measurement of Distinctness-of- Image Gloss of Coating Surfaces 13. ASTM D4039-09 (2015) Standard Test Method for Reflection Haze of High-Gloss Surfaces 14. ASTM- E284 Standard Terminology of Appearance City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. ACI (American Concrete Institute) ( www.concrete.org ) 1. ACI Standard 302.1R-89 Chemical concrete hardeners can be used to increase concrete resistance to chemicals. 2. ACI 310 Decorative Concrete: Definitions 3. ACI 301-J Polished Finishes C. CSDA (Concrete Sawing and Drilling Association) ( www.csda.org ) 1. CSDA-ST-115 Measuring Concrete Micro Surface Texture 2. CSDA- BP-008 Best Practice Polished Concrete Floors 3. CSDA- BP-015 Best Practice Green Polishing & Grinding Practices 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s descriptive data and application instructions for concrete treatment and concrete dye, including curing time. b. Name of manufacturer and description of floor processing equipment. c. Name of manufacturer of diamond abrasives. 2. Samples: 3 x 3 inch dye samples showing available colors for initial color approval. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports by an independent testing laboratory confirming compliance with specified performance criteria. Annual Installer Certification issued by concrete treatment manufacturer. Shall include, but not limited to, a. ASTM C779 b. 244 NCHRP c. ASTM D-1308 2. CSDA ST-115 Certification. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Treatment Manufacturer: Provide on-site project management to oversee all aspects of concrete floor treatment. Green Umbrella Systems (www.greenumbrellasystems.com). Regional Representative Jason Barnes, Jason@GreenUmbrellaConsulting.com Phone: 870-917-2054 B. Concrete treatment manufacture, GHP contractor: Provide CSDA ST-115 on-site report. Record final Ra, gloss/clarity readings in the designated testing areas on the appropriated floor plan drawings and submit the test data for final approval. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years documented experience in dyed and polished concrete floors. 2. Minimum 2 year documented experience using specified products and equipment, with minimum of 5 previous projects. 3. Certified by concrete treatment manufacturer as Green Umbrella Craftsman 4. Certified for alternative fuel handling by grinder/polisher manufacturer. 5. Certified for use of profilometer. B. Concrete [Related section: 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing]: 1. Mix Design: Free from admixtures and additives not specifically approved by concrete dye and/or concrete treatment manufacturer. 2. No lightweight aggregate. 3. Air entrainment is not needed for interior polished slabs. Excess air entrainment can result in a damaged slab when ground for polishing. 4. Fly Ash content recommended less than 15%, High Fly-Ash content may effect gloss from polishing. D. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this section. 2. Attendance: Contractor, Construction Manager, Architect, concrete treatment manufacturer, polishing subcontractor, concrete subcontractor, and representative of concrete batch plant. 3. Review and discuss: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 a. Staging and sequencing. b. Relationship of each party and their effect on finished product. c. Protection of concrete surfaces prior to polishing with emphasis on need to understand that trades are working on a finished surface. d. Protection of completed work. E. Mockup: 1. Aggregate Mockup: a. Pour temporary slab b. Size: minimum 6’x6’ square feet. 2. Finish Mockup: a. Size: minimum 50 feet b. Show colorant, polished finish, and concrete treatment. 3. Use depth of cut/aggregate exposure to show finished product. 4. Ambient Conditions must be taken in consideration for review 5. Locate in Exercise 112 6. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work. F. Surface Texture Grade: finished Surface, medium polish B-1, measured according CSDA ST- 115.Additional Slip Resistance Testing: After polishing, achieve minimum slip resistance of 0.65 tested to ANSI A1264-2. G. Gloss Rating: Final polishing to provide 60 gloss rating, tested to ASTM D5767-95. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions, coverage rates and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels and seals intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Concrete Substrate [Related section: 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing] 1. Minimum Ff/Fl rating: 50/35 tested to ASTM E1155. Failure to use high tolerances can result in a wavy floor, which can ultimately lead to uneven exposure of aggregate. 2. 28 -day compressive strength: 3500 to 5000 PSI. 3. Cure with recommended ITCP cure. 4. Power troweled, without burning and without hand finishing. 5. If fine aggregate concrete mix with minimal aggregate is specified, concrete must be thoroughly floated and tamped. 6. Acceptable ph ASTM F 710, consult with manufacturer with results. 7. Relative Humidity performed ASTM F2170, consult with manufacturer with results. B. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive [dyed and] polished finish prior to finishing; prevent damage and staining: 1. Provide fluid containment from equipment working on floors before and after polishing. 2. Do not allow vehicular traffic on unprotected floors before or after polishing. 3. Do not allow acids to contact surface. 4. Do not allow use of chalk line where floor will be exposed and polished. 5. Protect from petroleum stains during construction. 6. Diaper hydraulic power equipment. 7. Restrict use of pipe cutting machinery. 8. Restrict placement of reinforcing steel on slab. 9. Restrict use of acids or acidic detergents on slab. C. Apply concrete treatment when ambient and surface temperatures are between 35 and 90 degrees F. D. Close areas to traffic during finishing and for minimum time period after finishing as recommended by concrete treatment manufacturer. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Grinding, Honing and Polishing will be scheduled: After exterior walls, prior to interior partitions. B. Final application of IceCap, include burnishing 10 days prior to Substantial Completion. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s 10-year warranty providing coverage that floors will remain water resistant, dust proof, hardened, and abrasion resistant during warranty period. B. Must be installed by certified installer, contractor warranty for 2 years. C. Warranty may be void if manufacturer’s approved concrete cleaner is not used. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Comply with manufacturer written instructions to maintain installed product. Section [09 01 60 - Maintenance of Flooring] PART 3 – PRODUCTS 3.1 MATERIALS A. Integrally Troweled Concrete Cure 1. Product: Green Umbrella ICEStart and ICEStop 2. Description: A two-part Integrally troweled concrete cure treatment. 3. Applied at time of placement B. Concrete Colorant for GreenIce Cure System 1. Product: Green Umbrella Nano Pigment 2. Description: Semi-Translucent, Subsurface UV stable Colorant 3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full color range C. Concrete Protective Treatment (ITCP Concrete Sealer) 1. Product: IceCap by Green Umbrella (www.greenicecure.com) 2. Free from sodium, potassium and resinous polymers 3. Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content: Less than 25 grams per liter. 2.2 ACCESSORIES D. Concrete Cutting Agent: 1. Product: Green Cut by Green Umbrella (www.greenumbrellatreatments.com) . 2. Ph neutral. 3. Free from Sodium and Potassium and Butyl. E. Cleaning Products: Non-corrosive, neutral pH, of type recommended by concrete treatment manufacturer. Such as Green Cleaner & Degreaser by Green Umbrella. F. Joint Sealer: Specified in Section [07 9200.] 1. Product: G Joint by Green Umbrella 2. Polyurea Joint Filler 2. 3 EQUIPMENT A. Grinder/Honer/Polisher: 1. Propane powered, heavy duty commercial floor grinder/polisher by Green Umbrella. 2. Minimum 785 pounds head pressure. 3. CARB/EPA approved. 4. 30 inch grinding width. 5. 12 diamond, counter clockwise rotation. 6. Minimum 1400 square feet per hour production rate. 7. Provide minimum of [two] units on site. B. Edger: 1. Propane powered by Green Umbrella City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Minimum 165 pounds head pressure. 3. CARB/EPA approved. 4. 1/4 inch cut to wall. 5. Four diamond head, 640 RPM diamond rotation. 6. Provide minimum of two units on site. C. Burnisher: 1. Propane powered, high productivity by Green Umbrella. 2. CARB/EPA approved. 3. 27 or 39 inch burnishing width. 4. Head Pressured or Weighted for concrete burnishing 5. Minimum 2000 RPM. D. Auto Scrubber: 1. Proven performance in field conditions of concrete slurry recovery. TomCat, FactoryCat or Advance-Nilifisk 2. CARB/EPA approved. 3. Minimum 500 pound head pressure. 4. Water application and minimum 30 gallon recovery tank. 5. Provide minimum of one unit on site E. Dry Dust Vacuum System: 1. Proven performance in field conditions, with preference for propane powered equipment by Green Umbrella Systems 2. Capture dust and debris to OSHA standards. 3. Minimum 300 CFM, 13 HP. 4. CARB/EPA approved. 5. Kawasaki engine powered. F. Saw Cutting and Engraving Equipment: Proven performance in field conditions. G. Abrasives: 1. Metal bond abrasives, resin bond abrasives, and coating removal metal bond abrasives by Green Umbrella. 2. Match hardness of abrasives to hardness of concrete. 3. Abrasives must be able to be used wet. 4. 10-segment diamond pad, except for coating removal. 3.2 MIXES A. Mix dye with equal amounts of [solvent] [water] [hardener] [densifier] in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use penetrating agent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. Uncertified Installers are not acceptable. The following installers are a few approved to perform work of this Section (Call Green Umbrella for more approved installers (870) 917-2054 or visit www.greenumbrellasystems.com): B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for conditions that could adversely affect application or performance of finish; correct detrimental conditions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Verify that concrete floors meet requirements specified under “Project Conditions” C. Verify ITPC Treatments were used for cure. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean floors; remove debris. Remove residues using non-corrosive cleaning products. B. Protect adjacent surfaces. C. Remove existing coatings using planetary machine. If metal pads are required, grind using metal pads of grit appropriate for concrete mix design and location. 3.5 DYEING A. Apply dye in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions using a pump-up sprayer with conical tip. If solvent based dye is used, must use appropriate acetone sprayer. B. Use overlapping circular motion holding tip approximately 12 inches from surface; ensure consistent coverage. C. Wait 1 to 2 minutes, then wipe small area with dry white cloth; ensure color acceptability. D. If additional dye is required, allow first coat to dry before application of second coat. E. Remove excess dye using auto scrubber. 3.6 Troweling A. At time of placement (Consult section Section [03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing] or Section [03 39 00 - Concrete Curing] 1. Multiple applications ITCP during concrete floating & finishing 2. Consult manufacturer additional Instructions 3.7 Grinding (Grind, Hone, Polish) A. Grind and Hone Concrete 1. Using wet grind process 2. Class B Fine Aggregate 3. Surface Texture Grade B-1 B. Grind Concrete to edge of the field. C. Wet Grind 1. Grind Floor using 100 metal 2. Scrub and rinse surfaces. D. Wet Hone 1. Hone floor using 200 grit Hybrid resin pads. 2. Scrub and rinse surfaces. E. Final polishing to provide smooth, even semi-gloss finish using 800 grit resin pads. Scrub and rinse surfaces. F. Meet Surface Texture Grade B-1 (CSDA ST-115) G. Any additional grinding required to meet Surface Texture Grade B-1 (CSDA ST-115) shall be included H. Thoroughly sweep floor. Autoscrub with neutral pH Green Clean. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE TREATMENT (Prior to chemical introduction, thoroughly clean floors; remove debris. Remove residues using non- corrosive cleaning products. Apply treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.) A. After final resin polishing and necessary cleaning steps apply Green Umbrella ICECap. B. Apply treatment after final polishing in multiple applications using T-bar applicator and micro-head. C. Allow minimum one hour drying time between applications. D. Burnish using a high speed propane burnisher and a non-resinous black pad in between coats and after final coat. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 POLISHED CONCRETE - PREMIUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 033536-7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 A. Measure with profilometer in accordance with ST-115. B. Measure gloss rating using Horbia 320 gloss meter; re-polish if required to achieve specified gloss rating. C. Measure slip resistance using BOT-3000 slip-tester by Universal Walkway Testing; ensure compliance with specified slip resistance rating. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Close areas to traffic until concrete treatment has cured. B. Protect walls and fixtures with Coverguard distributed by PTI. C. Protect completed work with non-staining sheet coverings by Green Umbrella. (www.greenumbrellaproducts.com) END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 036214-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 036214 GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Grout for steel baseplates 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C1090, Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic Cement Grout 2. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non- Shrinkable) B. Corps of Engineers: 1. CRD-C621, Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data indicating product compliance for the following: 1. Non-shrink grout. B. Sustainable Submittals 1. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: a. Recycled Content: (1) Indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. (2) Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. b. Local / Regional Materials: (1) Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. (2) Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. (3) Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. c. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of product. C. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 036214-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store grout materials in dry condition above ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. 2. Compressive strength in 28 days: 5000 psi minimum, but not less than specified strength of base concrete. 3. Comply with ASTM C1107, and CRD-C621. 4. Nonoxidizing, if grout will be permanently exposed to view. 5. Exhibits positive expansion when testing in accordance with ASTM C1090. 6. Acceptable products: a. Euco N-S Grout, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co. b. Masterflow 713, manufactured by Master Builders Co. c. SikaGrout 212, manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Environmentally Preferable Products a. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. b. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. c. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. B. Recycled Content a. To the greatest extent possible, provide materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 20% of the total value of the materials in the project. C. Regional Materials: 1. Provide product that are a “regional material” as defined in Section 013520. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: 1. Clean slab or foundation of dirt and loose material down to sound concrete. 2. Remove oil, grease, and paint from areas of base plates or foundations to be grouted. 3. Roughen adjacent concrete surfaces where possible. 4. Thoroughly wet concrete contact area at least 4 hours prior to grout placement, or as instructed by grout manufacturer. Keep wet, and remove excess water prior to placement. B. Mixing 1. Use mechanical mortar mixer. 2. Use the minimum amount of mixing water needed for placement. 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for: a. Quantity of water used in mix. b. Length of mixing time. c. Pot life. d. Retempering. C. Forms 1. Use side forms if grout space is thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. When forms are required, use strong, securely anchored forms, sealed to prevent grout leakage. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUTING STEEL BASE PLATES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 036214-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Remove forms only after grout is completely self-supporting. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Placement and Consolidation 1. Bearing plates shall be fully grouted, without cavities, pockets, or air bubbles. 2. Place grout continuously, and from one side to avoid entrapment of air pockets and to ensure good consolidation. 3. Remove voids by rodding and vibrating during placement. 4. Do not overwork grout. 5. Use grout holes for baseplates larger than 24 inches in width. B. Curing 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for curing. 2. Do not vibrate or disturb grout during curing period. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Acoustical concrete masonry units. 4. Face brick. 5. Mortar and grout. 6. Steel reinforcing bars. 7. Masonry joint reinforcement. 8. Ties and anchors. 9. Embedded flashing. 10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 11. Cavity-wall insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Decorative CMUs, in the form of small-scale units. 2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Weep holes/vents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product’s raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in size as indicated on Drawings. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each exterior wall mockup. b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include studs, sheathing, and , veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight. 2. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph. 3. Pattern and Texture: Ground face. 4. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Special Aggregate: Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in Architect's sample. 6. Colors and Patterns: Trenwyth Trenstone ground faced units, color group E, “Mission White”. 7. Provide in the following shapes: 8F, 8FE, 8FEBN, 8FT, and KOBB (open bottom). 8. Provide raked mortar joints at interior decorative CMU locations. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Sound Absorbing Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow units with solid closed tops, fabricated from Portland cement and lightweight mineral aggregate, Soundblox Type 12RSC/RF-4 as manufactured by Proudfoot Company, Inc., Greenwich, Connecticut, priding an NRC of 0.80. 1. All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant, shall have the same surface texture and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 90, Grade N lightweight for load-bearing units. Units shall have a linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.065% by test. 2. Size: 8" x 16" face. 3. Sound Absorption: Two cavities with two funnel-shaped slots in each block. Each cavity shall have incombustible fibrous fillers with metal septa factory installed. 4. Provide left and right sound blocks as required for reinforced masonry construction. 5. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 6. Provide "equivalent concrete masonry thickness" required for fire-rated assemblies where indicated or required by code.. 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. As scheduled below. 2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 6. Size (Actual Dimensions): As scheduled. 7. Corners at soldier courses need to be solid. 8. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. 9. Color and Texture: a. Brick Type A: Acme Brick “Texas” with velour finish. b. Brick Type B: Acme Brick custom blend “Cinnamon Brown” (60%) and “Weatherwood Gray” (40%) with velour finish. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. J. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. Provide material that indicates 100% 100% post-consumer recycled content. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls:Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls:[Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-wythe Masonry: 1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less. 2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. E. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel continuous wire. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304]. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units. 2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. 3. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication . a. 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch- thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 3. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel] wire unless otherwise indicated. 4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors: 5. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: 1) At Sheathing: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; HB-213-2X. 2) At Columns: Hohmann & Barnard,Inc; 359-FH with Vee Byna-Tie. 6. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) ITW Buildex; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish. 2) Textron Inc., Textron Fastening Systems; Elco Dril-Flex with Stalgard finish. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. The built-in flashing membrane shall be 40 mil flexible sheet material, consisting of a blend of elastomeric and thermal plastic polymers, incorporating DuPont Elvaloy®. The membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled and cut to width. B. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible units used for detail corners, level changes, stop ends and special applications. Cloak color shall be as selected by Architect and/or shall match mortar color. Reference manufacturer's list of colors for selection. C. Flashing Membrane Adhesive: Flashing adhesive exceeds the requirements of TTS00230C Type II, Class B, ASTM C 92094 and Canadian Spec CAN 19, 13M82. The product is terra cotta (dull red) in color. D. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. E. Surface-adhered with drip membrane shall be a composite 40 mil membrane consisting of 25 mils of elastomeric/thermal plastic membrane incorporating DuPont Elvaloy® and 15 mils of SBS asphaltic adhesive. The membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled and cut to standard widths. F. Standard Sheet Dimensions: Thickness 40 mil G. Roll length 75 ft H. Roll widths 12, 18, 24, 36 in I. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible units used for detail corners, level changes, stop ends, J. Asphalt Primer: Shall be a two-sided, self-adhering tape used to seal the top of cloaks against the back-up wythe. Adhesive may be used as an alternative. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 K. Mastic: Shall be used at all laps and joints, and top terminations. L. Substrate Primer: As recommended by flashing manufacturer. M. Termination Bar: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide the following: 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Type T1, Stainless Steel 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from[styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805][or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following]: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net 2. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 2 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 2 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following]: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. 2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Refer to Section 072100. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Non-Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sure-Klean 600 (at exterior masonry). b. SynPro Masonry Cleaner (at interior masonry over polished concrete floor). 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. Where exposed to the elements, provide water repellent admixture. 4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect's sample. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. b. Face brick. c. Cast stone trim units. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476,[Table 1[or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, un-chipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings if different; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Set trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each.2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 2. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than[3/8 inch1/2 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multi-wythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of [4 inches] [8 inches], and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face. 3. At multi-wythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe 4. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches and terminated with a termination bar. 5. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches at end dams. 6. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 7. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 8. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 9. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 10. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space weep holes formed from 16 inches o.c. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. I. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at [7 days and at ]28 days. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 UNIT MASONRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 042000 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRECAST CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047200 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 047200 – PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete trim units. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For precast concrete units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for precast concrete units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each color and texture of precast concrete required, 10 inches square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicated types and amounts of pigments used. 1.4 INFORMATION SUMITTALS A. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of precast concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Precast Concrete Institute. B. Source Limitations for Precast concrete: Obtain precast concrete units through single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Mockups: Furnish precast concrete for installation in mockups specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of precast concrete with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage. B. Pack, handle, and ship precast concrete units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move precast concrete units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRECAST CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047200 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Store precast concrete units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until precast concrete has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce precast concrete color indicated. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required precast concrete color. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required precast concrete textures and colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of precast concrete material. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS A. Provide precast concrete units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. B. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. C. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRECAST CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047200 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. D. Cure units as follows: 1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg For above. E. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. F. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. F. Water: Potable. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by precast concrete manufacturer and expressly approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on precast concrete and adjacent masonry materials. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. B. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or mortar unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement produc or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRECAST CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047200 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test precast concrete units according to ASTM C 1364. 1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING PRECAST CONCRETE IN MORTAR A. Set precast concrete as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of precast concrete with installation of flashing specified in other Sections. B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. 4. Prime precast concrete surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 SETTING ANCHORED PRECAST CONCRETE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS A. Set precast concrete as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set precast concrete in locations indicated with uniform joints. B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of precast concrete units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout. C. Fill anchor holes with sealant. 1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. D. Set precast concrete supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of precast concrete a distance at least equal to width of joint. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PRECAST CONCRETE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 047200 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and precast concrete units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. F. Prime precast concrete surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Precast concrete may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in precast concrete matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed precast concrete as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of precast concrete. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean precast concrete by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean precast concrete with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel columns 2. Steel beams 3. Fusion welded anchors 4. Miscellaneous angles and plates 5. Bolts 6. Steel assemblies to be embedded in concrete 7. Laboratory testing and inspection 8. Shop painting 9. Supplementary parts and members necessary to complete and erect structural steel frame 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Latest Edition) A. American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC: 1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 2. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 3. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 4. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. 4. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot- Galvanizing) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, bars and strip. 5. ASTM A143, Recommended Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. 6. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 7. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 8. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 9. ASTM A325, Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 10. ASTM A449, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 11. ASTM A490, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 12. ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. ASTM A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 14. ASTM A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. 15. ASTM A786, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates 16. ASTM A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. 17. ASTM F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 18. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. 19. ASTM D522, Standard Test for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings with Conical Mandrel Apparatus. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. D. Industrial Fasteners Institute: 1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards. E. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI B18.2, Fasteners. 2. ANSI B27.2, Plain Washers. F. Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC: 1. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice. 2. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings showing shop and erection details including member sizes, grades of materials, details of fabrication and erection, and end connections. 1. Do not begin fabrication of materials prior to review of shop drawings. 2. Review of shop drawings is for member sizes, spacings, detail, and general compliance with Contract Documents only. 3. Material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other trades are responsibility of Contractor. 4. Calculations: Submit calculations for connections as required, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer experienced in such design and registered in the State of the Project. 5. Reproductions of Contract Drawings shall not be used for shop drawings. B. Erection Procedure: Submit descriptive data illustrating general procedure for erection of structural steel including sequence of work, proposed schedule and details of temporary staying and bracing. C. Submit Mill Certifications showing compliance of materials with ASTM and AISC Specifications. D. Submit Mill Certifications (Manufacturer's Inspection Certificates) for bolts, nuts and washers. E. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets or certified test results indicating compliance with requirements for manufactured components. F. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Arc-Welding: Welding procedures and techniques, welders and tackers shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Welders to be employed on Work shall maintain current AWS certification throughout duration of Project. 2. If requested by Architect, submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by operator whose workmanship is subject to question, and if reasonable doubt of proficiency exists, welder shall be re-qualified and certified by independent testing laboratory at no City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 additional expense to Owner. 3. Work suspected of deficient quality may be subject to removal of coupons from any location on any joint for testing. Remove sections of welds found defective and properly rewelded before proceeding with work. B. Steel Fabricator: not less than 5 years of experience in fabrication of structural steel. C. Steel Erector: not less than 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of anchor bolts and other anchorage assemblies to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Provide setting drawings, instructions and templates required for proper placement of anchor bolts and embeds. B. Sequence shipments of fabricated steel to expedite erection and minimize field handling of material. C. Store structural steel above ground on skids or platforms, and protect from corrosion. Store packaged materials in unbroken containers. D. Do not bend or damage materials during shipment, handling and erection. E. Take precautions in the removal of packaging or bundling devices to prevent damage to materials. F. Certification numbers for fasteners shall appear on product containers and shall correspond to identification numbers on mill test reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel, normal grade: ASTM A36. B. High Strength Structural Steel: ASTM A572 - Grade 50. C. High Strength Structural Steel (W-Sections): ASTM A992 – Grade 50. D. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53 - Grade B (35,000 psi yield). E. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) – Round or Rectangular: ASTM A500 - Grade B. F. Erection Bolts: ASTM A307, ANSI B18.2.1, and ANSI B18.2.2. G. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325N, ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.2.2. 1. Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings shall appear on bolts and nuts. H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 I. High Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 105. J. Washers: ANSI B27.2 Type A. K. Welding Electrodes: 1. Welding electrodes shall conform to AISC Specifications. Use E70 electrodes for ASTM A36 and ASTM A572 Grade 50 Steel. Use E8018 for ASTM A441 steel. 2. Coatings of low-hydrogen electrodes shall be thoroughly dry when used. Electrodes taken from hermetically sealed packages shall be used within 4 hours, or shall be dried in accordance with AWS D1.1 before use. 3. Do not use electrodes of any type that have been wet. L. Coatings for structural steel 1. Shop Primer: a. Rust-inhibiting primer conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-86g, Type I or III. b. Paint and methods of paint application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental regulations. c. Paint shall be compatible with welding procedures and shall produce no significant difference in strength of weld material. d. Paint shall meet or exceed requirements for abrasion - Fed. Test No. 141; elongation - ASTM D522; and salt spray - ASTM B117. 2. Primer for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel a. Acceptable Products: Tnemec 10-09 Valspar 13-R-29 Carboline Phenoline 818 City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromik Universal B50 Series 3. Zinc-Coating: Where galvanizing steel is required, zinc coating shall conform to ASTM A123 and A143. Zinc coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153. Do not galvanize ASTM A490 bolts. 4. Cold Galvanizing: Galvilite as manufactured by ZRC WORLDWIDE, Marshfield, MA (www.zrcworldwide.com), and used for repair only. M. Shear Studs 1. Headed fusion welded shear connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck, and supporting beam. 2. Steel shall conform to ASTM A108 grades C1010-1020, minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Studs shall be of uniform diameter, heads concentric and normal to shaft, and weld end chamfered and solid flux. 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. W-Shapes: 80 percent. 2. Channels, Angles: 80 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 70 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 0 percent. 5. Steel Pipe 25 percent. 6. All Other Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: 85 percent. 2. Channels, Angles: 85 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 75 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 5. Steel Pipe 25 percent. 6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.3 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS A. Design connections to resist required forces, where not detailed on Drawings. B. Design connections for simple beams (except where end reactions are otherwise scheduled) for 55 percent of total uniform load capacity shown in Maximum Total Uniform Load Tables, Part 3, of AISC Manual, for given beam, span and grade of steel specified. C. Complete penetration butt weld moment connections to develop 100% of flexural capacity of member. D. Except as specifically noted otherwise, detail bolted connections using bolts conforming to ASTM A325N, Bearing Type Connections with threads allowed in shear plane. Details shall be in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Joints. E. Design welded truss connections for 1.15 times required forces. F. Weld connections for diagonal bracing to develop full strength of member in tension. G. Do not use welds in combination with bolts in the same face of any connection. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate materials in accordance with applicable AISC Specifications and Standards. B. Pre-assemble work as much as possible and deliver to site ready for erection. Mark and match-mark pieces where field assembly is required. C. Prior to fabrication; straighten materials, remove twists and bends and clean faying surfaces of scale and rust. D. Clean members to be painted with power tools in accordance with SSPC standards. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Camber beams to within 1/8th inch per 15 feet of beam length. Mark beams indicating direction of fabricated or natural camber. F. Provide members of required sizes, weights, shapes and lengths. Do not splice members to achieve required lengths except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Do not alter member shapes or lengths or enlarge bolt holes in the field for proper fit; return materials to the fabrication shop for correction where required. Member splices allowed for the convenience of the fabricator or erector shall not result in additional cost to the Owner. G. Punch or drill holes for bolts. Hole sizes shall conform to AISC Specifications. H. Compression joints shall have both contact surfaces milled for precision fit. Other joints shall be cut or dressed straight and true, and prepared as required for welding. Components of assemblies and built-up members shall be pinned and rigidly maintained in accurate position during final assembly. 2.5 WELDED CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with AWS D1.1. B. Clean surfaces of loose scale, rust, paint, grease and dirt. Remove oil with benzine. Wire brush welds after depositing for visual inspection. Welds shall be smooth and uniform in cross section, shall be free of porosity and clinkers, and shall have required fusion and penetration into base metal. C. Secure members in proper position for welding. D. Take proper precautions to minimize residual stresses and distortions in members being welded. E. Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to Table 3.2, AWS D1.1. F. Prepare members to be butt-welded in accordance with AISC recommendations for pre- qualified welds, and provide required clearances and back-up bars. Remove back-up bars after completing welds. G. Lay fillet welds of required sizes in proper position and with gaps not exceeding AISC recommendations. H. Tack welding shall not affect quality of finished welds. 2.6 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide holes at right angles to members of sizes recommended by AISC Specifications. Short-slotted holes shall not be used for primary frame connections (members connecting to columns), trusses and wind bracing unless specifically allowed by the Architect. Where used, short-slotted holes shall be oriented normal to the direction of load. B. Provide beveled washers for surfaces out of parallel more than 1:20. C. Provide bolts of sufficient length to extend entirely through nuts. D. Protect fasteners from dirt and moisture at job site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to be installed and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protective storage. Fasteners not used shall be returned to protected storage at end of shift. Fasteners shall not be cleaned of lubricant that is present in as-delivered condition. Fasteners for slip critical connections which must be cleaned of accumulated rust or dirt resulting from job site conditions, shall be cleaned and relubricated prior to installation. E. Anchor bolts and erection bolts: tighten with a suitable wrench not less than 15 inches long. Tap bolt heads with a hammer while tightening. F. High Strength Bolts (typical, except as noted otherwise): install bolts in properly aligned holes, and tighten to snug tight condition. Snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. G. Hand tighten and tack weld (nut-to-bolt shank) bolts required to be "finger-tight". H. Holes for anchor bolts in base plates may be oversized in accordance with AISC Specifications. Provide washers as indicated on Drawings. 2.7 COATINGS A. SHOP PAINTING 1. Apply one coat of rust-inhibitive primer to surfaces of structural steel members except: surfaces required to be field welded, to be encased in concrete, to be spray fireproofed, City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 and top flanges of beams with shear connectors to support metal deck. 2. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be painted of all loose mill scale, dirt, rust, and other foreign matter with steel scrapers, wire brushes, or sandblasting in accordance with SSPC SP-3. Remove oil and grease with solvents. 3. Mix paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, continuously stir during application, and do not add thinner after initial mixing. 4. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, thoroughly work over surfaces and into corners. Minimum dry thickness of coating shall be 2 mils. 5. Repair damage to coating prior to delivery. B. GALVANIZING 1. Galvanize exposed steel members supporting cooling tower and other members as noted on Drawings. 2.8 PRODUCTS A. FUSION WELDED ANCHORS 1. Comply with AWS D1.1, Section 7. 2. Clean surfaces to be welded of rust, oil, grease, paint and dirt. Remove mill scale by scraping or sandblasting. 3. Weld headed studs with appropriate equipment properly adjusted for climactic conditions. 4. Remove ceramic ferrules after welding. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Shear Studs: 1. When temperature is below 32 degrees F, one stud in each 100 shall be tested. 2. Minimum of 2 shear studs shall be tested at start of each production period in order to determine proper generator, control unit and stud welder setting. Studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees from vertical without weld failure. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that sound weld or full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud, stud shall be struck with hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular toward nearest end of beam. Studs failing this test shall be replaced. B. Pre-Erection Testing of High Strength Bolts 1. Test at least three bolt, nut and washer assemblies from each lot of bolts supplied to job site. 2. Test assemblies in a tension measuring device at site to verify that assemblies can develop tension listed in Table 4 of AISC Specification for Structural Joints. 3. Bolt tension shall be developed by tightening of nut. C. Inspection of Structural Steel: 1. Provide access to materials in fabrication and full cooperation to testing laboratory. 2. Following testing services shall be performed: a. Inspect fabrications in shop. b. Check temporary bracing of steel frame. c. Check location and condition of anchor bolts. d. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. e. Qualification of welders and welding techniques. f. Visually inspect erection bolts. g. Inspection of high-strength bolting: (1) In accordance with Section 9 of AISC Specifications for Structural Joints. (2) Confirm that fasteners meet project specification and are properly stored and handled. (3) Confirm that faying surfaces have been properly prepared before connections are assembled. (4) Observe testing and calibration and confirm that procedures used result in the required fastener tension. (5) Visually inspect connections. h. Visually inspect all field and shop welds. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 i. Complete-penetration welds. (1) Ultrasonic or X-ray testing per AWS Standards. (2) Testing shall be performed on 100% of shop and field complete-penetration welds. j. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. D. Remove and replace Connections found to be faulty at no additional cost to the contract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify condition and position of anchor bolts and embeds in concrete prior to commencing erection. B. Correct misaligned or missing components required for connections to steel framework before commencing erection. C. Measure camber of erected steel beams and report deviations from required camber before placing concrete slabs. Do not place concrete on beams that have inadequate or negative camber. 3.2 ERECTION AND FIELD ASSEMBLY A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications. Work shall be plumb, square, true to line, level and in proper position and orientation. B. Provide temporary bracing and guys to maintain stability of framework during erection for stresses and loads due to erection equipment and its operation, weight of structure, wind, and temporary loads imposed during erection. Check and adjust bracing frequently during progress of erection and assembly. Maintain temporary bracing until all components of the structure required for lateral stability are in place and final connections made. C. Do not stack materials on partially completed framework, or in a manner to cause damage or overloading of the structure. D. Tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice and as follows: 1. Displacement of columns adjacent to elevator shafts not to exceed 1 inch at any point. 2. Individual members plumb or level to within 1:750. 3. Vertical dimensions: 1/4 inch per story, exclusive of elastic shortening of columns. 4. Floor framing members: +-1/4 inch from column splice next above. 5. Horizontal dimensions: +- 1:2000 for overall length or width. E. Field Assembly: 1. Assemble steel framework accurately to lines and elevations indicated and within specified tolerances. Align and adjust members forming parts of a completed frame before fastening. 2. Erect structural steel in proper sequence with work of other trades. 3. Tie anchor bolts securely in position before concrete is placed. 4. Thoroughly clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before assembly. 5. Adjust bolt holes requiring enlargement only by reaming, not by drifting or burning. 6. Erection bolts may be tightened and left in place, except in architecturally exposed work. Fill holes left from removed bolts by plug welding. Grind welds smooth where architecturally exposed. 7. Straighten and correct members damaged during handling, or replace without additional cost to the Owner. 8. Where shoring of beams and girders is required, provide positive support at midpoint of spans under 25 feet and at third points of spans over 25 feet. Locate temporary supports directly above beams at the supporting floor, or transfer load to beams with load spreaders. Re-shore where construction loading exceeds live load capacity of supporting floor. F. Field Connections: 1. After frame is aligned and plumb, make final welded and bolted connections in accordance with AISC Specifications. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 051200-8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Properly sequence welding to prevent distortion, and misalignment of the framework. 3. Maintain temporary bracing of the structure until connections are complete and other required components of the structure (e.g. floor slabs and metal roof decks) are in place. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up field welds, abrasions and scarred areas of structural steel with same paint used for shop coating after erection of frame and final connections are completed. 3.4 FIELD PAINTING A. Refer to Section 099100 for field painting of exposed steel. 3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 052123-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 052123 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-engineered steel joists 2. Bridging 3. Ceiling extensions 4. Bearing plates 5. Side wall anchors 6. Extended ends 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Joist Institute, SJI: 1. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series; and Standard Load Table, Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 2. Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH Series; and Standard Load Table, Longspan Steel Joists, LH Series. 3. Standard Specifications for Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH Series; and Standard Load Table, Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH Series. 4. Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. 5. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.5, Specification for Steel, Low-Alloy, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes. 2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings to include member marks, number, type, location, and spacing of members; details of bridging, extended ends and attachment at supports. 1. Reproduction of Contract Drawings shall not be used for drawings. B. Design: Indicate on shop drawings where special designs have been provided, including a detailed, written description of magnitudes and locations of loads for each special design loading condition. C. Submit Certified mill test reports showing compliance with requirements of ASTM and SJI Specifications. D. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 052123-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Member of Steel Joist Institute 2. Fabrications, handling, erection and connections of steel joists shall be in accordance with latest editions of SJI Specifications. B. Welding Operator Qualifications: 1. Certified within 6 months previous 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mark pieces for identification during erection. B. Deliver to site in proper sequence for erection. C. Store materials above ground; prevent corrosion, warpage and twisting. D. Do not bend or damage members during handling. E. Take precautions breaking bundles to prevent damage to materials and injury to workmen. 1.6 DESIGN A. Joists shall be designed by the fabricator in accordance with the specifications of the Steel Joist Institute. B. Where loads are shown or specified, members shall be designed for the specific loading conditions required. C. Where loadings are not shown, members shall be designed for the maximum allowable load indicated in the standard load tables published by the Steel Joist Institute for the member designation and spans required. D. Fabricator shall determine and include in the work any and all special bridging or temporary bracing required for proper erection or final assembly of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel bridging, bearing plates and wall anchors: comply with ASTM A36. B. Bolts: comply with ASTM A307. C. Welding Electrodes: comply with AWS A5.5, E70 or submerged arc Grade SAW-2. D. Steel Joists: comply with SJI Specifications. 1. Provide double angle bottom chords. 2. Provide extended ends where required. E. Paint: rust-inhibiting primer; comply with SJI Specifications; paint and methods of paint application shall comply with applicable air-quality and environmental regulations. 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. Channels, Angles: 80 percent. 2. Plate and Bar: 70 percent. 3. All Other Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. Channels, Angles: 85 percent. 2. Plate and Bar: 75 percent. 3. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Design and fabricate joists in accordance with SJI Specifications. B. Accessories: Provide required sag rods, bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side wall anchors, wall connectors, headers, and ceiling extensions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 052123-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Shop Paint: After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, and anchors of rust, mill scale, dirt and other foreign material. Remove grease and oil with solvents. Apply one coat of paint, minimum thickness of 2 mils. 1. Paint coat for steel exposed in crawl space not less than 3.0 mils thick. D. Extended Ends: Design to cantilever from the main span of the joist, provide load capacity at least equal to that of joist. E. Provide horizontal and X-bridging as required, minimum bridging requirements in accordance with SJI Specifications. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect fabricating and welding procedures in shop. 2. Visually inspect shop welds. 3. Inspect painting procedures. 4. Check material certifications in shop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Replace joists damaged by bending or warping during handling and erection. B. Bridging shall comply with SJI Specifications and with details on Drawings. C. Minimum bearing and anchorage shall comply with SJI Specifications and Drawings as related to particular type of support. D. Provide erection bolts for joists located on column centerlines. E. Set joists to lines, levels, and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated or required to carry out structural requirements. Execute general handling and erection in accordance with SJI Specifications. F. Permanently fasten joists to supports and install bridging and anchorage before any construction loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists. G. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. H. Properly store and protect electrodes to prevent deterioration or damage by moisture and climate. I. After erection, touch up field connections and abraded places of shop paint with same kind of paint as shop coat. J. Do not weld bottom chords of joists to supports until full dead load of roof is applied. Brace joists and supporting structure for safety and stability until permanent bracing structures are in place. K. Do not use bridging to support conduit, piping, duct work, or other equipment. L. Do not attach hangers supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds directly to joist chords. See details on Structural Drawings for methods of supporting loads in excess of 100 pounds on joists. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up abrasions and welds with shop paint. B. Correct or replace damaged materials at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect condition of materials after erection. 2. Inspect connections to supporting structure. 3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK & FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053113-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 053113 COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK AND FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Composite metal floor deck 2. Shear studs 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 2. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code, Steel. 3. AWS D9.1, Specification for Welding of Sheet Metal. D. Steel Deck Institute: 1. SDI Specifications for Composite Steel Floor Deck. E. Underwriters Laboratories Building Materials Directory. F. Underwriters Laboratories Electrical Construction Materials Directory: 1. U.L. 209, Cellular Metal Floor Electrical Raceways and Fittings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: submit manufacturers data indicating product compliance for the following: 1. Composite Metal Floor Deck a. Submit certification that decking meets requirements for working platform and form for concrete placement. b. Submit certification that slab and deck system meets requirements for superimposed load capacity. 2. Shear Studs B. Shop Drawings: submit shop and installation drawings for review, including: 1. Composite Metal Form Deck drawings a. Metal deck erection layouts, details, dimensions, and installation instructions. Indicate where shoring of deck is required for concrete placement. b. Show framing, locations, lengths, and markings of deck to correspond with sequence and procedure to be followed in installing and fastening steel deck. c. Show methods of fastening deck and installing accessories. d. Show locations, types, and sequence of welded connections for deck units, using standard AWS weld symbols. e. Show size and number of holes to be cut in deck. 2. Shear studs: show sizes, locations, and layout of shear studs to be field welded to top flanges of steel beams. C. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK & FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053113-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: 1. Use welding procedures and techniques, welders, and tackers that are qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Maintain current AWS certification throughout duration of Project for welders employed on Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deck: 1. Deliver, store, handle and install steel deck and accessories so as not to damage or deform. 2. Stack deck, stored at site before erection, on platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins or other suitable covering to provide weathertight enclosure and to afford proper air circulation. 3. Do not use deck for storage or as a working platform until sheets have been securely fastened in position. Do not damage or overload deck during construction period. 4. Do not use damaged deck. Replace damaged deck with new material at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Wirebrush and re-coat rusted areas on deck within 24 hours of detection. B. Shear Studs: 1. Store in dry condition, above ground. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Shear Studs: 1. Provide shear stud connectors with proper ferrules and accessories especially designed to create composite deck action by mating of shear connectors, concrete deck and supporting beam, and capable of providing shear forces shown on Drawings when welded through deck used on Project. 2. Comply with ASTM A108, Grades C1010-1020, with minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi. 3. Diameter: uniform, sizes shown on drawings. 4. Head: concentric with and normal to shaft. 5. Weld Ends: chamfered and solid flux. 6. Height: at least 1-1/2 inches above top of deck after installation, with at least 1/2 inch clear concrete cover above top of stud. B. Cold Galvanizing Compound: Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, (www.zrcworldwide.com). 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition as of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. All Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK & FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053113-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. All Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Composite Metal Deck 1. Sheet metal for deck: ASTM A653, Grade A. 2. Cellular floor deck units: U.L. 209. 3. Coating on deck and accessories: ASTM A924, G60. 4. Provide deck having integral locking lugs or embossments that provide mechanical lock between deck and concrete slab. Minimum lug depth: 0.005 inches. 5. Deck units: a. Capable of supporting weight of wet concrete, plus 20 psf uniform live load or 150 pound concentrated load per foot of deck width without intermediate shoring on all span conditions, and without exceeding SDI Specifications limits on deck stress and deflection. b. Classified by U.L. Building Materials Directory. c. Each unit or bundle labeled and marked in accordance with U.L. requirements, indicating manufacturer, testing, and inspection. 6. Deck ribs: spaced no more than 12 inches on center, and designed to provide efficiency factor of 1.0 for development of headed shear studs in concrete in accordance with AISC Specifications. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet metal closures and fillers: ASTM A653. B. Ceiling hanger inserts: compatible with deck used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not begin laying of deck units until supporting members are secured in place and their end connections completed. B. Provide shoring where indicated on shop drawings. Shoring must be supported on adjacent beams if the beams are not shored to construction below. C. Where shoring of beams and girders is required, provide positive support at midpoint of spans under 25 feet and at third points of spans over 25 feet. Temporary supports must rest directly above beams at the supporting floor, or load must be transferred to beams with load spreaders. Supporting construction must be re-shored where construction loading exceeds live load capacity of supporting floor. D. Clean rust, oil, grease, paint, and debris away from areas to which anchors are to be welded. Remove mill scale by grinding or by sandblasting. 3.2 DECK INSTALLATION A. Lay and align units as follows: 1. Maintain required number of units shown on shop drawings. 2. Prevent stretching or contracting of sidelaps. 3. Abut, do not lap, ends of units. 4. Align flutes in deck at butt joints. 5. Do not use deck units that are bent or kinked or otherwise damaged such as to prevent proper interlocking and connection of edges to adjacent units. B. Openings in deck: 1. Deck erector: cut framed openings indicated on Drawings. 2. Holes 12 inches in diameter or less may be cut by trades requiring holes. 3. Where openings greater than 12 inches in diameter not shown on Drawings are required, notify Architect. Do not proceed to cut deck until Architect accepts proposed openings. C. Weld deck to supporting steel using 5/8" diameter puddle welds or headed shear studs at not more than 12 inches on center. D. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of units. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 COMPOSITE METAL FLOOR DECK & FIELD WELDED SHEAR STUDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053113-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Fasten side laps and connect perimeter edges to supports at spacing not to exceed three feet. 1. Fasten side laps using welds, screws or button punching as indicated on approved shop drawings. F. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. G. Replace defective deck connections before concrete slab is placed. H. Install inserts to support ceiling hangers. Provide minimum of one ceiling insert for every 4 square feet of ceiling. 3.3 SHEAR STUD INSTALLATION A. Automatically end weld shear studs in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 7. B. Remove ceramic ferrules from anchors after welding. C. Do not weld studs when temperature is below zero degrees F. D. Do not weld studs when surface is wet with rain or snow. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Deck: Inspect deck at welded connections. Reject connections where deck is not intact after welding and where blow holes occurred. B. Shear Studs: 1. Weld at least 2 shear studs at start of each work period to determine proper generator, control unit, and stud welder settings. Bend studs 45 degrees from vertical by striking with hammer. Inspect weld. Do not include these 2 studs in required total number of studs on Project. 2. Visually inspect welds at shear studs. Test studs which do not appear to have full sound 360 degree fillet weld at base. Test by bending 15 degrees from vertical toward nearest end of beam by striking with hammer. Replace studs which fail this test. 3. When temperature is below 32 degrees F, test one stud in each 100 studs after weld cools. If stud fails in weld, test 2 additional studs. Do not resume welding unless 2 additional studs pass test. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Field Touch Up of Deck: After erection, use cold galvanizing compound to touch up both sides of deck at welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. 3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL ROOF DECK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053123-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 053123 METAL ROOF DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal Roof Deck 2. Sheet Metal Accessories 1.2 REFERENCES (Latest Edition Available) A. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.1, Specification for Steel, Carbon, Covered Arc Welding Electrodes. 2. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. D. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A90, Standard Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 2. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM A1008, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural. 5. ASTM B117, Standard Salt Spray (Fog) Test. 6. ASTM D714, Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints. 7. ASTM D1654, Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. Bulletin of Research No. 52, Development of Apparatus and Test Method for Determining Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 2. Standard UL580, Tests for Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review prior to fabrication or installation of materials. 1. Indicate erection layouts, details, steel deck dimensions and section properties, and installation instructions. Show supporting framing, lengths and markings of deck to correspond with sequence and procedure to be followed in installing and fastening deck. Show methods of fastening deck and installing accessories. Show locations, types and sequence of welded connections for deck units. 2. Indicate welds using standard AWS welding symbols. Show size and number of holes to be cut in deck. 3. Indicate allowable diaphragm shear capacity corresponding to pattern and type of connections provided. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL ROOF DECK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053123-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Member Steel Deck Institute. 2. Minimum 5 year's experience. B. Erector Qualifications 1. Minimum 5 year's experience. 2. Welders certified within previous 6 months. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver deck in bundles and store on pallets above the ground, protect from corrosion and damage. Rusted, crimped or bent deck shall not be installed in the work. B. Do not store materials on installed deck before connecting to supporting structure. C. Do not overload deck during construction by workmen or storage of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Grades: 1. ASTM A1008, Grade C for painted deck. 2. ASTM A653, Grade A for galvanized deck. B. Miscellaneous steel plates at vents, sump pans, and closures: 20 gage material. C. Welding Rods: AWS A5.1, E70 D. Weld Washers: 14 gage, with 3/8ths diameter hole at center. E. Galvanizing: 1. Wiped zinc coating, 0.2 to 0.5 ounces per square foot, complying with ASTM A924. 2. Comply with ASTM A90 and A239 for weight and uniformity. F. Paint: 1. Resistant to solvents used to clean deck. 2. Resistant to solvents in foamed-in-place insulation. 3. Resistant to corrosion and blistering in accordance with ASTM B117, D714 and D1654. 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. All Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. All Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Metal deck units shall comply with the Specifications of the Steel Deck Institute. B. Design units for required spans and conditions of continuity, generally for 3 continuous spans, except as required by layout. C. Stresses under construction loads, gravity loads and wind loading shall not exceed recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in lengths as long as practical and piece-mark bundles for identification during erection. B. Painting: City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 METAL ROOF DECK Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 053123-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Thoroughly clean deck and coat both sides with phosphate prior to painting. 2. Apply paint .30 mils minimum thickness to both sides of deck and heat cure for tough, abrasion-resistant finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not lay deck units in place until supporting structure is secured in place and final connections are complete. B. Layout deck units in accordance with shop drawings, do not stretch or bend units. C. Overlap ends a minimum of 2 inches. Interlock side laps as shown on shop drawings. D. Connections: 1. Anchor deck to supporting steel with full-fusion puddle welds. Use weld washers where required. 2. Connect side laps with screws or welds. 3. Side lap connections of interlocking edges shall be made by button-punching with a specially designed crimping tool. E. Weld metal fillers and closure pieces in place. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection: 1. Inspect condition of deck units for damage and corrosion. 2. Inspect connections of deck to structure and at side laps. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up scarred areas on both sides of deck including welds, rust spots and abrasions by wire-brushing and painting with shop paint. B. Repair blow-holes at welds with 18 gage plates welded in place. Replace entire sections of deck where holes cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.4 HANGERS FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Do not attach hangers for ceiling grids, ductwork, and mechanical piping directly to metal roof deck. 3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054000-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 054000 STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior and exterior load bearing walls, supporting vertical and/or horizontal loads. 2. Exterior non-load bearing walls 3. Light-gauge metal framing and required supplementary items. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute: AISI – Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural members. B. American Society of Civil Engineers: ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM A36, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanize) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A123, specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. ASTM A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4. ASTA653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 5. Canada 6. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. ASTM A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 8. ASTM A1003, Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 9. ASTM C1513, Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections. 10. ASTM C1007, Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories 11. ASTM E 488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Masonry Elements. 12. ASTM E 1190, Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. D. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. E. Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries: AWCI – Specifications Guide for cold Formed Steel Structural Members. F. Steel Structures Painting Council: SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Manual. G. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association: MFMA – Guidelines for the use of Metal Framing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Criteria: 1. Comply with AISI Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI, MFMA, or AWS D1.3 requirements. B. Design and size components of wall system to withstand dead and live loads, and loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-05. See construction documents for design wind pressures. C. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1. For stud behind plaster and EIFS: L/480. 2. For stud behind metal panel: L/240. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054000-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. For stud behind brick veneer: L/600. D. Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. E. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. F. Stud and depth shall be as indicated on drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Technical Data to verify the section properties of studs shown on the architectural and structural drawings and instructions for securing studs to tracks and other framing connections. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component details including size and gage designations, bracing, splices, bridging, framing openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, temporary bracing, welds, type and location of mechanical fasteners and accessories, or items required of other work for complete installation. 2. Detail stud layout. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit stamped and sealed structural design calculations prepared by Professional Engineer that metal framing complies with specified load requirements. 2. Certificates: Certify that each welder has satisfactory passed AWS qualification test for welding process involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. D. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Professional Engineer: Licensed to practice in state where project is located and is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. 2. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect light gage steel framing members from weather exposure and damage. Deliver to project site in bundles, fully identified with name, type and grade. Store off ground in dry, ventilated space or protect with suitable, venting waterproof coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Allied Studco. 2. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. 3. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 4. Marino WARE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054000-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 5. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 6. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 7. Steel Construction Systems. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Studs, Track, Bracing, Furring and Bridging: 1. Formed galvanized sheet steel G-60 complying with ASTM A 653, Grade A, ASTM A 1003. 2. Studs: Studs lighter than 18 gage shall not be used. a. For 18 gage units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet, see construction documents for minimum yield strength required; ASTM A 1003. b. For 16 gage and heaver units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet, see construction documents for minimum yield strength required; ASTM A 1003. 3. Open box shaped sections, punched web for studs and solid web for track. 4. Structural properties of sections shall be computed in accordance with B. Angles, Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, 20 gage minimum, manufacturer's standard shapes. C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion resistant-coated, self-drilling, Self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. D. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated fasteners, drilled expansion bolts or screws with sleeves. E. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: High zinc dust content galvanizing repair paint conforming to FS TT-P-645 or SSPC - Paint 20, Type II Organic zinc rich. 2.3 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 0 percent. 2. All Other Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 2. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Galvanize, touch-up and prime metal materials used on exterior wall framing. B. Fabricate assemblies and framed sections of sizes and profiles required with joints fitted, secured, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements. C. Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting or screw fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not wire tie framing components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Install metal framing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Joining of members shall be made with self-drilling screws or welding. Wire tying of framing members shall not be permitted. C. Metal framing may be attached with sheet metal screws at joints according to manufacturer's recommendations except where noted to be welded on details. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 STRUCTURAL LIGHT GAGE STEEL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054000-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Attachments made with screws shall be self-drilling screws at maximum fastener spacing as specified by applicable governing codes. E. Connections to concrete shall be made with self-tapping screws specially designed for that purpose. F. Metal framing members shall be saw or shear cut. No torch cutting is permitted. G. Align floor and ceiling tracks, locating to wall or partition layout. Secure in place with screws or welding at maximum 24" on center. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of track. H. Place studs plumb at 16" on center maximum not more than 2" from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using screws or welding in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where stud system abuts column or wall, including masonry, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. I. Construct corners with minimum three studs. Double stud at door, windows, and sidelight jambs. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. J. Provide deflection allowance of L/360 below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for nonload-bearing framing. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical and electrical items. L. Erect load-bearing studs one piece full length where possible. Non welded splicing and wire tying of components is not permitted. Join members forming trusses by welding. M. Erect load-bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. N. Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. O. Provide bridging at 1/3 points, or as recommended by manufacturer for loading conditions, whichever is more stringent. P. Frame both sides of expansion joints with separate studs. Do not bridge joint with any component of wall system, including tracks. Q. Ensure framing provides true and flat surfaces. R. Set joists parallel and level with end bearing, provide lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Align floor framing over studs, where this cannot occur reinforce track to transfer loads. S. Tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1:1000. 2. US 3. Location: Within1/4 inch of the required location. 4. Canada: 5. Alignment: Stud and runner faces to receive finish materials shall not vary more than 1/8 inch 3mm from the required plane. 6. Level: 1:1000. 3.2 WELDING A. Where welding is required, use special low amperage welding equipment and small diameter rods to prevent blow holes in material. B. Welds shall be 1/8" fillet continuous across contact joint. C. Puddle welds shall be 3/4" diameter full fusion. Weld washers shall be used where welds are made to material 3/16" or more in thickness. D. Use splices or butt welds at all butt joints in runner track. No splices shall be permitted in track over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, or diagonal bracing. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing 3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PREFABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSSES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054400-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 054400 PREFABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Structural Engineering design services provided by cold formed steel truss fabricator. 2. Design, fabrication, and erection of pre-fabricated light gauge steel trusses. 3. Supplementary items necessary for proper installation of pre-fabricated light gauge trusses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 2001 Edition with 2004 Supplement. 2. Design Guide for Cold-Formed Steel Trusses, Publication RG-9518, December 1995. B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A653/A653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A780-01(2006) – Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 4. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. D. Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (LGSEA): 1. Field Installation Guide for Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses. 2. Design Guide: Construction Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses. 3. Design Guide: Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses. 1.3 DESIGN A. Prepare complete structural engineering design calculations for trusses, framing members, connections and accessories. Structural Engineer shall be experienced in the design of cold formed steel structures and shall be a registered professional engineer in the state of the project. B. Design system components in accordance with AISI and LGSEA references. C. Design trusses for gravity loadings and spacings given in the Contract Documents and for wind forces and seismic forces in accordance with governing building code. D. Determine required bridging and lateral bracing. E. Conform to requirements of all applicable codes. F. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/ 240 th of span, under total design loads. G. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/ 360 th of span, under design live loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PREFABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSSES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054400-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 displacement as calculated in accordance with local building codes. D. Truss system, with framing components and accessories, shall provide a complete horizontal framing system, ready for deck installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit fabrication drawings of each individual truss, sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer, including: 1. Description of design criteria. 2. Dimensioned profiles. 3. Member sizes and gauges. 4. Connections at truss joints. 5. Truss support reactions. 6. Required bridging and continuous lateral bracing. 7. Bearing locations. 8. Required camber. B. Submit engineering calculations complete with P.E. seal. C. Submit layout drawings indicating locations and spacings of trusses shown in the fabrication drawings. D. Descriptive product data and installation instructions for each item of cold-formed metal framing and each accessory specified in this section E. Review of shop drawings by Architect will be for required loadings, general profiles, spacings, details, and general compliance with Contract Documents only. Contractor shall be responsible for material quantities, lengths, fit, verification of job conditions and coordination with other trades. F. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data: Provide for every material unless noted otherwise: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data: Provide for each product unless noted otherwise: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabrication shall be performed by a steel truss fabricator with experience in the design and fabrication of steel truss systems equal in material, design, and extent to the systems required for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Steel trusses installation shall be performed by an installer with experience equal or greater to systems required for this project. 1.7 HANDLING A. Exercise care to keep out-of-plane bending of trusses to a minimum. B. Deliver steel trusses in Truss Component Manufacturer’s unopened containers or bundles. Exercise caution to avoid damage during unloading, storing and erection. C. Store trusses off the ground, adequately supported, either vertically or horizontally in order to avoid damage. D. Trusses stored vertically shall be gently sloped in order to prevent accumulation of water on the interior of the truss chord members. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During construction, adequately distribute all loads applied to trusses so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any one joist, truss or other component. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PREFABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSSES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054400-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Load Bearing Members: Cold-formed to indicated sizes, profiles, and thicknesses of mill certified steel conforming to ASTM A653, minimum G60 coating, and ASTM A500. B. Miscellaneous Members: Provide manufacturer’s standard bracing, bridging, blocking, reinforcements, fasteners and accessories with each type of steel framing required, as recommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete light gauge steel truss system. 2.2 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS A. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. B. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. C. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 2.3 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS A. Regional Materials: Provide product that meets the definition of a “regional material,” as defined in Section 01352, for 50% of the product by weight. 1. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 0 percent. 2. All Other Steel Materials: 60 percent. B. Steel to be produced using the electric arc furnaces process. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 2. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of trusses shall not begin prior to review of shop drawings. B. Shop fabricate from cold-formed steel members in accordance with shop drawings, using templates to ensure consistent member placement and alignment of members, and to maintain specified tolerances as shown in Section below. C. Field fabrication of trusses is strictly prohibited unless performed by an authorized Truss Fabricator using the Fabricator’s shop assemblers and portable fabrication tables and templates. D. Members to form truss components shall be joined together by means of self-drilling screws as per certified truss component drawing. 1. Self-drilling screws shall be of sufficient size and number to ensure the strength of the connection. Screws shall penetrate joined members not less than three exposed screw threads. E. Shop fabrication of other cold-formed steel framing components into assemblies prior to erection is permitted; fabricate assemblies in accordance with the shop drawings and to the specified tolerances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erector and manufacturer shall inspect field conditions and tolerances affecting installation and coordinate any necessary corrections with Contractor. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Field Fastening: Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to the building designer’s City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 PREFABRICATED COLD FORMED STEEL TRUSSES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 054400-4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed threads. B. Field Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.3, and as follows: 1. Connections: Fillet, flat, plug, butt, or seam. 2. Minimum steel thickness for welded connections: 18 gauge. C. Cold Formed Steel Trusses: 1. Provide proper lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at lift points consistent with recommendations outlined in LGSEA “Field Installation Guide for Cold-Formed Steel Roof Trusses”. Exercise care to avoid damage to trusses during installation and to keep horizontal bending of the trusses to a minimum. 2. Place components at spacing indicated on shop drawings, with indicated bracing and bridging. 3. Install trusses with plane of truss webs vertical and parallel to each other. 4. Provide framing anchors as indicated by the building designer’s drawings. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points and to resist required forces according to fabricator’s engineering calculations. 5. Install required roof and system permanent bracing and bridging as indicated by the fabricator’s engineering drawings. See the Truss Fabricators shop drawings for location of any additional bracing. All truss bracing and bridging shall be installed before the application of any loads. 6. Connect multiple ply trusses using screws or welds as recommended by truss manufacturer. 7. All sub-contractors shall employ proper construction procedures to insure adequate distribution of temporary construction loads so that the carrying capacity of any single truss or group of trusses is not exceeded. 8. The field removal, cutting or alteration of any truss chord, web or bracing member is not allowed without the prior written approval of the Truss Designer. 9. Damaged chords, webs and complete trusses shall be repaired or replaced as directed and approved in writing by the Truss Designer prior to installation or application of the repair or replacement. D. Erection bracing shall hold trusses straight and plumb and in safe condition until decking and permanent truss bracing have been installed. E. Materials used in bracing shall be furnished by erection subcontractor. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Trusses damaged during or after erection shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. A repair detail drawing from the truss fabricator’s engineer, with P.E. seal, shall be submitted for Architect’s review before proceeding with repair. B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanized repair paint in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. General: Waste management as specified in Section 017419 and as specified in this section. B. Collect cut-offs and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 6. Shelf angles. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details[ Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Metal ships' ladders. 6. Metal bollards. D. For metal fabrications indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Provide shop drawings and calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders and alternating tread devices. B. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Alternating Tread Device Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099000. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.8 METAL LADDERS A. Provide metal ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Galvanizeexterior miscellaneous steel trim. 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.12 HOSE TOWER FLOOR GRATING A. McNichols Co. Grating - GW Series - Galvanized Steel – Smooth surface - 1/8” thick x 1 ¼” tall x 4” bar spacing; 2 -24” x 48” pieces 2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primer as indicated in Section 099000. unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055000 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. B. Anchor bollards in concrete . Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. C. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inchmachine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner furnishes padlocks. D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099000. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055120 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 055120 - PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide standard prefabricated stair and rail systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable code requirements and the following criteria. In case of conflict, the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Stairs shall withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component: 1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lb/sf and concentrated load of 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 square inches. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified in addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads. 3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Handrails and railings shall withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials, including handrails, railings, anchors and connections. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product information and installation manual. 2. Submit complete Installation instruction manual as published by the Pre-engineered stair manufacture to complete this section of work. C. Shop Drawings: Stair plans, elevations, details, methods of installation and anchoring. 1. Show members, sizes and thickness, anchorage locations and accessory items. 2. Furnish setting diagrams for anchorage installation as required. 3. Shop drawings shall include calculations stamped by a structural engineer registered in the jurisdiction in which the project is located. D. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer to have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design, engineering and fabrication of steel stairs, and must offer these turnkey services to complete this section of work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of local building code, ADAAG and ANSI A117.1 as applicable for stairs and handrails. C. Welding: Perform shop and field welding in accordance with applicable recommendations of the American Welding Society. Use only welders who have been certified by AWS D1.1 testing within one year of contract date. D. Tolerances: Coordinate fabrication and installation of stair and railing systems with adjacent building construction and verify critical dimensions to ensure accurate installation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055120 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver stair and rail components in Manufacturer's pre-bundled protective wrapping, clearly labeled for stair type and location in building. B. Storage and Protection: Store stair and rail components above ground, protected from exposure to the elements and from physical damage caused by other construction activities. Rusted, bent, warped or otherwise damaged units will not be accepted. 1.6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: General Contractor will provide guaranteed field measurements if schedule does not allow for physical dimensioning. Otherwise field verify floor-to-floor and horizontal dimensions of spaces where stairs will be installed prior to fabrication of stairs under this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American Stair. 2. Worthington Metal Fabricators. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36: B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. C. Steel Tubing: 1. Structural use: ASTM A500, Grade B or C. 2. Non-Structural Use: ASTM A513, hot rolled or coiled rolled (mill option). D. Steel Sheet: 1. Structural use: ASTM A570 (hot rolled) or A366 (cold rolled). 2. Non-Structural Use: ASTM A569 (hot rolled) or A366 (cold rolled). E. Fasteners and Accessories: Provide all necessary anchor bolts, clip angles, hanger rods and other hardware, accessories and incidental materials required for complete installation of stairs and rails. F. Welding Materials: Conform to AWS code and AWS filler metal specifications for material being welded. G. Primer: Acrylic Latex rust-inhibitive primer containing less than 1.0 lb/gal volatile organic compounds (VOC), certified to be compatible with finish coats specified in section 099000. H. Concrete Materials and Reinforcement: Comply with the applicable requirements of Section 033000. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Use same material and finish as parts being joined, except use stainless steel between dissimilar metals and non-corrosive fasteners at exterior connections or joints. 2. Provide fasteners of sufficient strength to support connected members and loads, and to develop full strength of parts fastened or connected. 3. Construct stairs and rails with all components necessary for support and anchorage, and to provide a complete installation. 2.4 STANDARD STAIR AND RAIL SYSTEM A. Manufacturer's standard prefabricated, pre-engineered straight run stair and landing system, consisting of hot rolled steel sheet treads, risers and landings. Stringers to be steel bar grating with side mounted prefabricated railings. 1. Stringers: Steel plate, galvanized. Minimum thickness or gauge as determined by structural design calculations, structural grade steel. 2. Risers: Open. 3. Treads: Steel bar grating system with checkered steel plate nosing, galvanized. 4. Mid Landings: Steel bar grating system, galvanized. 5. Fasteners and Supports: Sized by the Manufacturer to meet the structural design criteria. If hanger rod connections are applicable to any of the landing connections, they shall be a minimum of 5/8 inch diameter steel rod, actual size based on stair load. B. Manufacturer's standard welded steel tube railing system complying with the following requirements: 1. Rails: 1-1/2 inches outside diameter by minimum 14 gauge round steel tube, with 10 gage woven wire fabric, in 2 inch square pattern in 1/8 x 1 inch flat frame (galvanized). Terminate rail ends with radiused returns, newel posts, or safety terminations approved by local code. Provide not less than 1-1/2 inches clear between rail and wall. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PREFABRICATED STEEL STAIR SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055120 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Rail Posts: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter round tubing x 3/16 inch wall thickness. Rail posts to fasten to side of plate stringers per manufactures shop drawings. Manufacture to pre-weld erection aid to rail post for proper height to aid stair erector. Erection aid (Setting block) to be removed and weld ground smooth after installation. 3. Handrail: 1-1/2 inches diameter by minimum 13 gauge round steel tube, continuous multi strand type 4. Fabrication: a. Use preformed or prefabricated bends. b. Butt weld tee and cross intersections in tubing: cope and weld intersections in pipe. Miter elbows. c. Mechanically fasten internal sleeves and fittings. d. Provide minimum 3/16 inch welded steel plate closures or hemispherical closure fittings on all exposed rail ends. C. Accessories: Provide anchor bolts, clip angles, hanger rods, hardware and incidental materials required for complete installation, as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Barrier Gates: Manufacturer's standard swing gate assembly with steel spring hinges and rubber bumper between barrier/gate assembly and rail post. 2.5 SHOP CLEANING AND FINISHING A. Rails and Stair Components: Completely remove oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint or other foreign matter from surface of steel in accordance with SSPC-SP3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Hot dip galvanized all stair parts. C. Shop Primer: Immediately after shop fabrication and cleaning, spray-apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness as recommended by primer manufacture, but not less than 2.0 mils. Apply one coat hi-solids red oxide anti corrosive primer meeting federal specifications TT-664, TT-P-636, and SSPC1364. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates and adjacent construction have been properly constructed. Verify structural framing, enclosures, weld plates, blocking, and size and location of pockets. B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify Architect in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Notify Manufacturer of any detail, design or tolerance deviations as noted or drawn on stair shop drawing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install stairs, landings and handrails in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install square, plumb, straight, and true to line and level, with neatly fitted joints and intersections. 1. Welds in area of travel shall be ground smooth. 2. Do not cut or alter structural components without written authorization. 3. Field welding and joining shall conform to AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 requirements. 4. Installation shall be secure and rigid. 5. Landing and flights properly spaced and within Manufacturer's tolerance. Set railing level and uniformly spaced. 6. Attach rail post to stringers and install wall railing per approved shop drawings. 7. Grind all exposed welds smooth and touch up shop-primed areas with same primer as used by Manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas by application of same coating used for shop primer. B. Repair or replace damaged components. C. After stairs are completely installed, remove all construction debris and rubbish from area. Clean surface of exposed rail and stairs. Leave stair system ready for finish painting. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055213 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe railings, fixed, galvanized. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. E. Delegated Design: Design by a qualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the project location, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055213 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discoloring, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide material with not less than 50% post consumer recycled content. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1A1 stainless- steel bolts, ASTM F 593ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 594ASTM F 836M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re- assembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055213 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending. J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch 6 mm or less. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. P. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 055213 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet5 mm in 3 m. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout , mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. D. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and connected to railing ends using non-welded connections. B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2- inch 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil 0.05-mm dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Plywood backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. FSC wood data. Provide for any FSC-Certified wood: a. Invoice from purchase of wood indicating FSC status and Chain of Custody number. 2. No Added Urea-Formaldehyde data. Provide for any permanently installed composite wood used on the interior of the building: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating that the product has No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF). b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating that laminating adhesives used to fabricate the product have No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF). 3. For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages, by weight, of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 4. Identify each regional material along with the location of its harvest, extraction, or manufacture. Include material cost for each item. 5. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Certified Wood: Lumber shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percentunless otherwise indicated. D. No Added Urea-Formaldehyde data. Provide for any permanently installed composite wood used on the interior of the building. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground]. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inchnominal thickness. B. Roof Sheathing (over foam insulation board): DOC PS1, BDX, thickness as indicated, but not less than 5/8 inch. C. Mezzanine Subfloor: 1-1/8 inch thick tongue and groove plywood, ADX. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fastenersof Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061053 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Set wood blocking for support of woodwork, metal work, plumbing fixtures, electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, mirrors, toilet room accessories, etc., where indicated or normally required to support such items. Provide blocking and nailers to allow nailing of centers, ends and edges of wall boards where applied to wood frame construction. Provide nailers and blocking to receive all wood trim and mouldings. D. Nailers shall be at least 2 x 4 material, except as may be detailed otherwise, and shall be securely bolted in place. E. Where bolt sizes and spacing are no specifically noted, use not less than 3/8" bolts at 32" o.c. staggered. Furnish metal expansion shields for concrete. F. Exterior wood nailers for roof curbs, flashings and the like shall be of preservative treated. G. Blocking: Provide blocking to stiffen the structure and for the support of other work such as door stops,toilet accessories, railings, AV equipment, etc.. H. Roof Curbs: Provide wood curbs to frame openings and to support flashings as detailed. Use preservative treated lumber. I. Nailers: Provide nailers of the required sizes where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Nailers shall be at least 2 x 4 material, except as may be detailed otherwise, and shall be securely bolted in place 2. Where bolt sizes and spacing are not specifically noted, use not less than 3/8" bolts and 32" o.c. staggered. J. Grounds: Provide and install grounds where required for plaster, for casework and cabinets and for nailing trim. They shall be continuous, set back 1/2" from exposed edges of overlapping finish, straight, plumb or level, and in true alignment. Spot grounds set in plaster of Paris, not more than 12" apart, may be used where continuous grounds are impractical. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SHEATHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061600 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass e. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Provide sheathing that is either 50% regional by weight or not less than 50% recycled content composed of post consumer plus ½ pre-consumer. 2.2 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. Confirm compatibility with air/moisture barrier. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01] [ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SHEATHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061600 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings." D. Use screws purposely made for application. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply silicone emulsion sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. Allow first coat of sealant t dry before applying second coat. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTRAL WOOD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061800-1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 061800 GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL WOOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Perform all work required to complete the glued- laminated work indicated in the Contract Documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary for their proper installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section. B. Show details of fabrication, installation and attachment, along with catalog cuts and technical data showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit samples of each material with factory applied finishes as selected. D. Unless otherwise indicated, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Recycled Content: a. Indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. b. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Local / Regional Materials: a. Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. b. Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. c. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 3. Submit information on EPA Waste Minimization Priority Chemicals associated with products provided under work of this Section. For each Priority Chemical, indicate whether the Priority Chemical is produced as a by-product during manufacture and whether it is contained in the final product. Indicate amount produced during manufacture and the amount contained in final product in terms of percentage by weight per unit of product. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer shall be a member of The American Institute of Timber Construction, and shall be properly equipped to fabricate members shown and detailed on the Drawings. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Wrap all materials in moisture resistant furniture wrap paper for protection in transit. B. Store on blocks well off the ground ventilated and completely covered with a moisture barrier that is capable of protecting the materials from water, rain and sun discoloration. C. Wrapping on beams shall remain intact until members are installed and protected from weather or construction damage. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 1. AITC 100, Construction Standards. 2. AITC 117, Design and Manufacturing for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species. 3. ANSI/AITC A190.1, Structural Glued Laminated Timber, Voluntary Product Standard PS 56. 4. AITC 200, Inspection Manual. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTRAL WOOD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061800-2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 LABORATORY TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Refer to Section 01 45 29. B. Laboratory services are as follows: 1. Inspect beams and posts prior to installation for correctness of fabrication and condition of members. 2. Inspect connections for conformance to Drawings, and tightness of bolts. 3. Inspect fabrication and welding of steel connection assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Glued-laminated members 1. Laminating combinations shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AITC A190.1, and shall provide minimum allowable stresses indicated on Drawings. 2. Adhesives shall meet requirements for wet conditions of service. 3. Appearance shall be Industrial Grade. 4. Appearance shall be Architectural Grade. 5. Appearance shall be Premium Grade. 6. Finish shall be pre-stained and pre-finished as selected by the Architect. 7. Ends of members shall receive a coat of end sealer as soon as practical after trimming. Members shall be individually wrapped in waterproof Kraft paper. 8. Members shall be marked with Quality Mark indicating conformance with ANSI/AITC A190.1. Certificate of Conformance shall be provided to Architect indicating conformance with ANSI/AITC A190.1. B. Hardware: Fabricator shall furnish connection steel and hardware for joining timber members to each other and to their supports exclusive of anchorage embedded in concrete or masonry, setting plates, and items field-welded to structural steel. Refer to Section 05100 for steel and for paint. C. Finishes: Each member shall receive one coat of penetrating sealer, one coat of Olympic stain, and one coat of varnish. 1. All finish coats shall be applied at the factory. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before applying finishes, and ambient temperature shall be between 50 and 100 degrees F. Finishes shall be applied evenly and smoothly without sags or runs. Each coat shall be oven dried. 2. Colors and Samples: Colors shall be selected by the Architect from Olympic stain charts. Two samples shall be prepared by the manufacturer and submitted for the Architect's review, and additional samples submitted until acceptance is obtained. Samples shall have all three finish coats, as proposed for the finished product. 2.2 ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS A. To the greatest extent possible, provide products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth's resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. B. Provide products listed on the EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines to the greatest extent practicable. C. Provide products listed on the USGBC Directory of Products and Services to the greatest extent possible. 2.3 RECYCLED CONTENT A. To the greatest extent possible, provide materials with recycled content such that the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content constitutes at least 20% of the total value of the materials in the project. 2.4 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Provide materials and products to the greatest extent possible that are extracted and manufactured within the region. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTRAL WOOD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 061800-3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1. Provide materials and products that use a minimum of 20% of building products that are extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a radius of 500 miles from the project site. a. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is furnished and installed by the tradesman. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Erector and manufacturer shall inspect field conditions and tolerances affecting installation and coordinate any necessary corrections with the Contractor. 3.2 HANDLING AND ERECTION A. Do not mar or damage finishes during handling. Provide proper equipment to handle members without distortion or overstressing. Set in place without binding anchors or members. B. Sequence erection of members and provide temporary bracing necessary to prevent twisting or instability due to temporary imbalance. C. Do not install damaged members or pieces that do not fit properly. Do not enlarge bolt holes. D. Install all anchors, bolts, plates, angles, saddles, etc. shown on the Drawings or required for proper connection of members, and tighten bolts. Do not weld in the vicinity of wood members where damage to surfaces might occur. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove protective wrappings when members are protected from weather or construction damage, and clean any dirt, grease or other foreign matter form the surfaces. B. Remove all debris from the site. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior trim for base, chair rails, and other items indicated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 2. Certificates for Credit MR 6: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that composite wood products comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Interior trim. B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress." 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber." 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." C. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.2 INTERIOR TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim: 1. Species and Grade: a. Stain Grade: Rift cut white maple, clear finish; quarter sawn white oak, stained finish. Clear; NHLA. b. Opaque Grade: Birch, Polar, or Luan, any cut. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed. 5. Veneered Material: Allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. D. Installation Adhesive for Foam Plastic Moldings: Product recommended for indicated use by foam plastic molding manufacturer. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. C. Grade: Provide all finish carpenty items in AWI Premium Grade. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inchmaximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 incheslong, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 062023 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate wood waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. B. Separate the following categories for salvage or reuse on site: 1. Sheet materials larger than 2 sq. ft. 2. Solid wood: a. Trim longer than 16" b. Multiple offcuts of any size larger than 12" C. Recycle the following categories: 1. Clean, unpainted engineered wood products 2. Clean, unpainted dimensional lumber D. Separate the following categories for disposal and place in designed areas for hazardous materials: END OF SECTION PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminatecabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each regionally manufactured material. 3. Certificates for Credit MR 6: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification and chain-of-custody requirements. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that products contain no urea formaldehyde. 5. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outletsand other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. D. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of product. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom C. Certified Wood: Plastic-laminate cabinets shall be made from wood products certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." D. Type of Construction: Frameless. E. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. F. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Panolam Industries International, Inc. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. H. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 4. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate Clad Cabinets: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at counter tops, doors, drawer fronts, and exposed shelving on front and back edges (front edge only for fixed shelving); and 1 mm thick elsewhere, including edges of shelving within cabinets I. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inchminimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glue and dovetail construction. K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Plywood: AWI Economy grade Fir, grade A-B, as substrate for surfaces to receive plastic laminate.. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid[metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. All slides to be self-closing: a. Basis of Design: [__________________]. 2. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Bottom mounted full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 3. Grade 1HD-100 : Bottom mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides. 4. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 5. For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. 6. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 7. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1 8. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. L. Built-In Bed Pull: Mockett Company model DP-137. M. Under Counter Support Bracket: Speed Brace 21x24C. Finish color: Black. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 N. Kitchen Island Towel Bar and Trim Rings: Mockett Company model RCK4. O. Kitchen Island Trash Grommet: Mockett Company model TM12B. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet VOC requirements of section 013520. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement]. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 064116 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PLASTIC PANELING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066400 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic sheet paneling (indicated at FRP on Drawings). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For laminating adhesive[ and composite wood products] used in factory-laminated plastic panels, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. C. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Composites, Inc. b. Marlite. c. Nudo Products, Inc. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Paneling shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 5. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 6. Color: As scheduled. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PLASTIC PANELING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 066400 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard two-piece, snap-on vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels]. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory and panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate trim accessoriesand panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. 1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive Do not fasten through panels. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include manufacturer’s written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of dampproofing. 2. For fluid applied materials provide the minimum time that must pass before additional applications of fluid applied material may be installed. a. For primers provide the maximum time that may pass before primer must be reapplied. b. For membrane materials provide the maximum time that may pass before solvent wiping or abrasion is required before application of additional coats of membrane materials. c. For systems that require different primers for different substrates, indicate if one primer must be installed before or after another type of primer on an adjacent substrate. B. For membrane at expansion joints, submit the manufacturer’s written product and technical data, as well as, tested physical performance properties. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of dampproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining dampproofing, and other termination conditions. D. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special dampproofing manufacturer’s and Installer’s warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting dampproofing. G. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Product data for dampproofing, including printed statement of VOC content. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with a minimum of 5 years experience installed bituminous dampproofing who is authorized, approved, or licensed by dampproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer’s products. C. Mockups: Apply dampproofing to 100 sq. ft. of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner and termination treatment, thickness, texture, and ex-ecution quality. 1. If Architect/Engineer determines mockups do not comply with requirements, remove dampproofing and prepare substrate, reapply dampproofing until mockups are approved. 2. Document precipitation prior to the mock-up, surface preparation, use of moisture barrier or primer, temperature and sun exposure, if applicable, at each step, mixing paddle type, mixer speed and duration of mixing, and wet film thickness of various layers. 3. Cut out samples of cured membrane and document the presence of blisters, bubbles, and/or pinholes, if any, as well as thickness of complete system. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review requirements for dampproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, temperature and dew point before and after installation, time of day for installation, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special de-tails and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply dampproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. Do not apply dampproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply dampproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of dampproofing materials. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by dampproofing manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace dampproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of dampproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. B. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sonneborne Building Products /Div., “Hydrocide 700 Mastic”. 2. Henry 789 Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing 3. Karnak Chemical Corporation, “220 AF”. 4. W.R. Meadows, Inc. “Type 2”. C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. E. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. F. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. 30 g/L or less. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-formulated with separate products for concrete, sheathing and metal surfaces if required. B. Glass-Fiber Mat: Non-woven fiberglass fabric of continuous filament or jack-straw filament/yarn pattern of glass fiber, impregnated and bound together with type of organic/synthetic binder that is compatible with type of bituminous compound indicated to be reinforced, weighing 1.0 to 1.5 lbs. per 100 sq. ft,. 36-inch- wide C. Bituminous Grout: Comply with ASTM D 147. D. Plastic Cement: Asphalt based, complying with ASTM D 491, except provide coal tar base where specifically recommended by manufacturer of bituminous dampproofing materials. E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Membrane at Expansion Joints: 50 mil minimum, non-staining, uncured sheet neoprene. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, Die C - 1400 pounds per square inch minimum. a. Elongation: ASTM D 412 - 300 percent minimum. b. Tear Resistance: ASTM D 624, Die C - 125 pounds per square inch minimum. c. Brittleness: ASTM D 2137 - does not break at minus 30 degrees F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete finish texture is wood float or shutter finish as required by manufacturer. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263. 5. Utilize techniques demonstrated to be effect in mock-up installation. 6. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean and prepare substrate according to ASTM D 5295 and manufacturer’s written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for dampproofing application. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of dampproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. F. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. G. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. H. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric. 3.3 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to dampproofing manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 dry methods before coating surfaces. 3.4 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. 3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling. 3.5 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Apply two coats of dampproofing, by brushing or spraying at rate of 2 to 3 gallons per 100 sq. ft. per coat, to produce uniform, dry film thickness of not less than 30 mils or manufacturer’s minimum thickness greater than 30 mils, whichever is greater. B. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as “Reinforced,” install lapped course of glass-fiber mat in first coat dampproofing compound before it thickens. C. Tape joints and abutting dissimilar substrates by bonding reinforcing and flashing mesh in manner recommended by prime materials manufacturer. Comply with details shown and manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Tape all joints, penetrations, and terminations of dampproofing substrates with a 6” wide layer of glass fabric mesh tape set in initial coat of dampproofing, Topcoat tape extending topcoat application approximately 3” onto initial coat. Lap all tape splices shingle fashion a minimum of 3”. Apply top coat of dampproofing material as specified. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by protection board manufacturer over cured coating. 2. Install protection course [on same day] [within 24 hours] of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 071113 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Protect dampproofing from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes as recommended by manufacturer’s requirements. Provide temporary coverings where dampproofing will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas THERMAL INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072100 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Type IV, 25 psi. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas THERMAL INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072100 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; 2-inch- wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. 1. Acceptable Product: Thermaliner Insulation System by Butler. 2. R Values: R-30 at roofs. 3. Provide poultry wire mesh or horizontal wires at 24 inches on center to hold insulation in place at roof. D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072600 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 072600 - UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion through concrete slabs-on-grade. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and installation instructions. Include vapor barrier manufacturer™s requirements for placement, seaming and pipe book installation. B. Sample Warranties: Copies of waterproofing manufacturer’ warranty, Installer’s warranty, and General Contractor’s warranty, all stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions. Submitted with Bid. C. Test Reports: Manufacturer’s independent laboratory test reports showing compliance with ASTM and ACI Standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Vapor Barrier and components to be from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and application. B. Store materials in a clean dry location in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. C. Stack membrane on elevated wood platform to eliminate warping. D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting materials performance. Do not apply on frozen ground. B. Close areas to traffic during application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of sheet vapor barrier with Division 03 sections. B. Coordinate placement of sealer and hardener with Division 03 sections and with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072600 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheet Vapor Barrier: 1. Type: 15 mil polyolefin film meeting requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A. 2. Water Vapor Transmittance (After mandatory condition per ASTM E154 sections 8,11,12,13): Maximum perm rating of 0.01 as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1745 Section 7. 3. Strength: ASTM E 1745: Class A. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC, 15 mils. b. Zero-Perm Vapor Barrier by Alumiseal. c. Perminator by W.R. Meadows. d. Xtreme by Tex-Trude C. Accessories: 1. Bonding Agent: Manufacturer™s approved or recommended vapor barrier bonding agent. 2. Sealing and Seaming Tape: High density polyethylene tape a minimum of 4 inches in width, compatible with vapor barrier membrane, and manufactured by or recommended by vapor barrier membrane manufacturer. Tape for joints shall have at least the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified. Provide product equal to Stego Crete Claw. 3. Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer™s approved or recommended vapor proofing mastic with the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified. 4. Pipe Boot: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in accordance with manufacturer™s instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Level or tamp or roll aggregate, sand or granular base. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier: 1. Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete pour. 3. Install vapor barrier without tears, voids, and holes. Lap ends and edges as recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 6 inches over adjacent sheets. Seal laps with tape. 4. Turn up sheets at perimeter, at footings and vertical walls, and against penetrations, and seal joints with tape. 5. Seal joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through vapor with tape in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. Point exposed edges with pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane. 7. Adhere membrane to vertical surfaces with adhesive. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect complete membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair as required to maintain vapor barrier integrity. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072726 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products. B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by the Installer, who work on Project. B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Sustainable Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly per Drawing A-90.01 incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly. a. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072726 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. 2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane: 1) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LMP. 2) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 220R. b. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP. 2) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP. 3) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31 typical and Air-Bloc 33 at rainscreen applications. 4) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230. 5) Sto; StoGuard Systems 80210 Air Seal. 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M. c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer. C. Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 mils thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing. D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape. E. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape. F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners. G. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. H. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072726 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 I. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. c. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. E. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat. B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip. 3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072726 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip preformed silicone-sealant extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. 1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material. E. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant. F. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. G. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, strip. H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry film thickness. C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material or strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections will occur trice each week may include the following: 1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 8. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 9. Compatible materials have been used. 10. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 11. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 12. All penetrations have been sealed. B. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072726 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 072730 - SPF INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Thermal Barrier: 1. SPF Insulation must be separated from the occupied interior space by a thermal barrier meeting the requirements of IBC Chapter 26. a. Separated by gyp board see plans b. Separated by an approved spray on Thermal Barrier. 1) Where shown on the plans 2) See Thermal Barrier 2. SPF applied in the crawl space shall be installed with an ignition barrier. See ignition barrier in this specification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Perm: 1 grain/h•ft2•in-Hg. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide SPF system constructed to perform as continuous air barrier. B. Provide system constructed to perform as continuous air barrier system and as building thermal insulation. System shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. C. System Characteristics: 1. Continuous, with joints and transitions made air-tight. 2. Withstand positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on envelope without damage or displacement, and transfer load to structure. 3. Air barrier shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. 4. System shall be joined in airtight and flexible manner to air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. 5. System Penetrations: Penetrations of system and paths of air infiltration / exfiltration shall be made air-tight. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for each product including membrane, primers, sealants, adhesives, and auxiliary materials. 2. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. 3. Submit copy of Evaluation Report (such as CCMC Evaluation Report) or copies of test reports from accredited testing laboratory, for each physical property, indicating that product meets requirements of ULC S705.1-01. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of system and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope systems and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes electric boxes and similar conditions are sealed. C. Samples: Provide sample of product applied to following substrates: 1. CMU. 2. Concrete. D. Submit following Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 2. Provide evidence of testing by accredited laboratory confirming material has been tested and conforms to requirements of ASTM E2178, Standard for Air Barrier Materials. a. Submit test results of air permeability testing of primary air barrier material (ASTM E 2178) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Submit test results of assembly in accordance with ABAA test protocol. 3. Certification by air/vapor barrier manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 4. Certification of compatibility by air/vapor barrier manufacturer, listing all materials on project that it connects to or that come in contact with it. 5. Installer qualifications. 6. Manufacturer's instructions. 7. Manufacturer’s field reports. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 017800. 2. Warranty: Submit specified warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain system materials from single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing product. 2. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufactures materials licensed and certified by Air Barrier Association of America’s (ABAA’s) Quality Assurance Program. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for specified systems. D. Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's certification stating that installed system is in compliance with specified requirements. 3. Certification by air barrier manufacturer that products supplied comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.7 MOCK-UPS A. Include mock-up of product on substrates. B. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: 1. Construct typical area, not less than 100 s.f., incorporating joint preparation, stud and top of wall conditions, and thermal/ignition barrier and illustrating materials interface and seals. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Agenda: 1. Review Project Specifications and Drawings. 2. Establish installation schedules and sequence. 3. Coordinate work with in-place and subsequent construction. 4. Review weather and working conditions. 5. Review installation procedures, including: a. Substrate requirements for Project acceptance (curing of concrete surface, form release agents, temperature). b. Material installation. c. Phasing and sequencing requirements. d. Termination, flashing, expansion joint, and penetration requirements. e. Location and installation methods for ignition barrier and thermal barrier. 6. Discuss necessary protection of people and materials from over-spray and contact with chemicals and gases. B. Conduct tour of areas to receive system and report on surface acceptance, possible problem areas, and recommended remedies. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture, expiration date, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air/vapor barrier manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. C. Avoid spillage. Immediately notify Owner if spillage occurs and start clean up procedures. D. Clean spills and leave area as it was prior to spill. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply system within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by system manufacturer. Do not apply system to damp or wet substrate, unless manufacturer specifically permits that for product. 1. Do not apply system in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. Do not apply system when temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by manufacturer. 3. Do not install product after expiration date printed on label of each container. Product has shelf life of 6 months from date of manufacture. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Begin installation only after substrate work is complete and penetrations are securely anchored. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturers warranty for period of 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Include primary air/vapor barrier and installed accessory sealant and membrane materials which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sprayed polyurethane foam material, when tested, shall meet requirements of ULC S705.1-01 Standard for Thermal Insulation-Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material- Specification. B. Material containers shall be labeled with Evaluation Report number of evaluation agency. C. Design R value: R-26.7 (fill stud cavity). D. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyurethane spray insulation; conforming to following. 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch), ASTM C 518: 4.45 /inch. 2. Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative humidity. 3. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating, ASTM E 84: Less than 25, less than 350 respectively. E. Products supplied by but not limited to one of following: 1. Demilec, Agribalance, Arlington, Texas 76011. 2. Comparable products by BASF Corporation or Dow Styrofoam. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by air/vapor barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air/vapor barrier. B. Primer: Water based liquid primer for concrete, masonry, gypsum sheathing, wood, metal, and painted substrates; 1. Air-Shield™ LM, W.R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, Illinois 60140. 2. Aquatac®, Henry Company Inc., El Segundo, CA 90245. 3. Mel-Prime™ Water-Based Primer, W. R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, Illinois 60140. 4. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 012500. 5. Ignition Barrier: Install Ignition Barrier meeting the requirements of Chapter 26 of the IBC for Attic and Crawl Spaces. Apply ignition barrier recommended and/or compatible with SPF Insulation Manufacturer. Follow criteria for SPF Insulation in Crawl Spaces contained in AC 377. Meet the requirements of NFPA 286, UL 1715 and UBC 26-3 [1]. Acceptable Ignition Barrier manufacturers are: a. Elasticoat 1500 Ignition Barrier by BASF b. Aldocoat 800 Intumescent Coating by Aldo Products Company c. NoBurn Plus Intumescent Coating by No-Burn Inc. d. Substitutions in accordance with Section 012500. 6. Qualifications and testing criteria for Ignition Barrier and Thermal Barrier products shall receive approval from Agency Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The Contractor shall provide AHJ approval letters as a required submittal. Listed manufacturers above are subject to this required prior approval. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Closed Cell Backer Rods: 1. All joints shall be protected from SPF contamination by the placement of a closed cell backer rod of suitable size to protect the joint from SPF contamination. Protected joints shall include but shall not be limited to: a. Horizontal and vertical precast joints b. Precast and curtain wall joints c. Precast and HM frame joints d. Precast and Louver/metal panel joints. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment used to spray polyurethane foam material shall be in accordance with ULC S705.2-02 and equipment manufacturer’s recommendations for specific type of application. B. Equipment settings are to be recorded on Daily Work Record as required by ULC S705.2-02 Installation standard. C. Each proportioner unit to supply only one spray gun. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 017300. B. Verify that substrate work is complete, clean and dry before beginning installation of system materials. 1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum curing period recommended by system manufacturer. 2. Ensure that: a. Surfaces are sound, dry, even, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. b. Concrete surfaces are cured and dry, smooth without large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions. 3. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. 4. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using air/vapor barrier over substrate. 5. Commencement of work shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work and conditions. 6. Examine joints before sealing to ensure configurations, surfaces and widths are suitable for spray polyurethane foam. Report in writing defects stating locations of joints deemed unacceptable for application of spray polyurethane foam. 3.2 PREPARATION A. SPF System: 1. Remove rough or sharp projections, loose particles, and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of air/vapor barrier. 2. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive air/vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Seal penetrations and cracks, and reinforce changes in substrate and other areas as recommended by manufacturer. a. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through air/vapor barrier and at protrusions according to air/vapor barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Apply manufacturer’s recommended primer when required for substrate application. 5. Fill voids as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Clean metal studs to ensure proper adhesion. B. Protect people and materials from over-spray and contact with chemicals and gases. C. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: 1. Mask and cover adjacent areas to protect from over spray. 2. Ensure required foam stop or back up material are in place to prevent over spray and achieve complete seal. 3. Install temporary ducting and fans to exhaust fumes. Provide as necessary for make-up air. 4. Erect barriers, isolate area and post warning signs to advise non-protected personnel to avoid spray area. 5. Install backer rods in precast to precast joints to prevent spray from contaminating joint and preventing acceptable bond of silicone weather seal joints at the precast to precast joint or precast to fenestration products. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Surface Preparation 1. Ensure surfaces to receive foam insulation are clean, dry, and properly secured to ensure adhesion of polyurethane foam to substrate. 2. Ensure that all work that may penetrate through system is in place and complete. 3. Ensure that surface preparation and primers required conform to manufacturer's instructions. 4. Prepare surfaces by brushing, scrubbing. Scraping, or grinding to remove loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale and other contaminants which will affect adhesion and integrity of spray polyurethane foam. Wipe down metal surfaces to remove release agents or other non- compatible coatings, using clean sponges or rags soaked in solvent compatible with spray polyurethane foam. Ensure surfaces are dry before proceeding. 5. Install transition membranes to applicable surfaces and ensure proper adhesion of transition membranes to substrate, capable of having spray polyurethane foam insulation. 6. Install counter-flashings” a. Metal: Mechanically fasten metal counter-flashings with screws at 8 inches o.c. b. Membrane: Cut into and uncover only 3 inches of siliconized release paper along one edge of counter-flashing membrane. Adhere membrane flashing to pre-primed substrate minimum of 3 inches and roll firmly in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Spray Polyurethane Foam: 1. Spray-application of polyurethane foam shall be installed in accordance with ULC S705.2-02 and manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Apply only when surfaces and environmental conditions are within limits prescribed by material manufacturer and ULC S705.2 Installation standard. 3. Apply in consecutive passes as recommended by manufacturer to thickness as indicated on Drawings. Passes shall be not less than 1/2 inch and not greater than 2 inches. 4. Do not install spray polyurethane foam within 3 inches of heat emitting devices such as light fixtures and chimneys. 5. Finished surface of foam insulation shall be free of voids and embedded foreign objects. 6. Remove masking materials and over spray from adjacent areas immediately after foam surface has hardened. Ensure cleaning methods do not damage work performed by other sections. 7. Trim, as required, any excess thickness that would interfere with application of cladding/covering system of other sections. 8. Clean and restore surfaces soiled or damaged by work of this Section. Consult with section of work soiled before cleaning to ensure methods used will not damage work. 9. Do not permit adjacent work to be damaged by work of this Section. Damage to work of this section caused by other sections shall be repaired by this section at no additional expense to Owner. 10. Complete connections to other components or repair gaps, holes or other damage using material which conforms to ULC S710.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One Component – Material or ULC S711.1 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Components – Material and shall be installed in accordance with ULC S710.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – One component – Installation or ULC S711.2 Polyurethane Sealant Foam – Two Component – Installation, whichever is appropriate. B. Tolerances: Maximum variation from indicated thickness: 1. Minus (-)1/4 inch; 2. Plus (+)1/2 inch. C. Apply ignition barrier and thermal barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with requirements of Section 014000. B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: 1. Notify manufacturer in timely manner to arrange for manufacturer’s technical representative’s site visits to ensure proper installation, verify work is in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, and warranty requirements have been met. 2. Manufacturer’s Qualified Technical Representative: Monitor activities and advise applicator of proper installation procedures and precautions. 3. Minimum Site Visits: a. Pre-construction conference. b. First day of installation on site including acceptance of substrate conditions. c. Periodic Visits: Weekly during installation and upon completion to verify that installed system complies with ABAA Quality Assurance Program. 4. Submit reports; include site observations, instructions, and monitoring activities. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPF INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 072730 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect system from damage during installation and while left exposed during construction. Repair damage before proceeding with subsequent construction. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 074100 - METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: The contractor shall provide all material, labor, and administration and other items to provide a complete standing seam metal roof system complying with performance requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally Induced movement and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior. B. Coordinate standing seam metal roof system with roofing substructure work. C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed and prefinished standing seam metal roof system with continuous mechanically seamed ribs, concealed clips and fastening devices. B. Color coordinated ridge, hip, valley, gable, eave, comer, rake, headwall, counterflashings and miscellaneous flashings and attaching devices. C. Provide concealed clips, fasteners, closures and factory and field applied sealants as necessary to meet design criteria and ensure a weathertlght Installation. D. Bituthane membrane roofing underlayment. E. 3-1/2" polyisocyanurate nail base rigid insulation (R-20.5) over apparatus bays and support spaces and 1- 1/2 inch of polyisocyanurate nail base rigid insulation (R-8.5) over balance of building. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. The standing seam metal roof system, including: panels, flashings, attachment clips and attachment screws shall be designed by the metal roof system manufacturer per to meet the following design criteria: a. 2009 version of the International Building Code. b. A basic wind speed of 100 mph. c. Listing of applicable loads by roof zones (interior. edges and corners). d. The building importance factor is one- Essential Facilities. e. Roof snow load is zero. f. The building exposure factor is "C", open terrain. 2. The standing seam metal roof system manufacturer shall provide an engineered analysis of the roofing system, sealed by a registered Structural Engineer employed by the manufacturer and licensed in the State of Texas, verifying that the product and attachment methods will resist wind pressures imposed upon it pursuant to the design criteria and that the roofing system fully complies with all specified requirements. 3. The panel system shall bear fully documented proof that it has been Independent laboratory evaluated using the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Guide Specification (CEGS) 07416. a. Testing shall include establishment of ultimate and allowable system uplift capacities for both the "field• and •areas of discontinuity". b. “Proof” shall be defined as both the manufacturer and the product being included in the document entitled: ·List of Approved Standing Seam Metal Roof Systems" as published by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 4. Provide factory preformed panel system that has been pretested and certified by manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions. 5. Provide factory engineered and tested end lap (splice) details at roof third points, per ASTM 2140 water immersion testing. 6. Provide continuous mechanically seamed ribs that inherently Increase load span capability, stiffness and flexural stress handling capacity. 7. Provide continuous butyl sealant within the confines of the female flange. 8. Provide factory-preformed panel that has been tested and approved for a Class 4Impact {Hail) resistance rating per UL 2218. UL listing shall be present on the UL website (Refer to Underwriters Laboratories website at www.ul.oom}. 9. On-site or field manufactured panels are not acceptable. Field curving of pre-manufactured panels is acceptable. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Structural Requirements: 1. Panel structural properties determined In accordance with latest edition of American Iron and Steel Institute's "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual, D using "effective width" concepts. 2. Wind uplift design for roof assemblies shall be calculated by the standing seam metal rooting system manufacturer per ASTM E 1592. Calculations shall include establishment of ultimate and allowable roof system uplift capacities for both the "field end "areas of discontinuity"'. 3. Provide confirmation of positive and negative buckling moments and uplift capacity determined by full-scale tests. C. Substrate Criteria: 1. Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Engineer standing seam metal roof system installed over underlayment and three and polyisocyanurate Nailbase clad rigid insulation over 22-gaugemetal decking that is capable of withstanding the design loads when applied at 90º to the surface and spaced as shown on the approved shop drawings. 2. Waterproof Membrane Underlayment: Apply waterproof membrane and felt inner ply under entire roof surface per manufacturers written Instructions. 3. Polyisocyanurate Nailbase clad Rigid Insulation: Attach polyisocyanurate Nallbase clad Rigid Insulation to metal decking as per the manufacturers written instructions and In the required pattern to resist the design loading. D. Environmental Requirements: Actual independent laboratory certified test results must be submitted. 1. Resistance to air Infiltration: .002 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf. 2. Resistance to water infiltration: No leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1648 at static test pressure differential of 20.00 psf. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, engineered detail drawings, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit three (3) sets of full size (24.x36") approval I design drawings produced by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer indicating thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and locations of seams, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Indicate roof terminations, clearly showing flashings and change of direction caps. 3. Clearly indicate locations of field and factory applied sealant 4. Show locations, spacing patterns and types of hold-down clips and fasteners. 5. Provide 24.x36" produced drawings provided by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer showing a complete roof plan, roof panel layout, and cross section details for every individual condition of the entire roof system. C. In addition to the requirements outlined under Paragraph 3.12 of the General Conditions and under Section 013300, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Recycled Content: a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content per unit of product. 2. Regional Materials: a. Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between facility and the project site. b. Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site. D. Samples: 1. Submit two (2) samples, twelve inch (12") tong by full width of panel, showing proposed metal gauge and seam profile. 2. Submit color samples on metal for Architect's selection from manufacturer's standard color offering. E. Test Reports: Submit verification the panel system meets the Environmental Conditions for the Indicated test pressures and performance listed for Air and Water Infiltration. F. Engineered Design Calculations: 1. Submit panel system manufacturer's design calculations verifying the panel system meets the specified building code as defined In Section 1.03 System Description, Design Requirements listed above. 2. Design calculations shall be seated by a registered Structural Engineer employed bythe standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and licensed In the State of Texas. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 G. Certification: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials and finishes meet specified requirements. 2. Submit written verification of panel Applicator's factory installation training performed by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and a copy of the Panel Applicator's "Authorized Applicator" certificate. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Minimum twenty (20) years’ experience in the fabrication of standing seam metal roof systems on projects of similar size and scope. Upon request, submit a minimum of five (5} project references for Architect's review. List project address, date of installation, Architects and Owner's name and telephone numbers. 2. No other manufacturer of standing seam metal roof systems will be accepted· without prior written approval of the Architect and based upon the manufacturer verifying the product can meet or exceed a performance criteria listed in these specifications. 3. Requests to be listed as an approved manufacturer must be submitted in writing a minimum 7 days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature, technical information, sealed engineer's calculations verifying conformance, and a product sample. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and issued addendum. B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Panel Applicator must have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the application of standing seam metal roof systems. 2. Panel Applicator must be factory trained by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer prior to the bid date in order to obtain a contract for installation. 3. Use adequate members of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this Section. 4. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the work of this Section in a timely manner. 5. Upon request, submit a minimum of five (5) successfully completed protects of similar size and scope. List project address, date of installation, Architect and Owner's name and telephone numbers. 6. Single Source Responsibility. Provide all items of the standing seam metal roof system work specified herein by a single roofing contractor to provide undivided responsibility. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all requirements of applicable building codes and other agencies having jurisdiction for positive and negative design loads of standing seam metal roof systems. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: 1. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for Its storage and protection area available on the site. 2. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and at project site. 3. Upon receipt of prefinished preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and panel accessories, Panel Applicator shall examine each container for damage and for completeness of the consignment. B. Storage: 1. Store materials out of the weather in a clean, dry place. One end of each container should be slightly elevated and covered with a loose weatherproof covering to prevent condensation. 2. Panels and/or flashings with strippable film must not be stored in areas exposed to direct sunlight. 3. Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance that may cause discoloration. 4. Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion or twisting. 5. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces. C. Handling: 1. Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching or denting. 2. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk boards. 3. Protect installed products from damage caused by foreign objects and constructionuntil completion of project. 4. Comply with pertinent provisions of Supplementary General Conditions. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Furnish manufacturer's standard 20 year written finish warranty stating that architecturalfluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free from fading or color change In excess of five (5) NBS units as measured perASTM 2244-68. 2. Will not chalk In excess of a numerical rating of seven (7) when measured inaccordance with standard procedures specified In ASTM D 659-74. 3. Will not peal, crack, chip or delaminate. B. Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel .Applicator for a two (2) year period from thedate of substantial completion of the building guaranteeing materials and workmanship forweathertightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations and against all leaks. C. Special Weathertight Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's 20 year. full system, non-prorated,no dollar limit weathertight warranty to be jointly signed by the manufacturer and the PanelApplicator. D. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and atproject site. Store sheets and components in dry storage area to prevent condensation. E. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage ortraffic an completed roof surfaces. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: A. Convene prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Attendants: Panel Applicator, installer of each component of associated work, Installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, Architect, Owner or Owner's Representative, Roofing system manufacturer's technical representative and General Contractor. C. Record discussion, decisions and agreements reached and furnish a copy to each attendant. D. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. E. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates, Inspect and discuss condition ofsubstrates. roof drains, curbs, penetrations, wood nailers and other preparatory workperformed by other trades. F. Review structural loading limitations of steel deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness andas required for mechanical fastening. G. Review roofing system requirements (approved manufacturer's shop drawings,specifications and other contract documents. H. Review required submittals. I. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to avoid delays. J. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. K. General Contractor to document the meeting with written minutes and copy all in attendance. PART 2 - -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Standing Seam Metal Roof System: Pac-Clad or prior approved equal. Prior approval is required per Supplementary General Conditions, and alternate manufacturers must be approved per written and issued addendum a minimum of fifteen (15} days prior to the bid date. 1. Pac Clad Tite-Loc Plus, Contact is Chris Headley, (214)914-6907, ckheadley@gmail.com. 2. Carlisle, CMP-200. B. Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment: A 40 mil self-adhering membrane, or prior approved equal. 1. Hyload. C. Three and one-half inch (3-112") Polyisocyanurate Nallbase-Ciad Rigid Insulation: Rmax,Inc., or prior approved equal to achieve an R-value of 20 minimum. 1. Rmax "Multi-Max FA", contact (972) 387-4500 2. GenFiex Roofing Systems "GenFiexISOflber", contact: (800) 443-4272 D. Substitutions: 1. Requests to be listed as an approved manufacturer must be submitted in writing a minimum fifteen (15) days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature, technical information, sealed engineer's calculations verifying conformance, and a product sample. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and issued addendum. 2. Alternate manufacturers must fully comply with all specified requirements. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Panels: 1. Prefinlshed Galvalume® sheet, ASTM AZSO made of 55% aluminum, 1.6% silicon and the balance zinc as described In ASTM specification A792. 2. Panels shall be 22-gauge with a Polyvinylidene (Kynar 500) Finish. 3. Factory fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams suitable for continuous locking or crimping by mechanical means during installation. Onsite or field manufactured panel profiles are not acceptable. 4. Seam Size: 2 inch high x width as indicated on Drawings. a. Provide butyl sealant within the confines of female seam flange, on the bottom edge of female seam flange, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg. B. Clip Fastener Assemblies: 1. Typical clip, UL-90 requirements: a. Wind Rated Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop drawings. b. Wind Rated Clip: Sliding 22-gauge galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastened 16--gauge galvanized steel base. both at Fy (MIN) = 33 ksi. Clip hook shall have a shop Installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations. 2. Typical Low Clip Requirements: a. UL-90 Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop drawings. b. Sliding 26-gauge at Fy--40ksi {MIN) galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastener 18-gauge at Fy =50 ksi (MIN) galvanized steel base. Clip hook shall have a shop Installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations. 3. Standard Flashing Fasteners: Same as Wind Rated Fasteners specified above. C. Accessories: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other items essential to completeness of the standing seam metal roof Installation. 2. Roof Jacks: Manufacturer's standard EPDM with an aluminum sealing base ring; for openings twelve Inches (12") or smaller. 3. Roof Curbs: fabricated to the specifications of the standing seam metal roof manufacturer, thereby assuring compatibility with the roof construction framing and covering. Roof curbs shall be of sufficient size and design to coordinate with requirements for support of heat and smoke vents specified In another Division 7Section. Roof curb flashing and framing shall provide for the expected expansion and contraction of the standing seam metal roofing system. 4. Gutters and downspouts will be fabricated to the same gauge and specification as panel. 5. Provide custom made roof jacks. D. Field Sealants: 1. Color coordinated primerless silicone, urethane, or high grade, non-curing butyl asrecommended and engineered by panel manufacturer. 2. Do not use sealants containing asphalt. E. Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment: 1. 40 mil flexible, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a polymeric filmon the surface and a removable silicone-treated release sheet on the adhesive side 2. Bituthane membrane under1ayment shall be rated for high temperature resistance upto 260 F. 3. Bituthane membrane shall have a maximum permeance rating of 0.05 perms. 4. Minimum thickness shall be 40 mils. F. Felt Jnterply: 1. Shall be Underwriters laboratory approved and fisted in the FM Global ApprovalGuide. G. Shall be Type IV fiberglass ply sheet, Underwriters Laboratory Type G-1, meetingFederal Specification No. S8-R-620B, ASTM D 2178, Type Ill, or approved equal. 1. PolylsocyanurateNailbase Clad Rigid Insulation: Rigidclosed cell polyisocyanurate, clad on top sidewith minimum 5/8 inch plywood surface (OSB not allowed); verify compatibility with roofing membrane manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Panels: 1. Provide factory formed panel widths of sixteen inch (16"), with a one and one-half inch (1-1/2”) high standing seam. 2. On-site or field manufactured panels are not acceptable. Field curving of pre-manufactured panels is acceptable. 3. Provide panels with engineered end laps (splices) at third points, shingled to accommodate water run-off (fabricated with overtap in direction of water flow). Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL ROOF PANELS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 074100 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at terminations. Panel configurations that create voids and require supplemental closure devices are acceptable. 5. Recycled Content: Minimum 25 percent post-consumer recycled content. 6. Regional Materials: a. Panel to be manufactured regionally B. Seams: 1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam, by means of a mechanically driven rib seamer. 2. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengagement during design wind uplift conditions as calculated to comply with local building codes and design uplift criteria. 3. Provide factory sealant within confines on trailing edge of female seam leg to aid in resistance of leaks and provide panel-to-panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction movement, and the seams shall be continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during installation. C. Clips: 1. Provide Wind Rated Clips designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract and provide a minimum of ±one inch (1") of thermal movement. Clips shall incorporate a self-centering feature to allow a minimum of one inch (1”) of movement in both directions along panel length. 2. Clips shall be designed to meet positive and negative pressures as calculated and engineered by the standing seam metal roofing system manufacturer. D. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, including at roof end laps (splices). E. Trim/Flashings: 1. Prefinished sheet metal designed by the manufacturer In the same gauge, material and finish as the standing seam metal roofing system. 2. Locations, design, sealing and fastening methods as per the manufacturer's approved engineered shop drawings. 2.4 FINISH: A. Fluorocarbon Coating: 1. Full strength 70% Kynar 500® coating baked on for fifteen (15) minutes at 450°F to dry-film thickness of 1.0 mil. 2. 15% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523). (low-gloss). 3. 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer. 4. Backer side of panels to be painted with an off-white polyester coating. 5. Top Side Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color offering. 6. Panel coating color shall be "Musket Gray". 2.5 PROTECTION A. Metal Roofing: Protect work as required to ensure that the standing seam metal roof system will be without damage at time of final completion. PART 3 - – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: Standing seam metal roof and sheet metal work shall be fabricated, assembled, and installed in a manner consistent with best trade practice. B. All aspects of installation of roof panels shall be in conformance with the building manufacturer's recommendations. Position and align panels with ribs parallel to the roof slopes. Roofing panels shall be field roll formed in order to provide full lengths without end seams. The roof covering shall be properly flashed and caulked to make a watertight assembly. 3.2 TOUCH UP & CLEAN A. Factory film coating shall be removed after installation. B. Field touch-up of scratches or defaced metal panels will be permitted only if approved by the Architect in writing. Otherwise, any and all defective materials shall be replaced with new materials. C. Keep job site clean of rubbish and debris. 3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT: As specified in Section 01524 - Waste Management and as follows: A. Collect metal scrap and place in designated area for recycling END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLEXIBLE FLASHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 076210 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 076210 - FLEXIBLE FLASHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: Concealed flashing within wall assemblies to protect and shed incidental water to the exterior. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store flashing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store flashing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Self-Adhesive flexible flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 40 mils. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Strip-N-Flash. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705 Air & Vapor Barrier Strips. c. Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane. d. Henry; Blueskin SA Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLEXIBLE FLASHING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 076210 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 HIGH TEMPERATURE FLASHING A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete metal flashing installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install as indicated on Drawings and per Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing: Install self-adhering sheet flashing, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by flashing manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of flashing manufacturer for installation. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover flashing with subsequent construction within 14 days. C. Location: 1. Flexible Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all exterior windows, doors or other penetrations where high temperature flashing is not required. 2. High Temperature Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all locations where flashing will be in contact with metal coping or metal panels where high temperatures exist. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof-edge specialties. 2. Roof-edge drainage systems. 3. Reglets and counterflashings. 4. Custom fabricated roof jacks fabricated out of pre-finished metal to match roof. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. 1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. 2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction. 3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Include details of special conditions. C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof edge as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Roofing Section . B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge specialties tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range):120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Hickman Company, W. P. 3. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 4. Metal-Era, Inc. 5. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. 6. Insert manufacturer's name. B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding [12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness. 2. Gutter Profile: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch thickness. 2. Fabricate to profiles as indicted on Drawings (6 inch round and 5 x 4 inch). Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation. 3. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 4. Hickman Company, W. P. 5. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. 6. Metal-Era, Inc. 7. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. C. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.022-inch thickness. 2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. D. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.022-inch thickness. E. Accessories: 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing. 2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. F. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. C. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes: 1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b. Concealed Surface Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties. C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties. 2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. D. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077100 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F. 3.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system. B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 3.5 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings. B. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SNOW GUARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077253 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 077253 – SNOW GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Snow guards for metal roofs. 2. Non-penetrating attachment system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01: Administrative, procedural and temporary work requirements apply to this section B. Section 074100 – Metal Roof Panels C. Section 076210 – Flexible Flashing D. Section 077100 – Roof Specialties 1.3 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA) – Aluminum Standards and Data, 2003 Edition. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B85-03 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings. 2. B221-04a – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal: 1. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing locations of snow guards on roof and attachment details and spacing. 2. Product Data: a. Product description. b. Construction details. c. Material descriptions. d. Individual component dimensions. e. Finishes. f. Installation instructions. 3. Samples: a. Clamp samples. b. 12-inch long cross member samples including all associated hardware. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on designed roof snow load, roof slope, roof type, components, spacings and finish. 2. Test results: Results of product tensile load testing, issued by a recognized independent testing laboratory, showing ultimate load-to-failure value of attachment. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Certification: Installer’s certification that snow guard system was installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer to specialize in production of Snow Guard Products of the type specified with a minimum of 20 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer to specialize in metal roof installation and installation of Snow Guard Products with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. C. Mockup: 1. Size: Minimum 8 feet long. 2. Show: Snow guard attachment, cross members and accessories. 3. Locate: As directed by Architect. 4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver components to jobsite properly packaged to provide protection during transport, delivery and handling. B. Store products in manufacturer’s original labeled and unopened packaging in a clean and dry location, protected from potential damage, until ready for application. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SNOW GUARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077253 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Attachment system to provide attachment to standing seam metal roofs: 1. With only minor dimpling of panel seams. 2. Without penetrations through roof seams or panels. 3. Without use of sealers or adhesives. 4. Without voiding roof warranty. B. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards to withstand exposure to the weather and environmental elements, and resist design forces without failure due to defective manufacture. 1. Loading: Design snow guard system to resist minimum in-service vector load of 8 pounds per linear foot of eave. 2. Factor of safety: Utilize a factor of safety 6 to determine allowable loads from ultimate tested clamp tensile load values. 3. Source Limitation: Provide snow guard system as designed and tested by the manufacturer as a complete system. Install components by the same manufacturer. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: S-5! Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd., 8655 Table Butte Road, Colorado Springs, CO. 80908; Tel: 888-825-3432; Fax: 719-495-0045; Email: support@s-5.com; Web: www.s-5.com 2.3 BAR/RAIL-TYPE SNOW RETENTION SYSTEMS FOR STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFS A. Basis of Design: ColorGard, manufactured by S-5! Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd. B. Components: 1. Clamps a. Manufactured from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 or aluminum castings conforming to ASTM B85 and to AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 1) Model: No. S-5-U. 2) Set screws: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 3/8 inch diameter, with round nose point. 3) Attachment bolts: 300 Series stainless steel, 18-8 alloy, 8 mm or 10 mm diameter, hex-flange bolt. 2. Cross Members: a. Manufactured from 6061-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 and AA Aluminum Standards and Data. b. Receptacle in face to receive color-matched metal strips. c. Provide splice connectors ensuring alignment and structural continuity at end joints. 3. Color Strips: Same material and finish as roof panels; obtained from roof panel manufacturer. 4. Snow and Ice Clips: a. Aluminum, with rubber foot, minimum 3 inches wide. 1) Model: SnoClip III PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to beginning installation, verify that: 1. Panel seaming is complete. 2. Panel attachment is sufficient to withstand loads applied by snow guard system. 3. Installation will not impede roof drainage. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean areas to receive attachments; remove loose and foreign matter tht could interfere with installation or performance. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. ColorGard Snow Retention System: 1. Place clamps at maximum 32 inches on center or as required by in-service loads. 2. Place clamps in straight, aligned rows. 3. Place both set screws on same side of clamps. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SNOW GUARDS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 077253 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Tighten screws to manufacturer’s recommended torque. Randomly test set screw torque using calibrated torque wrench. 5. Insert color-matched metal strips into cross members, staggering strips to cover cross member joints. 6. Attach cross members to clamps; tighten bolts to manufacturer’s recommended torque. 7. Install splice connectors at cross member end joints. 8. Do not cantilever cross members more than 4 inches beyond last clamp at ends. 9. Install one SnoClip per panel between panel seams. a. SnoClips: slide onto cross member before securing cross member to clamps. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. RectorSeal Corporation. 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 5. 3M Fire Protection Products. 6. USG Corporation. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls fire-barrier walls smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION (do not install where visible from apparatus bays) A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-1): Comply with the following: 1. Pipes, plastic or metal, conduit in vertical runs, installed through cast-in-place firestop devices. a. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with FA 1000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: 1) FA1016, FA1017, FA2053, FA2054 by Hilti. 2) CP 680 Cast-in Firestop Device by Hilti. 3) CP653 Speed Sleeve by Hilti. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items (FS-2): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 0000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ0055, CAJ0070 by Hilti or CAJ0012, CAJ0102 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Acrylic sealant. d. Intumescent putty. e. Mortar. f. Preformed intumescent blocks. g. Pillows/Bags D. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-3): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, WL, or FC 1000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ1184, CAJ1291, CAJ1277, CAJ1382, CAJ1388, WL1054, WL1249, FC1009 by Hilti or CAJ1403, CAJ1235, CAJ1406, WL1152, WL1207, FC1020 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Acrylic sealant. d. Intumescent putty. e. Mortar. f. Polyurethane firestop foam. E. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing (FS-4): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FA, or WL 2000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ2109, FA2053, WL2078, WL2128 by Hilti or CAJ2212, CAJ2171, CAJ2210, WL2167, WL2185, WL2170, WL2259 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Firestop sleeve device. f. Latex sealant. F. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables (FS-5): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ, FC, or WL 3000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ3095, FC3012, WL3065, WL3112 by Hilti or CAJ3185, CAJ3199, CAJ3234, FC3018, FC3060, WL3179 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex Sealant c. Pillows/bags d. Intumescent putty. e. Silicone foam. G. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays (FS-6): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 4000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ4035, CAJ4054, WL4011, WL4034 by Hilti or CAJ4035, CBJ4023, WL4025, WL4030 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Pillows/bags. e. Foam blocks. f. Firestop mortar. g. Polyurethane firestop foam. H. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes (FS-7): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 5000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ5091, WL5029 by Hilti or CAJ5222, WL5171 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Silicone foam. c. Intumescent wrap strips. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078413 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 d. Pre-formed intumescent blocks. e. Latex sealant. I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (FS-8): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 6000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ6006, CAJ 6017 by Hilti or CAJ6012, CAJ6013, CAJ6027 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex sealant c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar. J. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations (FS-9): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ 7000 Series Systems equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ7046, CAJ7051, CAJ7040, CAJ7021 by Hilti or CAJ7067, CAJ7075, CAJ7082 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following: a. Intumescent sealant. b. Latex sealant. c. Mortar. d. Acrylic sealant. e. Silicone sealant. K. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations (FS-10): Comply with the following: 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Systems with CAJ or WL 8000 Series Systems, equivalent to, but not limited to, the following: CAJ8056, CAJ8096, WJ8007, WL8014, WL8019 by Hilti or CAJ8042, CAJ8101, CAJ8133, WL8007 by Grace. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet. f. Pre-formed intumescent blocks. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For fire-resistive joint system sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. g. . D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. RectorSeal Corporation. d. Specified Technologies Inc. e. 3M Fire Protection Products. f. USG Corporation. E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Floor-to-Floor, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-1): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. FFD1011, FFD1012, FFD1013, FFD1026 by Hilti. b. FFD1024 & FFD1027 – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. B. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-2): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. FWD1011, FWD1012, FWD1013, FWD1021 by Hilti. b. FWD1020 & FWD1024 – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. C. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-3): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. HWD0042, HWD0045, HWD0046, HWD0097, HWD0098 by Hilti. b. HWD0107, HWD0146, HWD0144, HWD1047, HWD1021, HWD1024, HWD0148, HWD0149, HWD0150,HWD-0267,HWD-0299,HWD-257 & HWD-0300– Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. D. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint System (FRJS-4): 1. Acceptable UL-Classified Products: a. WWD1011, WWD1012, WWD0017 by Hilti. b. WWD1028 & WWD1029 – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. 3.8 PERIMETER FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS A. Where fire-rated floor assemblies are required, seal voids at intersection of exterior wall and floor assembly with an approved material per building code requirements. B. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems are only valid if the certain wall construction details exactly match those called for in a selected UL/Omega Point-classified system. If the details do not match, submit an engineer judgement drawing from the firestop material manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of Part 1 of this Section. C. Perimeter Fire-Containment System: 1. Acceptable Omega Point-Classified Products: a. CEJ216P, CEJ244P, CEJ245P, CEJ246P, CEJ259P, CEJ260P, CEJ261P, CEJ262P, CEJ263P by Hilti. b. CEJ150P, CEJ151P, CEJ152P,CEJ153P, CEJ154P, CEJ-273P, CEJ-274P, CEJ-275P, CEJ-276P, CEJ-296P & CEJ-297P – Grace Flamesafe. 2. Assembly Rating: Refer to Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class II; refer to Drawings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 078446 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Butyl joint sealants. 5. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer B. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials. 3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with stone substrates. 4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent substrates unless indicated otherwise. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791. b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2000 SilPruf. c. Pecora Corporation; PCS. d. Sika Corporation U.S.; [Sikasil WS-295] [Sikasil WS-295 FPS]. 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following]: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Construction Sealants; SilPruf NB. c. Pecora Corporation; 864NST. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); . d. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant. e. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic. B. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 555-SL. b. Pecora Corporation; c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-2SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901. 2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White. b. GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200. 2.6 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 2.7 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); . d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.8 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems. b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, , and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. . 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. . B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feetof joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, pourable. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints in dimension stone cladding. e. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. f. Joints between different materials listed above. g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows andlouvers. h. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, pourable. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, non-sag. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas JOINT SEALANTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 079200 - 7 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and elevator entrances. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Special Requirement: Refer to door schedule for location of safe room door. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inchspace between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Republic Doors and Frames. 5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 5. Provide extra heavy duty door and frame meeting FEMA requirements into safe room. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction:Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane or polyisocyanurate core. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Provide offset anchor for door frames in exterior walls. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mildry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inchplus or minus 1/32 inch. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081113 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inchplus or minus 1/32 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUSH WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081416 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. 3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. C. Sustainable Submittals: 1. No Added Urea-Formaldehyde data. Provide for any permanently installed composite wood used on the interior of the building: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating that the product has No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF). b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating that laminating adhesives used to fabricate the product have No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF). 2. For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages, by weight, of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 3. Identify each regional material along with the location of its harvest, extraction, or manufacture. Include material cost for each item. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door ontop and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUSH WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081416 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidityconditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. VT Industries, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doorsand wood paneling from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 5. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 6. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel. b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices). Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUSH WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081416 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784. F. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated asneeded to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, . 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As scheduled. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: [_________________]. 5. Core: Structural Composite Lumber. 6. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. 7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Metal Louvers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Louvers, Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. McGill Architectural Products. 2. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V. 3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, finish. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FLUSH WOOD DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 081416 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083113 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 2. Floor access doors and frames (to access mechanical mezzanine). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTAL A. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis. 3. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 4. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 5. Karp Associates, Inc. 6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 7. Milcor Inc. 8. Nystrom, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 3. Door Size: As indicated. 4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083113 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch. D. Hardware: 1. Latch: Cam latch operated by flush key with interior release. 2.2 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Executive Series Pro Hatch by Vault Pro USA. a. Size: Sized to fit 36” wide x 54 “ long rough opening. b. Door Type: Out-swing. c. Color: Grey. d. Configured to open from both inside and outside. e. Frame type and installation as required for framed steel rough opening. B. Hardware: 1. Material and components as required by manufacturer. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083113 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 083326 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Open-curtain overhead coiling grilles. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling grille components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each grille. One operation cycle is complete when a grille is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for curtain components, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling grilles to include in maintenance manuals. E. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling grilles from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling grille manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods. 1. Aluminum Grille Curtain: ASTM B 221 alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Closed-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate curtain as a series of horizontal double-C ribs, spaced at regular intervals, that alternate with continuous horizontal infill panels secured by the ribs. C. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at ends of rods; locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining grille curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. D. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, finished to match grille. 1. Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. 2. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge. E. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain. 1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard. 2.2 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Aluminum: 0.040-inchthick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209 of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated grille with lifting handles on each side of grille, finished to match grille. 1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for grilles more than 84 incheshigh. 2.3 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated grilles with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when grille is locked. 2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.5 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS A. General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer for grille and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each grille. C. Grille Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each grille. 1. Top-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left grille head plate with the operator on top of the grille-hood assembly and connected to the grille drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Headroom is required for this type of mounting. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements. 1. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized grille with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized grille with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in grille opening without contact between grille and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with grille operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, grille closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type; NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. H. Radio Remote Control: Provide one transmitter for each door receiver, operable from up to 100 feet away from motor. I. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered grille with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for grille operation does not exceed 25 lbf. J. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. K. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. L. Emergency-Egress Release: Flush, wall-mounted handle mechanism, for ADA-ABA-compliant egress feature, not dependent on electric power. The release allows an unlocked grille to partially open without affecting limit switches to permit passage, and it automatically resets motor drive upon return of handle to original position. 2.6 OPEN-CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY A. Open-Curtain Grille: Overhead coiling grille with a curtain having a network of horizontal rods that interconnect with vertical links. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cookson Company. b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. c. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. d. Overhead Door Corporation (Basis of Design: Model 670). e. Amaar. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000. 1. Include tamperproof cycle counter. C. Grille Curtain Material: Aluminum. 1. Space rods at approximately 2 inch o.c. 2. Space links approximately 6 inches apart in a straight in-line pattern. 3. Spacers: Metal tubes matching curtain material. D. Curtain Jamb Guides: [Aluminum] [Stainless steel] with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise. E. Hood: Match curtain material and finish Aluminum. 1. Shape: Round. 2. Mounting: Face of wall. F. Locking Devices: Equip grille with slide bolt for padlock. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083326 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 G. Electric Grille Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Motor Exposure: Interior. 3. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 4. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring type. a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black. 5. Remote-Control Station: Interior Exterior. 6. Other Equipment: Emergency-egress release. 7. Equal to Overhead Door Corp, odel RJX, ½ HP. H. Grille Finish: 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized. 2. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (polished directional satin). 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling grilles, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each grille. C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling grilles, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test grille opening when activated by detector, fire-alarm system, emergency-egress release, or self-opening mechanism as required. Reset grille-opening mechanism after successful test. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that grilles operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 2, Denton, Texas PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083513 - 1 Issue for 95% CD Review 24 January 2014 SECTION 083513 - PANEL FOLDING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Four-Fold metal doors with surface mounted tube frames. B. Operation of Four-Fold metal doors includes overhead mounted electro-mechanical operators. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified consisting of manufacturer’s technical Product Data and installation instructions for each type of door required, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. C. Submittal Drawings showing fabrication and installation of Four-Fold metal doors including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, hardware, operating mechanism, and attachments to the other units of Work. Include wiring diagrams for coordination with electrical trade. D. Reference list including (5) successful installations of this type of door within the past two (2) years. E. Sustainable Submittals: a. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: i. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. ii. Material costs for each product having recycled content. b. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: c. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. d. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. e. Material cost for product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Doors shall be designed to withstand external or internal horizontal wind loads of 20 pounds minimum per square foot. The maximum allowable deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span. Fiber stresses in main members shall be limited to 27,000 pounds per square inch. Steel frames shall be designed in accordance with the AISC “Steel Construction Manual”. B. Door manufacturer shall have at least 10 years experience in manufacturing door type specified for emergency vehicle applications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store delivered materials and equipment in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from dust and water, and so as to permit access for inspection and handling. B. Handle materials carefully to prevent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The door manufacturer shall provide a written standard limited warranty for material and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Four-Fold industrial metal doors manufactured by Door Engineering and Manufacturing, 400 Cherry Street, Kasota, MN 56050, (800)-959-1352 or equal products by other manufacturers approved in advance. B. Acceptable Product: FF300 Series: Glazed, with foamed in place insulation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083513 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Tube: ASTM A513 and ASTM A500/A500M B. Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M hot-rolled steel sheet. C. Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard components. D. Fasteners: Zinc-coated steel. 2.3 FOUR-FOLD DOORS A. Construction: Door framing shall be minimum 14-gauge structural steel tube with 14-gauge steel sheet on the exterior and interior faces. Sheeting shall be formed on the vertical edges with no visible welds on the interior or exterior panel faces. All frames and framing members shall be true to dimension and square in all directions, and no door shall be bowed, warped, or out of line, in the vertical or horizontal plane of the door opening by more than 1/8 inch in 20 feet. Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various parts shall be ground smooth and flush. B. Surface Mounted Tube Frame: Supply pre-hung tube frame system constructed of minimum TS6x4x0.25, designed to anchor to masonry wall construction or weld to steel structure. All hinges, track supports and operator supports shall be factory attached. C. Factory finish: All exposed steel shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard epoxy primer and polyurethane top coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full available range. D. Operating Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc. necessary for complete installation and operation. Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two thrust bearings and two needle bearings. Fold hinges shall be dual shear with two thrust bearings. All bearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge barrel and include grease zerks. All hinge pins shall be minimum ¾” diameter hardened steel. E. Weatherstripping: Material shall be adjustable and readily replaceable and provide a substantially weather-tight installation. Weatherstripping at center shall be 1/16” cloth inserted neoprene and include no exposed fasteners on the exterior face of the panel. Weatherstripping at sill shall include two 1/16” cloth inserted neoprene sweeps with an aluminum retainer. The retainer shall be attached to the door with adhesive. F. Perimeter Weatherstripping: Provide jamb and head weatherstipping of 1/16” cloth-inserted neoprene bulb (or closed cell neoprene). G. Vision Panels: Provide 1” insulated vision panels of the size, shape and location as indicated in Section 008000. 2.4 OPERATOR A. Each Four-Fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit designed for high cycle operation. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. B. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to fully clear the opening. Operator shall automatically lock the door in the closed position. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to free wheeling mode for manual operation. C. Operator shall include a formed hood enclosing the motor, gearboxes and limit switches. D. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for phase and voltage as provided on the electrical drawings. E. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete for each door, and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Incoming electrical shall be 120VAC single phase. 1. Controls shall include a programmable logic controller with digital message display or LED indicators. Controller shall include programmable close timers and programmable inputs/outputs. 2. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltage protection, and equipped with mechanical interlocks. All control components shall be enclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover. 3. If incoming voltage is single phase, control panel shall include a variable frequency drive to convert voltage to 3-phase for the motor Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PANEL FOLDING DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083513 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch. 5. Pushbuttons (interior) for each door shall have one (1) momentary pressure three-button push- button station marked “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”. Push button enclosure shall be NEMA 4. Provide master doors control stations in Watch 103 and Vehicle Bay 140. Provide in custom back box (24 x 15-5/6 x 3-5/8 inch deep) with stainless steel face plate. 6. Provide external antenna for operation by remote control. 7. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully closed position. 8. Safety edges: Provide electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon contact with obstruction. 9. Photo eyes: Provide (1) exterior, jamb mounted, thru-beam type photo eyes, NEMA 4 rated. 10. Presence Sensor: Provide (1) interior, overhead mounted, presence sensor. 11. Radio controls: Provide one (1) radio receiver and (1) single button remotes per door. Remotes to open and close doors with single button. 12. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls and components only. Electrical contractor shall install controls and furnish and install conduits and wiring for jobsite power and control wiring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Four-Fold metal doors in strict accordance with the approved drawings by qualified door erection crews. All door openings shall be completely prepared by the general contractor prior to the installation of the doors. Permanent or temporary electric wiring shall be brought to the door opening before installation is started and shall be completed so as not to delay the inspection test. B. Doors shall be set plumb, level, and square, and with all parts properly fastened and mounted. All moving parts shall be tested and adjusted and left in good operating condition. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Inspection of the doors and a complete operating test will be made by the installer in the presence of the general contractor or architect as soon as the erection is complete. Any defects noted shall be corrected. After door approval in the above test, the general contractor must assume the responsibility for any damage or rough handling of the doors during construction until the building is turned over to the owner and final inspection is made. B. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged finished surfaces to match factory-applied finish. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SECTIONAL DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure." 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283. 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph. D. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities". 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SECTIONAL DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Faulty operation of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile. D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653, with indicated thickness. G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation. 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653 for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members. C. Weather seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SECTIONAL DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-pre- wired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. 3. Manufacturer: a. Liftmaster B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall above door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. 5. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SECTIONAL DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Interior units, full-guarded, flush-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, flush-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. I. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. J. Radio-Control System: Consisting of the following: 1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; two per operator. 2. Multifunction remote control. 3. Remote antenna and mounting kit. 2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections, ship lapped design, and PVC thermal breaks. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. b. Overhead Door Corporation. c. Raynor. B. Track Width: Provide width required for 3” wide rollers. C. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000. D. Installed R-Value: 17.0. E. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G90 zinc coating. 1. Section Thickness: 2 inches. a. Surface: Flat. 2. Insulation: Foamed in place. 3. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of 0.022-inch- nominal coated thickness. F. Track Configuration: Standard-lift. G. Weather seals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter] of door. Provide combination bottom weather seal and sensor edge. H. Exhaust Grilles: Provide in locations and size as indicated. I. Windows: As indicated on Drawings; installed with insulated glazing of the following type: 1. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard. J. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard. K. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. L. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring. M. Electric Door Operator: 1. Manufacturer: a. Liftmaster 2. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. Provide with tamper proof counter. 3. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted. 4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Hoist. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and pneumatic sensing edge; self- monitoring type. 7. Remote-Control Station: Interior. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 SECTIONAL DOORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 083613 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 8. Other Equipment: Radio-control system. N. Door Finish: 1. Factory Prime Finish: Full range of manufacturer’s options. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Match finish of exterior section face. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. 3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 3. Operable windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on structural drawings or as otherwise determined using design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure." D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. . ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes. I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems. B. Sustainable Submittal: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 3. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations. 3. Include canopy at rear door. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2. YKK AP America Inc. 3. Provide aluminum materials with at least 50 percent recycled content (post consumer plus ½ pre- consumer). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. Framing and backer plate to be thermally broken. 1. Construction: Screw spline. ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads[, finished to match framing system] [, fabricated from stainless steel]. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded- aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width, with 10 inch bottom rail. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. C. Operable Windows: Oldcastle ZS operable vents or approved equal. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A21, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. ALUMINUM-FRAMED Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 084113 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. B. 3.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Collect cut-off’s and scrape and place in designated area for recycling. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086250 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 086250 - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tubular daylighting device, consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly; configuration as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Completed tubular daylighting device assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. 2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.5 psf pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547. 3. Uniform Load Test: a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf or Negative Load of 60 psf in accordance with ICC AC-16 Section A, or Negative Load of 70 psf if tested per ICC AC-16 Section B. b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, flashings and accessories. D. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect. E. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 15 years. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086250 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: 2210 Oak Ridge Way ; Vista, CA 92081; Toll Free Tel: 888-765-2882; Tel: 760-477-1120; Fax: 760-597-4488 ; Email: request info (commsales@solatube.com); Web: www.solatube.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 012500. 2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General : Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16. B.SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS-C Penetrating Ceiling, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System: 1. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. a. Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibited, impact modified acrylic blend. b. Inner Dome Glazing: Type DAI, 0.,115 inch (3 mm) minimum thrikncess acrylic classified as CC2 material. 2. Roof Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. a. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) thick. 3. Flashing Insulator: Type FI, Thermal isolation material for use under flashing. 4. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. 5. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm). 6. Reflective Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm). a. General: 1. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface. Specular reflectance for visible spectrum (400 nm to 760 nm) greater than 99 percent. Total solar spectrum reflectance (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 93 percent. 2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. b. Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Top Tube Angle Adapter Kit, Type AK: 1. Reflective 30 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long c. Extension Tube: 1. Reflective extension tube, Type EXX, Notched for Open Ceiling diffuser attachment, 24 inches (610 mm) long 7. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C. Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. a. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch (2.8 mm) thick. b. Natural Effect Lens made of acrylic, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick, with open cell foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt, and air-infiltration per ASTM E283. c. Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 086250 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 8. Accessories: a. Local Dimmer Control: Provided with dimmer switch and cable. 1. Daylight Dimmer: Type D Electro-mechanically actuated daylight valve; for universal input voltages ranging between 90 and 277 V at 50 or 60 Hz; maximum current draw of 50 ma per unit; controlled by low voltage, series Type T02: circuited, 4 conductor, size 22 cable; providing daylight output between 2 and 100 percent. Provided with dimmer switch and cable. 2. Switch: Type SW, Manufacturer-specific low voltage DC DP/DT switch (white) required to operate Daylight Dimmer. Note: only one switch is required per set of synchronously controlled dimmers. 3. Cable: Type CA, Two conductor low voltage cable (500 ft.) for multiple unit DC connection. Catalog Number: S750 DS-C-DA-FC-FI-AK-E 4. Wire deimmer to lighting control system keypad. 2.3 ACCESSORlES A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware, power supplies, back-ups and surge protection. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames”. 4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 5. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. FEMA 361 2008 - Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms. 3. ICC 500 - ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. 4. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 5. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 7. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related Division 26 Electrical Sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL-10C. a. Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in- field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for extra heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Five years for exit hardware. 4. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers. 5. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. 1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. c. Tornado Resistant Assemblies: At a minimum, provide heavy weight hinges with stainless steel screws used in accordance with and specified as part of a Severe Storm Shelter Opening meeting ICC 500 and FEMA 361. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: 1) Out-swinging exterior doors. 2) Out-swinging access controlled doors. 3) Out-swinging lockable doors. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products (MK). B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified continuous geared hinge with minimum 0.120- inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Provide concealed flush mount (with or without inset), full surface, or half surface, in standard and heavy duty models, as specified in the Hardware Sets. Concealed continuous hinges to be U.L. listed for use on up to and including 90 minute rated door installations and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Factory cut hinges for door size and provide with removable service power transfer panel where indicated at electrified openings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self- latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Ives (IV). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 8 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). c. Schlage (SC). C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. 2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. 3. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. 4. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 5. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) 6. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2) 7. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2) G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference". H. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 9 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). J. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Multi-Point Locksets, Security: Three-point locking system device engineered for in-swinging door applications on windstorm safe shelter rooms. Extra heavy duty steel component construction securing the door to the frame at top, bottom and center latch positions. All three latching points are automatically activated when the device is locked. 1. Severe Storm Shelter Components: Multi-point locking system devices engineered for in-swinging and out-swinging door applications on tornado or hurricane resistant safe shelter rooms. The multi- point latching integrated device is approved for usage as part of a complete ICC 500 (2008) and FEMA 361 door, frame and hardware assembly. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - FE6800 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - FM7100 Series. B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Extra-Heavy Duty): ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 certified cylindrical (bored) locksets able to withstand 3000 inch pounds of torque applied to the locked lever without gaining access. Locksets to fit a standard 2 1/8” bore without the use of through-bolts. Lever handles to be made of solid material with no plastic fillers and latchbolt head to be one-piece stainless steel construction encased within the lock body. Furnish with standard 2 3/4” backset, 1/2" throw latchbolt (3/4" at rated paired openings), and universal non-handed. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3100 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 11 Line. c. Schlage (SC) – ND Series. C. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified cylindrical (bored) locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Lock chassis fabricated of heavy gauge steel, zinc dichromate plated, with through-bolted application. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 10 Line. c. Schlage (SC) – ND Series. D. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 10 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Folger Adam EDC (FO). b. HES (HS). c. Von Duprin (VO). B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. a. Fire Exit Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions to be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 11 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Flush End Caps: Provide heavy weight impact resistant flush end caps made of architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end caps will not be acceptable. 5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty trim with cold forged escutcheons, beveled edges, and four threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. Provided free-wheeling type trim where indicated. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide an interchangeable core type keyed cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and concealed vertical rod exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. 7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series. 2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. Electrified Conventional Push Rail Devices (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98/99 Series. B. Electrified Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide electrified exit device options including: electric latch retraction, electric dogging, outside door trim control, exit alarm, delayed egress, latchbolt monitoring, lock/unlock status monitoring, touch bar monitoring and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified exit devices standard as fail secure. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 12 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.10 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non- handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 10 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop. b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide heavy duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder assembly designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic conditions. Holder to be manually selectable to on-off position. c. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when opened to maximum degree. d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt or security type fasteners as specified in the door Hardware Sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable back check and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series. 2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 13 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following. a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). c. Laminate Plastic or Acrylic: 1/8-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. 5. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weather-stripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 14 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS). 2.14 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES 2.15 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.16 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 15 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 16 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK – McKinney 2. PE – Pemko 3. RO – Rockwood 4. RU – Corbin Russwin 5. SU – Securitron 6. HS – HES 7. NO – Norton 8. RX – Rixson 9. OT – By Others City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 17 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Hardware Schedule Set: 1.0 Doors: 110, 140, 145, 148 1 Continuous Hinge (alumn/glass door) CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Electric Strike 1006CS 630 HS 1 Closer (surface) 1601 689 NO 1 Threshold 2005AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN x W PE 1 Hardware by others OT Notes: Card reader, door position switch, power supply by security. Door is normally closed, latched and secured. Valid credential for ingress, free egress at all times. Coordinate with security and electrical. Set: 2.0 Doors: 101 1 Continuous Hinge (alumn/glass door) CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Mortise Lock (classroom) ML2055 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) 1601 689 NO 1 Threshold 2005AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN x W PE Set: 3.0 Doors: 111 1 Continuous Hinge (alumn/glass door) CFM83SLF-HD1 PE 1 Mortise Lock (entrance) ML2051 NSA 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) 1601 689 NO 1 Threshold 2006AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN x W PE City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 18 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Set: 4.0 Doors: 126 1 Continuous Hinge (hm door) CFM83SLI-HD1 PE 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AV PE 1 Rain Guard 346C PE 1 Weatherstrip 332CS W x H PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN x W PE Set: 5.0 Doors: 120 6 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 2 Manual Flush Bolts 555/557 to suit door type US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 2 Overhead Holder and Stop (surface) 10-336 689 RX 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 6.0 Doors: 106, 141 1 Continuous Hinge (hm door) CFM83SLI-HD1 PE 1 Exit Device (rim, passage) ED5200A N910 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/odor) S88D x perimeter length PE Set: 7.0 Doors: 107 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3357 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Electric Strike 1006CS 630 HS 1 Closer (surface) DC8200 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 19 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO 1 Hardware by others OT Note: Card reader, door position switch, power supply by security. Door is normally closed, latched and secured. Valid credential for ingress, free egress at all times. Coordinate with security and electrical. Door may need separate hardware set. Set: 8.0 Doors: 147 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (storeroom) CL3357 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x 2” LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer – Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 9.0 Doors: 116, 125 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/light) S88D x perimeter length PE Set: 10.0 Doors: 128, 129, 132, 133, 136, 137 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8210 A11 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/light) S88D x perimeter length PE Set: 11.0 Doors: 103 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 20 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1 Electric Strike 1006CS 630 HS 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO 1 Hardware by others OT Notes: Card reader, door position switch, intercom, power supply by security. Door is normally closed, latched, and secured. Valid credential for ingress, free egress at all times. Coordinate with security and electrical. Set: 12.0 Doors: 112, 113, 114 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Mortise Lock (storeroom) ML2057 NSA C6 626 RU 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 13.0 Doors: 115 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (office) CL3351 NZD C6 626 RU 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 14.0 Doors: 109, 124 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 15.0 Doors: 119 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 21 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1 Cylindrical Lock (passage) CL3310 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Armor Plate K1050 36" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 16.0 Doors: 102, 117, 121, 122, 123 3 BB Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (privacy) CL3320 NZD 626 RU 1 Closer (surface) DC8200 689 RU 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/odor) S88D x perimeter length PE Set: 17.0 Doors: 105, 118, 139, 146 1 Continuous Hinge (hm or wood door) CFM83SLI-HD1 PE 1 Pull Plate - 4" x 16" BF107 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate 70E US32D RO 1 Closer (surface) DC8200/10 arm to suit application 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 406/409 to suit US32D RO 3 Silencer - Metal Frame 608 RO Set: 18.0 Doors: 108 1 Continuous Hinge (hm door) CFM83SLI-HD1 PE 3 Deadbolt (one side thumb turn, other side blank) DL3060 626 RU 1 Closer (surface, hold arm) DC8200 x A2 689 RU 1 Kick Plate K1050 10” x 2” LDW 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing (smoke/sound/light/odor) S88D x perimeter length PE Set: 19.0 Doors: 142, 143, 144, 152, 153 1 OH Door Hardware by door manufacturer OT City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 DOOR HARDWARE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 087100 - 22 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 Set: 20.0 Doors: 149, 150, 151 1 Four-Fold Door Hardware by door manufacturer OT Set: 21.0 Exterior Ornamental Man Gate 1 Magnetic Lock M62FG-SASM SU 2 Card Reader Provided by Security OT 1 Annunciator PZ1 RU 1 Electromechanical Bar WEMB-BK SU 1 Timer XDT SU 1 Power Supply BPS-24-1 SU 1 Bracket FMK as required SU 1 Hardware by others OT Notes: Gate normally closed and latched; ingress and egress by valid credential. Egress without valid credential activates delayed egress, setting in motion an irreversible 15 second delay. Magnetic lock interfaced with building alarm system. Egress by valid credential bypasses delayed egress. Card reader, door position switch, wire and wiring by electrical and security, coordinate. Balance of hardware by gate manufacturer. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. 4. Interior borrowed lites. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than [eight] [Insert number] Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Product data for glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 3. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. G. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating- glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. PPG. 2. Oldcastle. 3. Viracon. B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article[ and in "Laminated Glass" Article] as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article[ and in "Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article]. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Safti First; SuperLite . I-XL IGU b. Comparable procuts by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain and Nippon Electric Glass. C. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 890. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800. c. Pecora Corporation; 864. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. D. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire- protection ratings indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non- staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Clear float glass fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 3. Provide one way vision film on window between Lobby and Watch (window type P), using Llumar RN076G SR PS or approved equal. 2.11 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A. Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. a. 5/8 inch at interior and exterior hollow metal frames. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass (heat-strengthened where recommended by manufacturer or fully tempered where required by code). 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Float glass (heat-strengthened where recommended by manufacturer or fully tempered where required by code). 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 54 percent minimum. 8. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. 12. Provide safety glazing labeling. 13. Acceptable product: Guardian SuperNeutral 54(#2). 2.12 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES A. Glass Type [__]: 60-minute fire-rated glazing; monolithic ceramic glazing units. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GLAZING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088000 - 7 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2. glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion] [manufacture. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 2. Binswanger Glass. 3. Guardian Industries Corp. 4. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality, . 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Franklin International. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Liquid Nails Adhesive. d. Palmer Products Corporation. e. Royal Adhesives & Sealants, LLC. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Provide continuous mirror top and bottom channels. B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: . 1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas MIRRORS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 088300 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 2. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, louvers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical). D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 2. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 50%. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm. 6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: . B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inchwire. 2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS A. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver. 1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. 2. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. 3. Attach blank-off panels with clips or sheet metal screws. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.6 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated. 2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners. G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full available range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED LOUVERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 089119 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.\ B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent. B. Provide products that meet definition of regional materials for not less than 75% of material provided by weight. C. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. D. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.359 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings or below. 1) Where wall mounted equipment, woodwork, and casework items are indicated or elsewhere as shown on Drawings, provide minimum 18 gage studs Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2) At jambs of openings provide two minimum 20 gage studs. 3) Refer to Division 5 for stud framing which is exposed to wind loads and for studs carrying heavy vertical loads (cement plaster, stone tile thicker than 3/4 inch, etc) b. Where partition heights exceed stud manufacturer’s recommended spans, provide one of the following: 1) Heavier stud gage. 2) Closer stud spacing. 3) Deeper stud size (space permitting); As approved by Architect. 4) Above ceiling bracing, anchored to structure above. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. I. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical. J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical. G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. B. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Partitions with Security Mesh: 8 inches (203 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with span and deflection design criteria. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 5. Curved Partitions: a. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092216 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 3. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured[ and regionally extracted and manufactured] materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to Project for each regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent. B. Regional Materials: Provide products that meet the definition of regional materials for 90% by weight. C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. Temple-Inland. 6. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. American Gypsum; Firebloc Type C. b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type C. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fireguard C. d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C. e. Temple-Inland; Type TG-C. f. USG Corporation; Firecode C Core. 2. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus. b. Temple-Inland; GreenGlass Interior Glass-Mat Board. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990 CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 4. Acceptable Products: (all by Fry Reglet): a. Z Reveal Molding: Model DRMZ-625-50 b. F Reveal Molding: Model DRMF-625-50 and VPRF-50-50. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Cement Board: Behind wall tile. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated . Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas GYPSUM BOARD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 092900 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Wall: Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet, or 900 sq ft. 1. Ceiling with Perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft or 2500 sq. ft 2. Ceiling, without perimeter relief: Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft 3. Exterior: Control joints in exterior ceilings and soffits shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft. at acoustical or fire-rated walls: Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire rated system, blocking shall be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 5/8 in. type X gypsum panel products, mineral fiber, or other tested equivalent. D. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use where indicated. E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 3: Beneath wall coverings. 4. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 093013 -CERAMIC TILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Ceramic mosaic tile. 2.Porcelain tile. 3.Glazed wall tile. 4.Stone thresholds. 5.Waterproof membrane. 6.Crack isolation membrane. 7.Metal edge strips. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B.ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C.Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D.Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Sustainability Submittals: 1.Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and waterproofing, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2.Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For grout sealers, documentation indicating that products comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. C.Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. D.Samples for Verification: 1.Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2.Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3.Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4.Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5.Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For Installer. B.Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C.Product Certificates: For each type of product. D.Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2.Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: 1.Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2.Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3.Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers. B.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2.Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B.Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C.Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D.Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1.Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B.Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1.Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2.Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C.Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1.Stone thresholds. 2.Waterproof membrane. 3.Crack isolation membrane. 4.Cementitious backer units. 5.Metal edge strips. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1.Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B.ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C.Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D.Mounting:For factory-mounted tile, provide back-or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1.Where tile is indicated for installation on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back-or edge- mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A.Tile: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A.General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1.Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B.Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish. 1.Description: Uniform, fine-to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2.Description: Match Architect's sample. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A.General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B.Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, : a.Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b.Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. c.MAPEI Corporation; . 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A.General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B.Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS. 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A.Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Custom Building Products. b.Laticrete International, Inc. c.MAPEI Corporation. 2.Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3.Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene- rubberliquid-latex additive at Project site. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -4 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 4.For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. B.Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (for larger tiles): Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Laticrete International, Inc. b.MAPEI Corporation. 2.Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3.Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene- rubberliquid-latex additive at Project site. C.Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1.Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 2.Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field- mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A.Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B.Standard Cement Grout (typical): ANSI A118.6. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a.Custom Building Products. b.Laticrete International, Inc. c.MAPEI Corporation. (Basis of Design: Opticolor Stainfree Grout) C.Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout (at Decon Room): ANSI A118.3. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Bostik, Inc. b.Custom Building Products. c.Laticrete International, Inc. d.MAPEI Corporation (Basis of Design: Kerapoxy IEG 100% Solids Epoxy Grout) 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B.Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless- steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a.Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. b.Schluter Systems L.P. (Renu U at tile to concrete slab). C.Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2.Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a.Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -5 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b.Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3.Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4.Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B.Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C.Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A.Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1.For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a.Tile floors in wet areas. b.Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. B.Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C.Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D.Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E.Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F.Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1.For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2.Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3.Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G.Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1.Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2.Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 3.Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch. H.Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I.Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1.Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J.Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1.At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thinset). 2.Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -6 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 K.Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. L.Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A.Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B.Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A.Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B.Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B.Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1.Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2.Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.7 PROTECTION A.Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B.Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C.Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.8 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A.Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1.Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F113; thinset mortar. a.Thinset Mortar: portland cement mortar. b.Grout: Standard sanded cement grout. 2.Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F122; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane. a.Thinset Mortar: portland cement mortar. b.Grout: Standard sanded cement grout. 3.Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F125A; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a.Thinset Mortar: portland cement mortar. b.Grout: Standard sanded cement grout. 4.Tile Installation F121: Cement mortar bed (thickset) on waterproof membrane; TCA F121 and ANSI A108.1A. a.Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex-portland cement mortar. b.Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. B.Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1.Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a.Thinset Mortar: portland cement mortar. b.Grout: Standard unsanded cement . C.Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1.Tile Installation B420: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; TCA B420. a.Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas CERAMIC TILING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 093013 -7 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 b.Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grount. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 5. Perimeter moldings. B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 4. Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design). 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. A. Basis of Design: Refer to Finish Legend. B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish. 2. Pattern: Refer to Finish Legend. C. Thickness: 3/4 inch . Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 D. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. E. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design: Prelude XL-HRC) 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 02/11-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. B. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. b. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant. 3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095113 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WOOD PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095429 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 095429 - WOOD PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood ceiling grills. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, wall angle moldings and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 42 00 (06420) Wood Paneling 2. Section 09 51 00 (09510) - Acoustical Ceilings 3. Section 09 20 00 (09250) - Plaster and Gypsum Board 4. Divisions 23 (15) - HVAC 5. Division 26 (16) Sections - Electrical Work 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 8. ASTM E 580 Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 9. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. 10. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems. 11. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions as referenced in Part 3, Installation. C. Samples: Minimum 3 inch x 5/8 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees. D. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings. E. Certifications: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. F. All products not conforming to manufacturer’s current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide ceiling panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class C products. a. Flame Spread: 200 or less Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WOOD PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095429 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less 2. HPVA (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association) certification and audit program per ASTM E- 84 tunnel test. C. Woodworking Standards: Manufacturer must comply with specified provisions of Architectural Woodworking Institute quality standards. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store ceiling components in a dry interior location in their cartons prior to installation to avoid damage. Store cartons in a flat, horizontal position. The protectors between the panels should not be removed until installation. B. Do not store in unconditioned spaces with humidity greater than 55 percent or lower than 25 percent relative humidity and temperatures lower than 50 degrees F or greater than 86 degrees F. Panels must not be exposed to extreme temperatures, for example, close to a heating source or near a window with direct sunlight. C. Handle ceiling units carefully to avoid chipped edges or damage to units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Wood ceiling materials should be permitted to reach room temperature and have a stabilized moisture content for a minimum of 72 hours before installation. (Remove plastic wrap to allow panels to climatize). B. The wood panels should not be installed in spaces where the temperature or humidity conditions vary greatly from the temperatures and conditions that will be normal in the occupied space. C. As interior finish products, the wood veneer panels are designed for installation in temperature conditions between 50 degrees F and 86 degrees F, in spaces where the building is enclosed and HVAC systems are functioning and will be in continuous operation. Relative humidity should not fall below 25 percent or exceed 55 percent. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Wood Grille Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Ceiling Panels: Defects in materials or factory workmanship. 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturing defects. B. Warranty Period: 1. Wood panels: One (1) year from date of installation. 2. Grid: Ten years from date of installation. C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 1.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2. WOOD CEILING UNITS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth 2. Composition: Wood 3. Finish: Clear coating Grille Walnut 4. Species: Blades and Backers-Poplar; Dowel-Birch 5. Size: 6 blade, 1 foot X 8 foot X 2 1/4 inch, with acoustic infill panel. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WOOD PANEL CEILINGS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 095429 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423, (0.75with bioacoustic infill panel, item #5823) 7. Flame Spread: Class C (HPVA) 8. Dimensional Stability: Standard. 9. Acceptable Product: WoodWorks Grille, Item #5665DOGWN, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. B. Accessories: 1. Ledger; 1 inch X 96 inch X1/4 inch, Item #5671 2. Junction 2 1/4 inch: 2 1/4 inch X 96 inch X 2 3/4 inch, Item #5673GWN 3. End Cap 2 1/4 inch; 3/4 inch X 96 inch X 2 3/4 inch, Item #5675 4. WoodWorks Infill Panel (Bioacoustic infill) #5823 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double- web steel construction with 15/16 inch type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (exception: extruded aluminum or stainless steel). 1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Intermediate Duty. 2. Color: Black. 3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Hangers: No Hanger Wire allowed. Provide 3/32” Aircraft Cable. D. Accessories/Edge Moldings and Trim: 1. Backer Clip; 3/8 inch X 11/16 inch X 7/8 inch 2. Dowel Clip; 3/8 inch X 7/8 inch X 7/8 inch PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out. B. Proper designs for both supply air and return air, maintenance of the HVAC filters and building interior space are essential to minimize soiling. Before starting the HVAC system, make sure supply air is properly filtered and the building interior is free of construction dust. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system and panels in compliance with ASTM C636, ASTM E580, with the authorities having jurisdiction, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, WoodWorks Grille Installation Instructions LA-297530. B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4 feet on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. The suspension system must be leveled to within ¼ inch in 10 feet and must be square to within 1/16 inch in 2 feet. C. Install main beams 48 inches on center with 48 inch cross tees every 24 inches at 90 degrees to the main beam. Install the 24 inch cross tees at midpoints of the 48 inch cross tees. D. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. E. Cut panel edges that are exposed to view will have to be treated to look like factory edges. Pre- finished peel and stick edge banding is recommended for this purpose. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPORT FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096240 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 096240 - SPORT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: This work comprises furnishing and complete installation of multipurpose sport flooring to include laying, gluing, and welding. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of the materials to be furnished for approval and color selections by the Architect. B. Provide maintenance instruction literature in addition to warranty documentation specified herein. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives[ and chemical-bonding compounds], documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 4. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The sport flooring installer supply a letter of certification from the flooring materials manufacturer stating that it is a current approved installer. B. A conference meeting with Construction Manager, Flooring Installer, Flooring Materials Representative and the Architect shall be conducted prior to execution of this work. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Floor materials shall not be delivered to the job site until the work of other trades in area to receive flooring has been completed. B. Flooring material shall be stored in up-right position. Never store materials in a horizontal position. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: The building shall be dry and enclosed. Permanent heat, light and ventilation shall be installed and operable. Flooring installation shall not begin until the installer is familiar with existing subfloor conditions. All work which would cause damage, dirt, dust or interruption of normal installation shall be completed. At least one week prior and during installation the room temperature must be maintained at a minimum of 65 degrees F. The installation area shall be closed to all traffic and activity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sport Floor: Shall be Sport Impact 10mm (3/8") thick prefabricated rubber sport flooring with smooth textured pattern as manufactured by Mondo America, Inc. (817/421-7861) or approved equal. 1. Color: Shall be #008 “Black" 2. Finish: Shall be "Sealskin" 3. Roll goods width: 6'-0" B. Underlayment: Shall be Mondo "Everlay" moisture barrier/underlayment. C. Reducer: Roppe #26 D. Track and cap Transition: Roppe #154 E. Leveling Compound: Quality grade leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer. F. Adhesive: Shall be a two part polyurethane adhesive suitable for adherence of a sheet good to concrete substrate. Adhesive to be supplied or approved/recommended by the sport flooring manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous: Provide incidental items required for complete installation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SPORT FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096240 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive sport flooring for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Ensure that substrates are dry and exhibit neutral alkalinity. Moisture vapor emission tests (calcium chloride tests in accordance with ADTM F1869-98) are mandatory on various areas of the sub-floor prior to the beginning of installation of sport flooring. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be completely dry before flooring is laid. 1. Sweep the surfaces clean and free of dirt and remove oil, grease, paint, dried mortar and curing compound residue. 2. Fill cracks, grooves, voids and/or construction joints with leveling compound as approved by flooring manufacturer. High spots on the floor shall be removed by grinding down. 3. Clean floor and apply and float feathering compound to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until the feathering compound has cured. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the sport flooring shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer written instructions. 1. Seam joints (heat welding method) as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean sport flooring and replace defective or loose material. Remove any soiling foreign matter. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.3: For resilient stair accessories, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating compliance with the FloorScore standard. 4. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 5. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. F. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feetfor every 500 linear feetor fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg For more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.2 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inch. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation, USA. 2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. B. Description: Rubber carpet edge for glue-down applications nosing for resilient flooring reducer strip for resilient flooring joiner for tile and carpet transition strips. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. D. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated. E. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096513 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three coat(s). E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096516 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet floor covering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. D. Product Schedule: For floor coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. G. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product data for for flooring compliant with FloorScore standard. 3. Product data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content 4. Product certificates for products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color and pattern in locations directed by Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096516 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 3% [insert value] in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET FLOOR COVERING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceres Wels PVC Free Sheet Flooring, in VS914 Slate color. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Color: Match floor covering. D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: As indicated in Master Schedule. 1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Cap Strip: Square metal, vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by manufacturer. 3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by manufacturer. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096516 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. J. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings up vertical surfaces a dimension as indicated. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, carpet tile. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3: a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. b. For installation adhesive, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 3. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Basis of Design Product: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 4. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 5. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 6. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 7. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas TILE CARPETING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 096813 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element with HEPA filter. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 098116 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 098116 - ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Owens Corning. 2. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. b. Owens Corning. c. Thermafiber. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. B. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated x full thickness of stud; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation (in walls): ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. D. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation (above ceilings): ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties: 1. Nominal density of 1.0 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 098116 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Complete interior and exterior surface preparation and finishing for field application of latex based coatings, and requirements for field finishing mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of the specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this Section. 3. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by the Architect. Number of colors to be used on job will be determined by Architect. 1.2 SURFACES NOT TO RECEIVE FIELD FINISHING A. Do not paint copper, bronze, chrome plated items, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, face brick, prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings, items with factory applied final finish (except where exposed on roofs and in finished spaces), elevator shafts, crawl spaces, chases, and plenums above suspended ceilings unless otherwise specified or scheduled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience. C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating requirements for finishes. B. Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings. 1.6 TESTS A. Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish coatings are being applied. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 013300. B. Provide product data describing physical performance criteria and composition on all finishing products. C. Submit color selection samples under provisions of Section 013300. D. Submit 2 samples, 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures selected for each surface finishing product scheduled. E. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 013300. F. Submit certification from manufacturer of coatings listing all products proposed for each. Certify that each product meets current applicable regulations and ordinances regarding maximum VOC content. G. Sustainable Submittals: 1. For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages, by weight, of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Identify each regional material along with the location of its harvest, extraction, or manufacture. Include material cost for each item. 3. For paints and coatings, provide printed statement of VOC content confirming compliance with maximum allowable content per Section 013520. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 014500. B. Provide field sample panel, 96 inches long by 96 inches wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish intended for use. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 016000. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a 5 gallon container of each color to Owner. B. Label each container with color, color number, texture, and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. C. Furnish under provisions of Section 017800. 1.12 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and paint work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.13 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. B. Precaution shall be taken to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work. C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams. B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first quality products of a reputable manufacturer. C. Products specified in Schedule are those of Glidden Professional as a standard of quality unless otherwise noted. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Color: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Drywall (Gypsum): 1. Acrylic Latex: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat High Build Latex Primer B28W8601, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC. B. Wood Base and Trim (opaque): 1. Acrylic Latex: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Premium Wall & Wood Primer B28W8111, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC. C. Wood Base and Trim (transparent): 1. Water-Based Varnish: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Wood Classics Oil Stain A49-200 Series, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish A68 Series. D. CMU, Concrete Block: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Cement-Plex B42W200/B42V201 primer, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 Series. E. Galvanized Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water Based Acrylic a. Sherwin-Williams: Semi-Gloss 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss B66-650 Series. F. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal: 1. High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic: a. 2 topcoats Sherwin-Williams Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel B66-660 Series. G. Handrails, Stairs, and Guardrails: 1. High Performance Coating, Urethane: a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67A5, 2 coats Sherwin-Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane, B65W351 Series. H. Decking (Preprimed/Prefinished), Bar Joists (Shop Primed): 1. Water-Based Acrylic Dry Fall: a. Sherwin-Williams: 2 coats Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall Flat B42W81 over Prepared substrate. 2.5 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Structural Iron and Ferrous Steel: 1. Urethane High Performance Coating, : a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Waterbased Tile Clad Epoxy Primer B73A200, 2 coats Sherwin- Williams Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane B65-650 topcoat. B. Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces: 1. High Performance Coating, Urethane: (rust inhibitive, UV stable) a. Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67A5, 2 coats Acrolon 218 HS Polyurethane B65W611. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. D. Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatings which exhibit loose surface defects. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid- alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. M. Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. N. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. O. Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AWI standards and guide lines. P. Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt. Q. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES A. General: 1. Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking. 2. Remove chalk deposits and loose, blistered, peeling, scaling, or crazed finish to bare base material or sound substrate by scraping and sanding. 3. Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax, oil, grease, and other foreign material; rinse, and allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating. 4. Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser. 5. Remove mildew as specified above. 6. Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new coatings lift or blister existing coatings, request recommendation from Architect. 7. Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings. B. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Fill cracks and voids with spackling compound. 2. Apply primer over bare surfaces and newly applied texture coatings. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 5 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 C. Metal: 1. Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2. Exercise care not to remove galvanizing. 3. Complete preparation as specified for new work. D. Wood: 1. Fill cracks, crevices and nail holes with putty or wood filler. 2. Apply primer over bare surfaces and filler material. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.5 APPLICATION A. The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced and wherever finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation, workmanship, etc., the defects shall be removed and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. D. Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness. E. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Wet sand (or use vacuum sander) lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint. J. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. K. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. 3.6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint all shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces. In mechanical rooms, repair shop pre-finished coatings which have been scratched or otherwise damaged with identical touch-up paint. Sand prior to touching up as required. B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Paint all grilles, registers, diffusers, and speaker grilles to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, except that factory pre-finished items need not be painted if installed in a suspended acoustical ceiling system where the acoustical panels match the mechanical or electrical item color. D. In all finished spaces, prime and paint exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. Paint to match adjacent surfaces. E. Repair or replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector to match face panels. G. Paint all surfaces of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Paint exposed air handlers, roof ventilators, goose necks, exhaust fans and other items on the roof with 2 coats exterior enamel. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the base metal or primer as specified herein. J. Paint concrete support bases with gray floor deck enamel. K. Pipe hangers and other supports need not be painted except where installed in crawl spaces, where they shall be painted with a thick coat of asphaltic paint. L. Electrostatically paint air purification units in apparatus bays. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas PAINTING Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099100 - 6 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.7 CLEANING/TOUCH-UP A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing (as determined by the Architect). Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or to a visible stopping point. 3.8 V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE A. Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize products which have been specially formulated to need such requirements. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 099450 - DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of elastomeric decorative exterior finish system (DEFS) to the following: 1. Exterior soffits. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Mutual Class I Rating. B. ASTM E 84 Flame spread classification 0 to 10. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Minimum of 5 years experience and manufacturer’s written approval on manufacturer’s company letterhead. B. Manufacturer: 1. Minimum of 5 years experience producing component materials for system installed in this country. 2. Member of Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA). C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain approved DEFS materials from a single manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate project specific details identifying transitions to dissimilar materials and other representations to evaluate the proposed system installation requirements. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use in accordance with Section 01300. C. Samples: Submit three 1’-0” by 1’-0” samples of selected finish color and texture for approval by Architect. D. Maintenance Kit: Supply maintenance kit, with unopened containers to repair a minimum of 20 square foot area. E. Test reports certifying entire system has passed ASTM E 84 and ASTM E 108, modified for vertical walls for Class A. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Provide under provisions of Section 014000. B. Construct one field sample panel, of size required to illustrate color and texture of the final coating. 1. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of mock-up’s visual qualities before start of final work. 1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s identification, in accordance with Section 016000. B. Store products in a cool (not less than 40 degrees F) dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage, in accordance with Section 016000. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather and Environmental Conditions 1. Application of the system shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed. 2. Installation of wet materials in temperatures less than 40 degrees F shall take place only if supplementary heat is provided and is maintained for a minimum of 24 hours after application of the wet materials. B. Protection 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during application of wall system. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year labor and material warranty. B. Installer: Provide 2 year warranty on workmanship related to DEFS application. C. Warranty to cover: 1. Material defects including but not limited to, peeling, cracking, delamination, flaking, finish degradation or similar failures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc., West Warwick, RI. 2. Finestone, Adrian, MI. 3. Parex Inc., Redan, GA 4. Pleko Products, Astoria, NY 5. Senergy Methods, Cranston, RI. 6. STO Industries, Atlanta, GA. 7. TEIFS Wall Systems, San Antonio, TX B. Acceptable Products: 1. Weatherlastic by Dryvit or as otherwise required to match other EIFS finish coat over cement plaster. C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Finish Coat: Factory mixed, 100 percent acrylic with elastomeric binder with texture. Integral color and texture to match existing hospital EIFS. B. Base Coat: Fiber reinforced 100 percent acrylic-based providing a high-build leveling coat. 1. Acceptable Product: Dryvit Genesis. C. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, open weave, standard weight, glass fiber reinforcing mesh; twisted multi-end strands treated for compatibility with Direct Finish System components. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, as approved by DEFS system manufacturer. E. Primers: As required by the DEFS manufacturer. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Reglets: Refer to Section 092900. 2.3 MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Perform according to manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Finish Coat: Thoroughly mix factory-prepared finish material with the manufacturer’s recommended mixer until a uniform workable consistency is attained. 1. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. 2. Use no additives such as rapid binders, antifreeze, or accelerators. 3. Finish Coating: Use immediately after mixing. Keep containers closed when not in use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of materials. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, report them in writing to the Architect and do not commence any installation until such conditions have been corrected. B. Examine surfaces to receive the system for: 1. Substrates contrary to recommendations of the system manufacturer. 2. Defects such as coatings on the substrate that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. 3. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances for installation of substrate material. The substrate shall have no plan or irregularities greater than 1/8 inch over 10 foot dimension. 4. Confirm manufacturer’s current requirements for control joint placement. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 099450 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer’s printed instructions. B. Base Coat: Apply at rate and in manner recommended by system manufacturer. Follow with reinforcing mesh. C. Finish: 1. Using clean stainless steel trowel, apply light coat of finish material directly to the skim coat. a. Apply and level during the same operation to the minimum attainable thickness consistent with uniform coverage. b. Apply and texture finish continually over an entire surface. c. Work to corners or joints, and do not allow the material to set up within a distinct wall area. d. Furnish sufficient staging and workmen to accomplish a uniform appearance. 2. Achieve final texture after veneer finish has jelled so that it does not stick to the trowel. 3. Final Texture: As selected by Architect. 4. Final Thickness: Not greater than diameter of largest aggregate of finish material. 3.3 TOUCH-UP A. After installation, touch-up areas where finish coat has been damaged with manufacturer’s recommended primer compatible with finish coat. B. Touch-up so that repair is not obvious. 3.4 COMPLETION A. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and other defects and damage. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove extra materials and debris from job site. B. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the Work. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Provisions established in Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes 1. Identifying devices where shown on the Drawings complete and as specified including the following: a. Parking signs indicating accessible spaces. b. Pin mounted building identification signs. c. Interior code required signs. d. Cast bronze dedication plaque. 2. Coordination for installation of signage provided by others. 3. Refer to Section 012100 for allowance for LEED parking signage. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, accessories, layout, and installation details. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Physical: Submit samples of one competed sign for review and approval. Approved sample may be incorporated into Project. 2. Color: Submit manufacturer's standard color selection chart. Do not proceed until colors have been selected. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience in the manufacturing of signs specified. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Panel signs shall have 1/32-inch raised copy and grade 2 Braille, and shall comply with all existing federal, state, and local accessibility standards. 2. Code and Standards: Comply with American with Disabilities Act of 1990, Title 3 Provisions, Public Accommodations and Commercial Facilities. Updated March 15, 2012. 3. Comply with the State of Texas Accessibility Standards, 2012 edition, as administered by the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following: 1. Best Manufacturing Company, Montrose, Colorado. 2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, New York. 3. Nelson-Harkins, Chicago, Illinois. 4. ASI Signs, Dallas, Texas. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500. 2.2 HANDICAPPED PARKING A. Screen Printed Signs: 1. 18 gauge bonderized steel with blue baked enamel finish and white screen printed copy. 2. Copy and Size: a. "Handicapped Parking Only" - 12 inches by 18 inches. b. "Van Accessible" - 12 inches by 6 inches. 3. Acceptable Product: Best Traffic Signs No. SS04 with SS52 as required. B. Post: Galvanized pipe column minimum 9 feet long. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE A. Aluminum Sign: Shall be aluminum reverse channel numeral as manufactured by Butner Brothers (405- 321-2322). B. Color shall be selected from full range of manufacturer’s selection. Refer to plans for details and electrical requirements. C. .125” thick Aluminum Face and 0.63” Thick Aluminum Return D. Spot weld with NO visible welds E. Provide 3/16” Clear Polycarbonate “Bird Guard” F. Powdercoat Finish. G. “Calisto” font. H. LED Lighting shall be “thin LED” LED lighting as manufactured by Sloan LED (888-747-4533). 2.4 ROOM SIGNAGE SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI Sign Systems, 3890 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 102, Dallas, TX 75220; (214) 352 9140 telephone; (214) 352 9741 facsimile; (800) ASI-SPEC (274-7446). 2. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 016000. B. Plastic Signs: Shall be nominal 11.375” x 8.375” plastic sign with raised text and Grade 2 Braille as distributed by Just Bathroom Signs Model SE-2031 or approved equal. C. Plaque color to be S34 Slate with white letters and trim. Letter style to be selected by Architect from full range of available fonts. D. Names: Name signs shall be installed on the outside face of doors. Furnish a name sign for each of the following doors. E. Sign Legend Door Number F. Restroom 102 2.5 BUILDING PLAQUE A. Plaque shall be as manufactured by The Southwell Company, P.O. Box 299, San Antonio, Texas 78291 or approved equal. Tablet shall be cast of virgin ingots (85-5-5-5 Standard U. S. bronze alloy). Casting shall be free of pits and gas holes and all letters shall be sharp and hand tooled. Border and faces of raised letters shall be satin/brushed finish and background shall be leatherette finish. Plaque shall be chemically cleaned and etched and treated with Alodine and sprayed with two coats of Clear Acrylic Lacquer. B. Size: To be determined. C. Border Design: Raised, satin/brushed finish. D. Letter style: "Helvatica" satin/brushed finish. E. Background: Leatherette finish, Oxidized-Dark Bronze. F. Text: Include Project Name, Year Contract Awarded, Names of City Council at time of award of General Contract, and Names of Architect and General Contractor, etc. G. Refer to Section 012100 for allowance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store identifying devices in protective wrappings until ready for installation. Install letters in protective wrappings and remove wrappings just prior to substantial completion. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101400 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install signs plumb, level and square and in proper planes with other work, at heights required by accessibility codes and standards. B. Anchor each plastic laminate sign with adhesive. C. Install signs with sufficient amount of foam tape for proper installation. D. Attach as recommended by sign manufacturer. E. Anchor each sign with adhesive. F. Coordinate arrival and installation of graphic signs with hardware installation. Graphic signs function as and are coordinated with the hardware as shown on the Drawings. G. Room name signs shall be placed on the public side of the door except where noted otherwise. H. Single Door Sign: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to wall adjacent to door on knob side. I. Pair of Doors: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to adjacent wall closest to active leaf of door. Do not install sign where it will be obstructed by door when door is in the ‘open’ position. J. Attachment: Mounting to surfaces shall be done by pressure sensitive frame double-faced tape. Signs shall be delivered to the project site with the tape in place and trimmed on each sign, but with the protective paper layer not removed. Paper layer shall be removed just prior to installation of signs. 3.3 EXTERIOR INSTALLATION - PARKING AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNS A. Mount posts in 12 inch round by 2'-6" deep concrete footing. B. Handicapped Signs: Mount signs at height to comply with accessibility codes. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of the identifying devices with the hardware manufacturer for lockset and knob leave outs as detailed and scheduled. 3.5 DAMAGE A. Any identifying device which is scratched or defaced will be rejected. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove protective materials and clean all signs. Clean surfaces with plain water or water with soap or household detergent. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 101453 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 101453 - TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Extent of traffic signage is indicated on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For installation use only personnel who are skilled in the work required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section “Submittals”. 1.04 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Submit two copies of manufacturer’s recommended installation method showing all requirements for installation. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protect traffic signage before, during and after installation. B. Protect installed work of other trades. 1.06 REPLACEMENTS A. In event of damage, make necessary replacements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND DESIGN A. Provide traffic signage as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the local requirements of the local jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may commence. B. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s instructions. 3.02 DISCREPANCIES A. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated, anchoring all components firmly in place in complete accordance with approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Traffic signage shall be located in accordance with the latest requirements of the State of Texas, including ADA signage, and in accordance with codes and requirements of the local jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 101453 (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102600 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 3. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 4. C. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store covers in a horizontal position. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102600 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, no. 4 brushed finish. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Flush-Mounted, Stainless Steel Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting of snap-on, stainless steelcover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition; full wall height. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. InPro Corporation (IPC). c. Nystrom, Inc. d. Pawling Corporation. B. Provide corner and end wall guards in configurations indicated x full height. C. Acceptable Product: Inpro models SS-CGFM and SS-EWFM. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102600 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches. c. Adjust caps as required to ensure tight seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. C. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. E. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.2 BATHROOM AND RESTROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Accessory Schedule: 1. Toilet Tissue Holder: Surface mounted roll type of 18 gauge plated steel with satin chrome finish, Bobrick No. 265 or approved equal. Provide one at Restroom 102 and each Bathroom. 2. Grab Bars: 1-1/2" dia. x 18 gage stainless steel grab bars, Bobrick No. B-6806 x 48 and B-6806 x 36, or approved equals for exposed mounting. The bars shall be supported by flanges at both ends. Center line of each grab bar shall be 2-1/4" from the face of the wall. Mounting screws shall be stainless steel with interrupted slot head. Furnish one set of bars 48" and 36" at each ADA accessible toilet. 3. Soap Dispenser: DermaPro 9033-12 hand wash soap dispenser with a push-bar dispensing system as manufactured by Gojo Industries. Provide one (1) at Decon. 147. 4. Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick No. B-262 surface mounted, 22 gauge stainless steel, C-fold paper towel dispenser. Provide one at Laundry/EMS 107, Bathrooms 118, 122, 123 & 124 and Decon. 147. 5. Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick No. B-36903 TrimLine series recessed paper towel/waste receptacle, 22 gauge stainless steel, C-fold paper towel dispenser. Provide one at Restroom 102. 6. Mop and Broom Holder: Stainless steel unit 24" long with 3 vinyl coated mop holders having spring loaded rubber cams, Bobrick B-223 or approved equal. One in W.H. 120 and one in Decon. 147. 7. Shower Curtain Rod: Bobrick No. B-207 heavy duty curtain rod or approved equal. 1" O.D. x 20 gauge stainless steel tubing with 1/8" thick, one piece die-formed stainless steel flanges. Provide one at each shower stall. 8. Handicap Shower Bench: Bobrick No. B-5181 reversible folding shower bench complying with barrier free accessibility guidelines. Water resistant solid phenolic bench; type 304 stainless steel frame and mounting bracket; self-locking mechanism. Provide one at each handicap shower and at locations indicated on the drawings. 9. Surface Mounted Hooks: Bobrick No. B-6827, type 304, 22 gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Provide at locations as indicated on drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 102800 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104413 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inches square. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated in non-rated walls; 1or 2 hour fire rated in rated walls to match rating of wall. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C. Corridors 126 and 141 : Furnish semi-recessed cabinet equal to Larsen AL 2409-5R Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. 1. Size: 9 ½” x 24" x 5" deep 2. Material: Aluminum 3. Trim: 1 1/2" square trim, semi-recessed 4. Door: Full DSA glass panel Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104413 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Kitchen: Furnish semi-recessed cabinet equal to Larsen AL 2712-RL Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. a. Size: 12" x 27" x 8" deep b. Material: Aluminum c. Trim: 1 1/2" square trim, semi-recessed d. Door: Full DSA glass panel 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. 4. Fire-Rated Cabinets: a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104413 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104416 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each and indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 104416 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. C. Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container (for use in kitchen): UL-rated 10-B:C, 2.5-lb nominal capacity, with potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsens Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 105510 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 105510 - TURN-OUT GEAR LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: This work comprises furnishing and installing turn-out gear lockers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect for review before fabricating the lockers. 1. Provide plan indicating locker layout and sequential colors. B. In addition to the requirements outlined under Paragraph 3.12 of the General Conditions and under Section 01300, submit the following for each type of product provided under work of this Section: 1. Recycled Content: a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content per unit of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOCKERS A. Lockers: Shall be Geargrid Wall Mount Lockers 24"w x 20"d x 72"h as manufactured by Mid Minnesota Wire & Mfg., Inc. (888-643-6694) or approved equal. Provide twenty-one (21) lockers at Bunker Gear 144. 1. Alternate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements a. Ready Rack; Red Rack B. Frame: Heavy-duty 1 1/4" tubing. C. Side & Back Grids: High strength 1/4" wire. D. Mounting Brackets: 11 ga. steel E. Shelves/Hooks: Two shelves and three apparel hooks per locker. F. Hanging Rod: Provide one (1) Gearhanger horizontal rod at each locker. G. Color: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers to wall and structures provided in configurations indicated on drawings. 3.2 ADJUST & CLEAN A. Clean exposed surfaces and leave free of defects. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 107114 - FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sun screen. 2. Reinforcing, shims, anchors, and attachment devices. 3. Accessories necessary to complete Work. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Manufacturer: Responsible for designing each system, including anchorage to structural system and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts. 2. Provide aluminum decorative screen systems, including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 3. Perimeter Conditions: Allow for installation tolerances, expansion and contraction of adjacent materials, structural deflections, and sealant manufacturer's recommended joint design. 4. Drawings: Diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, or anchorage. 5. Requirements Shown by Details: Establish basic dimension of unit, sight lines and profiles of members. 6. Attachments: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 7. Anchors, Fasteners and Braces: Structurally stressed not more than 50 percent of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 8. Allow for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. 9. Accommodate building structure deflections in connections to structure. B. Thermal Requirements: Accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differential of 180 degrees F without causing buckling, stress on structural elements, reduction of performance or other detrimental effects. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each manufactured product in accordance with Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings indicating elevations, detailed design, dimensions, member profiles, joint locations, arrangement of units, member connections, and thickness of various components. 2. Indicate: 3. Details of special shapes. 4. Reinforcing. 5. Anchorage system. 6. Interfacing with building construction. 7. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 8. Clearly indicate locations of exposed fasteners and joints for Architect's acceptance. C. Samples: Submit samples indicating quality of finish in required colors on alloys used for work, 12 inches long for extrusions and 6 inches square for sheet materials. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit manufacturer's Instructions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with following: 1. Protect finished surfaces to prevent damage. 2. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3. Do not leave coating residue on surfaces. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit warranty stating fluorocarbon (PVDF) coating finish will be free from fading more than 10 percent, chalking, yellowing, peeling, cracking, pitting, corroding or non-uniformity of color, or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's descriptive standards for 20 years and agreeing to promptly correct defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. The Airolite Company, Marrietta, OH 2. Construction Specialties, Cranford, NJ. B. Acceptable Substitutions: 1. Refer to Section 012500. C. Acceptable Profile: 1. Airolite Rectangular Tube Blade Design with Canopy. a. Blade Type: Rectangular Tube. b. Blade Material: Extruded Aluminum (Alloy 6063-T5). c. Blade Material Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) d. Blade Dimension: 1 x 3 inches (25.4 x 76.2 mm). e. Outrigger Material: Aluminum Plate (Alloy 6061-T6). f. Outrigger Material Thickness: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm). g. Top Plate: 0.125 inches (3.18 mm), 0.1875 inches (4.76 mm). h. Fascia: Rectangular Tube 1 x 4 inches (25.4 x 101.6 mm). i. Mounting: Extruded Aluminum Tee as indicated. j. Construction: Mechanically Fastened (standard). 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of 0.081 inch for framing members and 0.050 inch for applied stops and similar components. B. Inserts and Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated assemblies, steel or aluminum, of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication, comply with ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating. C. Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless steel or cadmium plated steel coated with yellow or silver iridescence plating, compatible with materials being fastened. 1. Exposed Locations: Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Concealed Locations: Cadmium plated steel with 0.0005 inch plating thickness and color chromate coated. 3. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is not acceptable. 4. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 5. Exposed Locations: Countersunk flathead fasteners with finish matching item fastened. D. Expansion Anchor Devices: Drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. E. Shims: Non-staining, non-ferrous, type as recommended by system manufacturer. F. Protective Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer, FS TT-P-645. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Take accurate field measurements to verify required dimensions prior to fabrication. 1. Location of exposed joints is subject to Architect's acceptance. 2. Fabricate components in accordance with approved shop drawings. Remove burrs and ease edges. Shop fabricate to greatest extent practicable to minimize field cutting, splicing, and assembly. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas FIXED ALUMINUM SUN SCREENS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107114 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Welding: Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society (AWS). 1. Performed by AWS qualified welders using recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces before finishing; restore mechanical finish. 2.4 FINISH A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work when substrates are ready. 1. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Align assemblies plumb and level, free of warp or twist, aligning with adjacent Work. B. Tolerances: Tolerances are not accumulative. 1. Limit Variations from Plumb and Level: a. 1/8 inch in 20 feet vertically and horizontally. b. 1/4 inch in 40 feet either direction. 2. Jog in Alignment: 1/16 inch maximum. 3. Location: 1/4 inch maximum deviation of any member at any location. C. Provide attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 1. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. 2. Separate dissimilar materials at contract points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with protective coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and electrolytic action. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, and other foreign materials. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107516 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. 1. Include plans, elevations, and attachment details. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 2. Include section, and details of foundation system. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design flagpole assemblies. B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Basic wind speed for Project location is 90 mph. 2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES A. Aluminum Flagpoles: -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. b. Baartol Company. c. Concord Industries, Inc. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. C. Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves. D. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole. E. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 107516 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 foundation. 1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole. F. Cast-Metal Shoe Base: Made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpoles for anchor-bolt mounting; furnish with anchor bolts. 1. Furnish ground spike. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole[ with gold anodic finish]. B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with 5/16-inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless-steel swivel snap hooks. Furnish two per halyard. 2. Plastic Halyard Flag Clips: Made from injection-molded, UV-stabilized, acetal resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards. Furnish two per halyard. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Quiet Halyard" flag clasp by Acme/Lingo Flagpoles LLC. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, clear anodized, 0.7 mil thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. B. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. C. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. D. Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. C. Baseplate: Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation. Install baseplate on washers placed over leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb, tighten retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees away from edges of baseplate. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 109900 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 109900 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous specialty items as listed herein. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Including all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Mobile Hose Storage Rack: Ready Rack model HC-64-2T. B. Stainless Steel Wash Table: At Decon 147, provide 14 gauge stainless steel table with formed splash, integrally welded coved sink, stainless steel leg tubing, stainless steel billet feet and associated connections and miscellaneous items required for complete installation. C. Shower Stall Pan: Shall be Ancor Solid Surface as manufactured by Athenian Marble Corp. (405-787-1300) Surface shall be “GP45” D. Provide semi-permanent shower threshold by Freedom Showers, model #APFSPT36, in Bathroom 118. E. Mail Box: Shall be “The Titan Mailbox” as manufactured by Steel Mailbox Company, 10 gauge steel, 21 ½” D x 10 ½” H x 8 ¼” W; color shall be “Gun Metal.” F. Bicycle Rack: Dero Hoop Rack Heavy Duty in ground, schedule 40 galvanized pipe bike rack as manufactured by Dero Bike Racks (800-298-4915). Provide two hoops with all accessories required for complete in ground installation. G. Air Compressor: Quincy model QT-54. H. Wood handrail by BMC West – #6040 – Oak species in Day 109. I. Handrail brackets by BMC West – #3611 – Satin Nickel finish in Day 109. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. C. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workers in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and fit items to be flush with adjacent construction. B. Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 113100 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Refrigeration appliances. 3. Cleaning appliances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EA 1.4: For appliances indicated, documentation that products are ENERGY STAR rated. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard size. D. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within <Insert number> miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of residential appliance from single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 113100 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLIANCES A. Apparatus Bays: 1. Extractor: UniMac model UWN065K1L 2. Ice Maker: Hoishizaki model F-801MWH-C 3. Ice Bin: Hoshizake model B-500SF 4. SCBA Air Compressor and Fill Station: Bauer model UNICUS III/18H-E3 B. Kitchen/Living Quarters: 1. Range: Wolfe model C60SS-6B-24G-N with extra oven rack, casters, disconnect 2. Dishwasher: KitchenAid #KDFE204ESS 2.2 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122112 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 122112 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. C. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test- response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hunter Douglas. 2. Levolor, Levolor Contract; 3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - ALUMINUM Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122112 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile. 1. Width: 1 inch . 2. Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch. 3. Finish: One color. a. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the reflection of solar energy on the outside-facing slat surface. C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following: 1. Capacity: One blind per headrail. 2. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face. 3. Light-blocking lower back lip. 4. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings. D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of slat; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string. F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod, and the following: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 3. Tilt: Full. H. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. I. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right and left side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise indicated. J. Valance: Two slats. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats. K. Mounting: Wall mounting, permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. C. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - WOOD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122113 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - WOOD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and op- eration. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional. 2. Certificates for Credit MR 6: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that composite wood products comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. (Basis of Design: Parkland Genuine Wood Blinds) 2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com. 4. Bali Blinds. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 2.2 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Wood Slats: Solid wood, radiused slat corners. 1. Width: 2 inch. 2. Color: Oak Hopscotch (25-034). 3. Texture: Smooth. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed PVC with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Col- or: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/8 inch. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS - WOOD Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122113 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Motorized interior solar roller shades. 2. Shade accessories. 3. Control systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for support of window shade brackets and pocket assemblies. 2. Section 092100 – Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board substrate for window shade systems. 3. Section 095100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Shade pockets, pocket closures, and accessories. 4. Section 260000 - Electrical: Connections to electrical motor control system and lighting control system components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) (www.ansi.org and www.ieee.org): 1. C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight. B. Association of Electrical and Medical Imaging Equipment Manufacturers (NEMA) (www.nema.org) WD1- 1999 (R2005) - General Color requirements for Wiring Devices. C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org): 1. D4674-89 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight. 2. G21-96 (2002) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 3. G22-76 (1996) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (www.nfpa.org) 701 (2004) - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 1310 – Class 2 Power Units. 2. 508 – Industrial Control Equipment. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roller Shade System: Ultra-quiet, precision-controlled electronic drive unit contained within head tube, controlling shade movement. B. Controls: Wall mounted. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings; include: a. Shade schedule indicating room number, opening sizes, quantities and key to details. b. Head, jamb and sill details, and mounting dimension requirements for each product and mounting condition. c. One-line wiring system diagrams including connection details and overall arrangement of shades and control locations. 2. Samples: a. Fabric samples showing each specified color. b. Samples showing available color and finish selections for controls. 3. Product Data; include: a. Descriptive literature and details for each product type including materials, finishes, construction, and dimensions of individual components, profiles, and mounting requirements. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 b. Wiring diagrams, details on integration to lighting control systems, AV systems, and building management systems, installation instructions, and operating instructions. c. Current certificates showing that line voltage components of system are either UL Listed or UL recognized. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Indicating compliance with specified fabric properties. 2. Certification: Morton International Laboratory Report for PVC coated fabrics and bacterial and mildew resistance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years’ experience in manufacture of precision-engineered, low-voltage motorized shading systems. 2. Assign responsibility for design, engineering, installation, and performance of window shade system to single manufacturer and their qualified dealers and installers. 3. Furnish shading system and electrical control equipment for complete installation. 4. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified to install and commission specified products by prior factory training, experience, demonstrated performance, and acceptance of any requirement of the manufacturer, subsidiary of the manufacturer, or licensed agent. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Do not deliver shades until concrete, masonry, plaster, painting, and other wet work is complete and dry. C. Deliver shades to project in protective packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening. D. Include installation, programming, and maintenance instructions. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions in installation areas within manufacturer’s recommended limits: 1. Ambient operating temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 0 to 90 percent, non-condensing B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. C. Do not install shade system until building is operating at ambient temperature and humidity ranges that are consistent with those intended for buildings ultimate use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate pre-wiring of system utilizing manufacturer’s approved low voltage wiring to each shade drive location. B. Fabricate shades after obtaining field dimensions for each opening. C. Coordinate construction of surrounding conditions to allow for timely field dimension verification. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s 2 year parts and labor and 8 years limited parts warranty for defective equipment. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to qualified dealer or installer. B. Make replacement parts available for minimum of ten years after date of manufacture. C. Provide 24-hour, 7-day a week technical support to troubleshoot system wiring and aid in system programming. D. Provide on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required. E. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis to include parts, factory labor, and annual training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup completion. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on Sivoia QS by Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.; 7200 Suter Road, Coopersburg, PA 18036-1299 Telephone (800) 523-9466, http://www.lutron.com. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 013300. 1. Any substitutions provided by the contractor shall be reviewed at the contractor’s expense by the architect/interior designer at a rate of $200.00 per hour. 2. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for approval by the design professional a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis. 3. By using pre-approved substitutions, the contractor accepts responsibility and associated costs for all required modifications to circuitry, devices, and wiring. The contractor shall provide complete engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations for the original design highlighted in an alternate color to the engineer for review and approval prior to rough-in. 2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. System Description: 1. Ultra-quiet, precision-controlled electronic drive unit housed inside roller tube, controlling shade movement. 2. Audible noise: Maximum 44 dBA measured 3 feet from electronic drive unit. No audible clicks when motor starts or stops. 3. Allow for maximum of 100 devices including roller shades, skylight shades, drapery tracks, keypads, lighting controls, and power supplies. 4. Allow for 100 zones including roller shades. 5. Operate independently, without use of external group controllers. 6. Control shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.0625 inch throughout entire travel. 7. Include 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade grouping and subgrouping, and system configuration. 8. Integrate directly with skylight shades, roman shades and drapery tracks incorporating electronic drive units. 9. Systems with multiple electronic drive units electronically synchronized to start, stop, and move in unison. B. Grouping: 1. Keypads and contact closure inputs can control any electronic drive unit without separate group controller. 2. System groups and subgroups configured at point of control without rewiring and without access to electronic drive unit. 3. System may contain multiple electronic drive units. 4. Keypads and interfaces able to operate any group or subgroup of electronic drive units. C. Integration: 1. Electronic drive units integrate with lighting controls by same manufacturer without interfaces. D. System Controls: 1. Shades controlled by built-in shade columns on lighting control or by keypad. 2. Electronic drive units, keypads, and lighting controls contain microprocessors, allowing high level programming from any source. 3. System devices, including shades and lighting controls, connected through common communication link. E. System Performance: 1. One-touch control of shades by means of keypad, lighting control, or infrared remote. 2. Capable of stopping within accuracy of 0.125 inch at any point between open and close limits. 3. Store over 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any other position. 4. Presets set by 5-second button push and hold from keypad, lighting control, or handheld remote control. 5. Presets recalled by keypad, contact closure input, infrared receiver, or other lighting control system interface. 6. Open and close limits programmable from electronic drive unit, lighting control, wall-mounted keypad, or handheld remote control. 7. System components electro static discharge protected. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ROLLER WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122413 - 4 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.3 ROLLER SHADES A. Mounting: 1. Brackets to provide symmetrical light gaps of 0.75 inch on each side of shade. 2. Roller shade leveling adjustment allowing leveling adjustment while roller shades are mounted to brackets. 3. Allow side-to-side adjustment up to 0.375 inch on each side while shade is mounted to bracket. 4. Projection adjustment up to 0.50 inch. 5. Provide universal mounting brackets for wall, ceiling, and jamb mounting. B. Shade Tube: Fabric connected to tube using double-sided adhesive strip with minimum of one turn of fabric on roller before working section of fabric starts. C. Fabric: 1. Pass NFPA 701 large and small scale tests. 2. Where applicable, seal shade fabric or treat PVC-coated fabric edges to prevent fraying. 3. Minimum 5 mm “No Growth Contact Area”, tested to ASTM G22 for ATCC6538 (Staphylococcus aureus) and ATCC13388 (Pseudomonas aeroginosa). 4. No growth, tested to ASTM G21 for ATCC9642, ATCC9348, and ATCC9645. 5. Fabric selection: Light-filtering type, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standards. 6. Full wrap, with fabric wrapped around bottom bar. D. Bottom Bar: 1 inch wide x 0.1875 inch thick extruded aluminum enclosed on all sides in thermally sealed pocket across bottom of shading fabric. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Mounted Controls: 1. Low voltage keypads with faceplates attached without visible means of attachments, product color to match NEMA WD1, with backlit buttons. 2. Visible parts ultraviolet color stabilized, tested to ASTM D4674. 3. Type: Five button with raise/lower. B. Power Supplies: 1. Electronic drive units powered with 24 VDC from approved power supply; power supply via NEC Class 2 power source. 2. Provide individual transformer for each electronic drive unit. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform full-function testing on completed assemblies prior to shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Install shades to provide smooth operation. C. Locate controls where directed. D. Connect to power supply and control wiring. E. Connect to lighting control 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust level, projection, and shade centering from mounting brackets. B. Adjust fabric on tube if visibly telescoping. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Shade Type 1: 1. Description: Motorized interior solar control shade. 2. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s standards. END OF SECTION City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414 - 1 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 122414 – BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes manual black-out roller shades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. 1. Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions. 2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure. 2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction. 3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment. 4. Size and location of access to shade operator, motor, and adjustable components. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414 - 2 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full- size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Draper Inc. 2. Hunter Douglas, Inc.; Hunter Douglas Window Fashions Division. 3. Levolor; Levolor-Kirsch Window Fashions; a Newell Rubbermaid Company. 4. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO. 5. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 6. Nysan Shading Systems Ltd. 7. Silent Gliss USA, Inc. 8. Sol-R-Veil. B. Basis-of-Design Shade Cloth Product: 1. Manufacturer: Draper 2. Screen fabric shall be Sheer Weave Series SW7000-V39 “Graphite” C. Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass. 1. Pattern, Style, Color, openness: As selected by Architect. 2. Bottom Hem: Straight. D. Rollers: Electro-galvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material. Provide capacity for two roller shade band(s) per roller, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller. F. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. G. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated; removable design for access. H. Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside. I. Pocket with Ceiling Slot Opening: Six-sided box units for recessed installation; fabricated from formed- steel sheet, extruded aluminum, or wood; with a bottom consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable, continuous metal access panel concealing rollers, brackets, and operating hardware and operators within; capacity for two roller shades overlapping in queued pattern, front and back per pocket, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corner Section: Factory formed and welded. J. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation. K. Audiovisual Light-Blocking Shades: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps when shades are fully closed; fabricated from blackout shade band material with fascia headbox pocket and bottom bar extended and formed for light-tight joints among shade components and between shade components and adjacent construction. 1. Side Channels, Sill Channel or Angle, and Perimeter Seals: Manufacturer's standard design, including sill light seal attached to bottom bar, for eliminating light gaps when shades are closed. 2. Shade Band Retention System: Manufacturer's standard design for guiding shade band material through range of travel and holding shade band flat with edges of material within side channels. L. Mounting: Inside Recessed in ceiling pocket mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes. M. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins : Manufacturer's standard for fixing shade in place, keeping shade band material taut, and reducing light gaps when shades are closed. N. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator. 1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard hand-grip engaged pull. City of Denton Fire Station No. 4 BLACKOUT WINDOW SHADES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 122414 - 3 Issue for Construction 13 June 2016 2. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor. 3. Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. 4. Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 5. Bead Chain: Nickel-plated metal or stainless steel. O. Shade Operation: Manual. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Non-corrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. 2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia, headbox, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal non-corrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As indicated by manufacturer's designations, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123616 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stainless-steel countertops, shelves, and sinks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints. C. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal countertops only after casework has been completed in installation areas. B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction to receive metal countertops by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25. 3. Color: Clear. 4. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123616 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS SHELVES AND SINKS A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over the base cabinets. 1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated. 2. Weld shop-made joints. 3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- thick edge with a 1/2-inchreturn flange. 5. Form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch-thick top edge and 1/2-inch return flange. 6. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch tops containing sinks two ways to provide drainage without channeling or grooving. 7. Where stainless-steel sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory weld into one integral unit. B. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. Weld shop-made joints. Fold down up the front edge a minimum of 3/4 inch; fold up the back edge a minimum of 3 inches. Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed by folding up ends a minimum of 3/4 inch and by welding to upturned front and back edges. C. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inchnominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inchradius. Slope the sink bottoms to outlet without channeling or grooving. Provide continuous butt-welded joints. 1. Provide sizes indicated or manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect. 2. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch diameter. 3. Factory punch holes for fittings. 4. Provide sinks with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces. 5. Provide sinks with integral rims except where located in stainless-steel countertops. 6. Apply 1/8-inch- thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersink surfaces. 2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. C. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back. D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 incheso.c. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas METAL COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123616 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation. B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 incheso.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank) Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123661 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes. 2. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For adhesives and composite wood products, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 4. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. B. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material. C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch- thick, solid surface material. D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 123661 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash. B. Countertops: thick, quartz agglomerate. C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- 3/4-inch- thick, quartz agglomerate. D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company (Corian). 2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Corian Cameo White, model 810. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Caesarstone. 2. Colors and Patterns: Refer to Finish Legend. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Install [backsplashes] [and] [endsplashes] to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 124813 - 1 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Entrance mats in recessed surface-mounted frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated, not less than 6 inch square sections of grate material and 6 inch length of frame material. C. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. D. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of grates and frames not less than half-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories, and field measurements of slab recess to receive frames grates (if applicable). E. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Recycled material data. Provide for any material with recycled content: a. Product information from manufacturer documenting percentages by weight of post- consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. b. Material costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Regional material data. Provide for each product manufactured within 500 miles: a. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of manufacturing and distance from the project site. b. Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating location of product's raw material extraction or harvesting and distance from the project site. c. Material cost for product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats and frames. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials not less than 2% of installed, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Floor mats and frames shall be fabricated free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, and the manufacturer shall offer a 5 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 124813 - 2 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE MATS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. C/S Group. 4. Durable Corporation. 5. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. B. Basis of Design: 1. F2: Shall be Pedimat M1 as manufactured by C/S Entrance Flooring Systems. a. Rail shall be mill finished aluminum made from 70%-90% recycled material. b. Carpet shall be 100% nylon #9305 "Espresso". c. Vinyl shall be #8502 "Brown". 2.2 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.3 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. Fire Station No. 4, Denton, Texas ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Kirkpatrick Architecture Studio 124813 - 3 Issues for Construction 13 June 2016 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Products must be placed on a flat and level substrate, not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet out of plumb, per ACI 302. B. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. 1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of frames. 2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 3. Install frames and treads flush, level and tightly fitted together to prevent tread units from bowing, warping, moving or slipping. Final installation should provide a tightly fitted mat that does not produce excessive movement when being walked on 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. B. Install product when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operations, including painting, are complete. END OF SECTION (This page intentionally left blank)